Author: Johannes Surya

  • Understanding Social Media Engagement to Types and How to Count!

    The term engagement is a term that you need to understand for those of you who often use social media. Especially for those of you who want to get into the world of business on social media. Why is that? This is because engagement is an important aspect for increasing a company’s reach and relevance in the world of digital marketing.

    In addition, engagement is also useful for facilitating profitable relationships between customers and companies. If your social media has unsatisfactory engagement rates, it’s usually difficult for companies to attract customer interest and receive ROI.

    In this article, we will discuss this matter further, so that Readers can better understand what engagement is and how to measure it.

     

    Definition of Engagement

    Engagement is a benchmark tool used to see the level of audience engagement on social media efforts for online businesses. In addition, engagement can be said to be a parameter that can determine whether the content you present is relevant to the followers or followers of the social media account that you are managing.

    Simply put, engagement can also be interpreted as two-way communication, the key of which is feedback. Engagement is the audience’s response to certain messages or content that you post. A good result is when the audience pays attention in the form of a good response.

    The term engagement has become a common matrix for evaluating the performance of social media marketing, but it doesn’t always lead to sales. So, it’s not only the aspects of the number of shares, likes, followers that need to be considered when managing a social media, but this aspect of engagement is no less important.

    For corporate marketing, this engagement is very important because customer activity and engagement is crucial for every social platform to build a positive brand experience . Not only that, companies also need benchmarks to develop meaningful business relationships with customers and new prospects.

    For example, with more than 1.5 billion monthly users, Facebook presence has become a necessity for both online and offline businesses.

    Types of Social Media Engagement

    There are 3 types of interactions that are included in engagement on social media. Here is the explanation:

    1. Conversation

    Conversations that occur after you upload content are included in engagement. Usually this conversation occurs in the comments column or Direct Message (DM).

    2. Amplification

    Sharing or spreading content through Instagram stories and other social media is also included in the engagement category.

    3. Reaction

    The reactions given to the content you post in the form of likes , comments , emoji responses are also included in the engagement category .

    The following are the types of social media engagement as described in the table.

    How to Measure Engagement Rate on Social Media

    Engagement rate is a formula used to measure the amount of audience interaction with the content you create. That way, you will know how effective the content you have created is and whether it is fit for purpose or not. There are several ways to measure engagement on social media, here are the explanations:

    1. Engagement Rate by Reach (ERR)

    ERR is the most popular formula used to calculate engagement. ERR results are obtained from calculating the percentage of the audience that interacts based on the total reach of the content. You can use the engagement rate formula to calculate the interaction ratio for one post.

    There is also an ERR formula as follows:

    ERR = total interactions per post / reach per post x 100

    While the formula for finding the average value of all posts is

    Average ERR = total ERR / total posts

    2. Engagement Rate by Post (ERP)

    ERP is used to measure follower interaction on certain posts. Almost the same as ERR, the difference is that this formula uses posts as the measurement parameter, not reach as in ERR.

    There is also an ERP formula as follows:

    ERP = Total interactions on a post / Total followers* 100

    The formula for calculating the average ERP is

    Average ER by post = Total ER posts / Total posts

    3. Engagement Rate by View (ER View)

    If video is the main content of your account, then ER View is suitable for measuring the engagement you get.

    The ER View formula is as follows:

    ER View = Total video post engagement / Total video views*100

    While the formula for calculating the average ER View is

    Average ER View = Total ER View / Total Posts

    4. Daily Engagement Rate (Daily ER)

    You want to know how often your followers interact with your account every day? You can measure it with the Daily ER, you can also find out which days your followers interact with your account more often, so you can also make strategy adjustments based on these results.

    The formula for calculating the Daily ER is as follows:

    Daily ER = Total interactions one day / Total followers*100

    The formula for calculating the average engagement every day is

    Average Daily ER = Total interactions for X days / (X days *followers) * 100

    The following is a concrete example for measuring social media engagement:

    Let’s assume that in 1 (one month), an account managed by a certain brand publishes 12 content on Facebook, generating 1,200 organic reach.

    Then those 12 contents generate the following response:

    • 10 comments
    • 10 shares
    • 24 likes
    • 5 clicks

    Which means that the total response is 39

    So, to find out the engagement ratio on social media content that month is the following calculation

    (total activity response/ engagement : total views/reach) x 100%

    Based on the example above, (39 : 1,200) x 100 = 3.25%

    So, the engagement rate this month has a value of 3.25%.

    When can you say engagement on social media is good?

    After knowing how to measure engagement rate on social media. You can see if your social media has good engagement or even less. Generally, a good engagement rate has a value between 1% and 5% . However, this figure will of course be different depending on other factors such as niche, audience demographics, to the number of followers .

    The more followers you have, the more difficult it will be to achieve high engagement rates .

    How to Get Engagements

    There are several ways to get good engagement or engagement from the audience. Here’s how you can follow them on your social media.

    1. Post Daily

    Keep your account or your brand on top of your audience’s feed or newsfeed using unique content. Consistent posts will make your brand visible to your audience or followers .

    It can also remind them that you exist and have something interesting. However, you also need to pay attention not to post too much content per day because it will make your account look like spam to users.

    If your account is considered spam , then as a result your posts will be ignored and at worst your account will get a reputation as a useless and unreliable ad spammer . You can consistently post one to three pieces of content to start with.

    2. Using Images

    The next step is to use images. You need to know that images can increase the level of interaction for all social media platforms. Studies have shown that Facebook posts accompanied by images have an 85% (percent) engagement rate, compared to just 4% for other types of posts. Images also increase re-tweets on Twitter by 35 %

    3. Be Personal

    The thing to watch out for is that you don’t sound or look like a press release or a journalist. Show the audience that there are people who are really behind the brand or brand that you are going to sell, so that the audience will believe it later.

    4. Listen

    Engagement goes both ways. You can listen to what people are saying about your brand or brand, then you can respond to criticism in a constructive and positive way.

    If a customer has a valid complaint, don’t just admit it, you need to address it. Then, make sure everyone sees how responsive and humble your brand is and they can wait for another post as a follow-up to that complaint.

    5. Monitoring

    There are several free social media marketing apps used to track shares, tweets , likes and keywords related to your brand .

    Sites such as hootsuite , social mention , addictomatic use various types of crawls and algorithms to be able to determine who sees your social media posts and how they respond to them.

    6. Create Contests and Giveaways

    Next you can create contests and giveaways, this is the best way to increase interest in your brand. You need to know that everyone will love free stuff.

    7. Partnership

    Next, you can do a partnership or partnership. Share links or links and generate original content with other popular brands (most importantly not your competitors’ brands ). That way, it will be a differentiator from your brand and your audience’s taste maker.

    8. Cover All Social Media Bases

    By covering all social media bases, you can produce content for the top social media sites and cross-pollinate your content between them. An example is a more dynamic image-oriented Instagram post link or link to Facebook and Twitter. Like other metrics, engagement or social media engagement cannot be viewed as such in a vacuum.

    You can balance engagement with content marketing and knowing how to use it to do more effective marketing means understanding the systems that lie behind the most popular social media platforms, as well as how people use those systems.

    How to Increase Social Media Engagement

    1. Engagement Analysis

    You can analyze by writing down various aspects on social media, such as the number of followers , the number of comments, and shares obtained in each post , and other elements that must be measured.

    2. Determine the Right Strategy

    Every company has different goals, so the social media strategy that is applied is also different. The strategy applied must be in accordance with the needs of the company and its audience.

    3. Creating Interactive Content

    Over time, customers will not be satisfied with content that is only informative. In order to get customers involved and prioritized, interactive content is the right choice.

    4. Make Customers or Followers Loyal

    Managing followers is very important because the interactions they have on your account will have a big impact on increasing engagement . That means, you can invite followers to be directly involved in any content created to increase engagement.

    You can do live broadcasts, or share stories in the form of quizzes, surveys and features on other social media.

    How to Increase Instagram Engagement

    Currently, almost everyone has a personal Instagram account, apart from that, Instagram is also one of the social media that has great potential to be developed as a business medium.

    However, to develop a business on Instagram, we need to pay attention to engagement. That way we can find out the attachment of our account to followers on Instagram. Here’s how to increase engagement on Instagram:

    1. Consistent in Making Posts

    One way to build the trust and loyalty of followers on Instagram is to post consistently and regularly. This will show followers that you are committed not only to the product that will be sold but also committed to your followers or followers .

    2. Use Hashtags

    If you use hashtags for your posts it will really help to increase engagement on Instagram. Hashtags are useful for sorting and filtering content. However, you also need to pay attention to when you make too many hashtags , they are actually irrelevant. This is because it will make the system think of you as spam.

    3. Use One Kind of Filter

    Using filters is proven to make your posts more interesting. Sticking to one type of filter will give a different look and identity to the images and videos you post. This can leave an impression on your followers .

    4. Post Instagram Stories Regularly

    As we know that Instagram stories only last for 24 hours. Every time you add a new story, your profile picture will get a colored circle and your profile will appear in the first row. So, if you post stories daily, then you will also keep the content fresh for your followers with reminders of new content.

    5. Use Interactive Features

    Another good thing for getting interaction is being able to take advantage of several features such as “ask me questions” , income polls and other features available on Instagram. You can also ask them what content they would like to see or would be interested in.

    6. Conducting Analysis on the Content Created

    The last tip and how to increase Instagram engagement is to analyze the Instagram content that you upload. In this way, you can find out which content has the most responses and is busiest.

    In doing this analysis, you also need to calculate the level of engagement on each post within a certain period of time, for example every month. Apart from that, you also need to record posts and content that have the highest engagement .

    Well, Readers, that’s an explanation about engagement , how to increase it and how to calculate your own engagement .

  • Definition of Energy and Forms of Energy 

    Definition of Energy – Energy is needed for daily activities. For example, when we exercise, of course we feel tired. After feeling tired, we naturally rest, starting from sitting, drinking or even consuming food.

    All of the above activities require energy. The clock moves every second requiring energy from a device we call a battery. Batteries also have to be replaced over time, as they only have energy for a certain amount of time.

    There are many types of energy, ranging from artificial energy to natural energy. Natural energy that can be used by humans is wind, water, oil, light. The greatest light energy today is the sun.

    Solar energy also helps plant processes to photosynthesize, make rain and others. One of man-made energy is nuclear energy. But it takes experts to stabilize the radiation produced. Below will be explained more about energy.

    Definition of Energy

    Energy, in physics, is a unit of capacity to do work or work. There are several forms of energy, kinetic, thermal, electrical, chemical, nuclear, and many other forms of energy. The law of the conservation of energy states that energy can be changed in form, but cannot be created or destroyed.

    The unit of measurement in the International System of Units (SI) for energy is the joule, which is the energy transferred to an object by moving it one meter against a force of one newton.

    All forms of energy are associated with motion, for example, every object has kinetic energy when it moves. A tensioned device such as an arc or spring, even when at rest, has the potential to create motion.

    It also contains potential energy because of its configuration. Similarly, nuclear energy is potential energy because it results from the configuration of the subatomic particles in the atomic nucleus.

    Common forms of energy include kinetic energy from a moving object, potential energy stored by an object’s position in a gravitational, electric or magnetic force field, elastic energy stored by stretching a solid object, chemical energy released when fuel burns, radiant energy carried by light, and heat energy due to the temperature of an object.

    Mass and energy are closely related. Because of the mass-energy equivalence, any object that has mass when at rest is called rest mass. Rest mass also has an equivalent amount of energy which is called rest energy, and any additional energy of any kind that an object gains on top of that rest energy will increase the object’s total mass just as much as it increases its total energy. For example, after heating an object, the increase in its energy can in principle be measured as a small increase in mass, with a fairly sensitive scale.

    As previously discussed, living organisms need energy to stay alive, such as the energy that humans get from food and oxygen. Human civilization needs energy to function, which it gets from energy sources such as fossil fuels, nuclear fuel, or renewable energy.

    Earth’s climate and ecosystem processes are driven by the radiant energy the Earth receives from the Sun and the geothermal energy contained within the Earth.

    Types of Energy 

    Types of energy can be categorized into two broad categories, namely kinetic energy or energy of moving objects and potential energy or stored energy. These are the two basic forms of energy. Here are some types of energy namely heat energy, light energy, chemical energy, nuclear energy, electrical energy, motion energy, sound energy, elastic energy and gravitational energy.

    1. heat energy

    Thermal energy is the energy that comes from a substance whose molecules and atoms vibrate faster due to an increase in temperature. The molecules and atoms that make up matter are in motion all the time.

    When a substance is heated, the increase in temperature makes these particles move faster and bump into each other. Thermal energy is energy that comes from a substance that is heated. The hotter a substance, the more its particles move, and the higher its heat energy.

    Examples of heat energy that exists in everyday life are the warmth from the sun, a cup of hot cocoa, baking a cake in the oven, and heating the body from a heater. Hot chocolate has heat energy from its vibrating particles.

    When you pour cold milk into hot chocolate, some of this energy is transferred from the chocolate to the particles in the milk. Similarly, when you touch a hot object, heat energy is transferred from the object to your skin.

    2. chemical energy 

    Chemical energy is stored in the bonds that link atoms to other atoms and molecules to other molecules. Because chemical energy is stored, chemical energy is included in the form of potential energy.

    When a chemical reaction takes place, stored chemical energy is released. Heat is often produced as a by-product of a chemical reaction; this heat generated is called an exothermic reaction.

    Chemical energy is the most widely used type of energy in the world, because it is very important for the existence of humans and nature. Here are some examples of chemical energy used for human life, such as the food we eat contains stored chemical energy. When the bonds between atoms in food loosen, chemical reactions occur, and new compounds are created.

    The energy generated from these reactions keeps us warm, helps us move, and allows us to grow. Different types of food store different amounts of energy. Dry wood contains stored chemical energy. When burning wood in a fireplace, chemical energy is released and converted into heat energy and light energy.

    3. nuclear energy 

    Nuclear energy comes from the atomic nucleus. Energy released by nuclear fusion fuses together or nuclear fission. Nuclear plants use the nuclear fission of a radioactive element called uranium to generate electricity. Atoms are the particles that make up every object in the universe, consisting of neutrons, protons and electrons. The elements that make up the atom contain a nucleus, from which nuclear energy originates.

    Nuclear energy is released from atoms through Nuclear Fusion and Fission. Nuclear fusion, when atomic nuclei are fused or fused together, is how the sun generates energy. Nuclear fission, when the atomic nucleus is split. This is the method used by nuclear plants to generate electricity. The fuel for nuclear energy is uranium.

    Uranium is a radioactive element that was formed when the earth was first created. It occurs naturally in certain rock types. Uranium is one of the few elements that easily splits open, so it is used as a fuel by nuclear power plants. Although uranium can be found all over the world, it is still a non-renewable energy source.

    4. electrical energy 

    Electrical energy is a type of kinetic energy caused by moving electric charges. The amount of energy depends on the speed of the charge, the faster the charge is moving, the more electrical energy it carries. Some examples of electrical energy are car batteries, chemical reactions produce electrons that have the energy to move in an electric current. These moving charges provide electrical energy to the circuits inside the car.

    During a thunderstorm, lightning is an example of electrical energy, what we can see is electricity in the atmosphere being released. Electric eels also generate electrical energy, which they use to defend against predators and to electrocute their prey. Electric eels can generate up to 600 volts of power, five times the amount of power that a standard wall outlet can provide.

    5. light energy 

    Light energy is a form of electromagnetic radiation of different wavelengths, which is visible to the human eye. Light energy is a type of kinetic energy. Light energy propagates in the form of waves. This energy is so fast in fact that nothing travels faster than the speed of light. The speed of light can go as fast as 300,000 km per second.

    Light energy is formed because light is made up of photons, which are like tiny packets of energy. When the atoms of an object heat up, photons are produced from the movement of the atoms. The hotter the object, the more photons it generates. Examples of light energy are stars, lamps or lasers. 

    6. motion energy

    Motion or mechanical energy is energy stored in moving objects. Actual energy of motion is the sum of the kinetic and potential energy in an object that is used to do work. Work is when a force acts on an object and causes it to move, change shape or position, or do something physically. When pushing the door open, ‘work’ has been done on the door, causing it to open.

    Also, let’s say you have an iron hammer and you want to use it to drive a nail into a piece of wood on the floor. The iron hammer itself has no kinetic energy, but has some potential energy due to its weight. To do the work of driving a nail into a piece of wood, you must first lift the hammer to increase the hammer’s potential energy. Next, you have to use force to move it downwards at high speed to hit the spikes, so it now has kinetic energy.

    7. sound energy 

    Sound energy is the movement of energy through a substance in waves. Sound energy propagates in the form of waves. Unlike light energy, sound cannot travel through a vacuum, because there are no atoms to transmit vibrations. Sound energy is produced when a force causes an object or substance to vibrate.

    The energy is then transferred through the substance in the form of waves, which are called sound waves. Sound can be transmitted by solids, liquids, and gases, because such media have atoms to transmit vibrations. Some examples of sound energy in everyday life are clapping, singing or speaking, playing musical instruments and others. 

    8. elastic energy

    Elastic energy is a form of potential energy, because it is stored in the bonds between atoms in an object or substance when it is under pressure for a while. This pressure can be caused by the object being stretched or pinched. Elastic energy is stored in the bonds between atoms in an object or substance. These bonds absorb energy when stressed, and release energy when relaxed.

    Forces acting on an object can cause it to deform temporarily, such as when stretching a rubber band, or pressing a squishy ball with your hands. When this occurs, elastic energy may be stored within the object, ready to be released when the object returns to its original shape. Some examples of elastic energy are springs, sponges and catapults. 

    9. gravitational energy 

    Gravity is a force that tries to pull two objects towards each other. Earth’s gravity is what keeps things on the ground and what causes things to fall. Earth has gravity, useful for holding everything close to the planet. Trees, water, animals, buildings and the air we breathe are all held here by gravity.

    The planets, their moons and the stars in the universe have gravity. Even our own body has gravity. Earth’s gravity is so much stronger than our own that we don’t notice the gravity that our bodies have. Black Hole or black hole has the highest gravitational pull.

    Energy Function 

    Energy is the main requirement for living things in carrying out activities. Nature produces a lot of energy that can be utilized by humans, such as the sun, sea and others. Energy has many functions for various fields. Starting from the perspective of classical mechanics, several mechanical formulas have been developed using energy. The concept of energy in classical mechanics is generally useful for modern physics.

    In biology, energy has a role for biological systems, from the biosphere to the smallest living things. The movement of energy occurs in the biosphere, the layer of the earth where most life exists. Starting from the root system to the deepest trenches in the ocean. Energy has a role in the growth and development of cells of an organism, including humans. 

    How to save energy 

    An easy way to save energy is to make small changes to your daily habits and do some basic maintenance routines. Here are some ways to save energy that you can do at home.

    1. Wash clothes at once: when washing clothes, always try to wash clothes in one batch. Washing machines are designed to be able to wash a lot of clothes. By washing clothes at the same time you can save your electricity and energy.
    2. Clean electronics: every electronics work more efficiently when they are clean from dust and dirt. If the tool works more efficiently, it does not require a lot of energy.
    3. Do not open the refrigerator and oven for too long: Always try to close the oven when cooking. Don’t stand in front of the fridge for too long, the longer the fridge is open, the more energy it takes to keep food cold.
    4. Open the window blinds: Letting sunlight into the house will benefit the room. The room is not damp, there is no need to turn on the lights, moreover, sunlight can warm up a cold room.
    5. Turn off the lights: Turn off the lights when you’re not in the room. Light bulbs waste 95% of energy and give off heat. Use it sparingly, or replace it with a lamp that uses a sensor so it’s much more economical.
    6. Don’t take a long shower: Humans do need a shower to clean their bodies, but taking a long shower especially using a shower can consume 2.5 gallons per minute.
    7. Unplug unused plugs: Charging a cellphone or laptop battery is indeed a primary need. However, if you don’t unplug chargers that are not in use because they will draw power continuously.
    8. Use sleep or hibernate mode: If you are using a laptop, and leave it in screen saver mode, it’s best to put it in sleep or hibernate mode. That way the electrical energy used becomes more efficient.

     

     

  • Definition of Alternative Energy and Its Sources and Benefits

    Definition of Alternative Energy – Every human life cannot be separated from energy, so that in carrying out their daily activities, humans will always be side by side with energy. It is unimaginable how it would be if there was no energy in human life, most likely it would be very difficult for humans to maintain their lives. The relationship between humans has actually been going on for a long time, it’s just that the energy used by humans is always developing.

    Basically, the energy used by humans has actually been provided by nature, so that humans themselves can get it directly. However, some energy requires more effort to obtain. In addition, not all energy in nature can be renewed or you could say that some energy has a limited lifespan, but there is also renewable energy.

    Not only renewable and non-renewable energy, the energy used by humans must not be used excessively because it can damage natural conditions. If natural conditions start to break down, it will be difficult for humans to get maximum energy because the climate and weather are also changing. Deterioration of the earth’s condition can also cause the energy in the earth to decrease.

    Therefore, along with the times, humans are starting to realize that excessive use or use of energy is not good, so energy use must be in moderation. Not only that, some people are starting to become aware of getting used to using alternative energy. This alternative energy can be used to fulfill daily activities. Even though it is only alternative energy, the quality of energy ii can be used optimally.

    Alternative energy is often known as renewable energy. Basically this alternative energy serves to replace conventional fuels. Therefore, to obtain alternative energy, human intervention is needed so that renewable energy can be used optimally. So, to explore what alternative energy is and its benefits, Readers, you can read this article to the end.

    Definition of Alternative Energy

    Basically this alternative energy plays a very important role in the sustainability of humans and the earth. With the maximum use of alternative energy, the current condition of our earth can be felt by the next generation. However, it is very unfortunate that only a few people use alternative energy and more often use fossil energy, such as oil and coal to meet their daily needs.

    Alternative energy is energy as a substitute for fossil fuel energy. This is in line with the definition of energy in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) alternative energy is energy that does not come from petroleum, for example hydropower, geothermal, nuclear, solar, wind, waves, biomass, natural gas, peat, coal, and natural gas.

    Some people who are already aware of the dangers of non-renewable energy that can damage or disrupt the sustainability of the earth and humans, they are starting to abandon non-renewable energy. Quoted from the Encyclopedia Britannica that alternative energy sources are energy obtained through energy sources that are renewable (renewable), recoverable, or eternal. For example rivers, sea tides, biomass, biogas, sun, and river flow.

    The Purpose of Forming Alternative Energy

    Basically, the main purpose of creating alternative energy is to replace energy derived from fossil fuels. Therefore, alternative energy began to be developed by humans, either in groups of people or groups in the form of companies. The large number of people who are starting to develop alternative energy means that there are also more and more people who are aware of the dangers of non-renewable energy.

    For some companies, the goal of making alternative energy is to make a profit because the alternative energy will be traded. In addition to getting profits, these companies have participated in preserving the environment.

    For ordinary people, making alternative energy aims to keep the environment they live in to stay healthy. If the environment is healthy, then the people in that environment are also healthy too and the energy can be used continuously because it is renewable.

    Alternative Energy Sources

    1. Hot Sun

    For human life solar energy is the most important energy. The existence of the sun on this earth is needed by humans, even plants and animals also need energy from the sun. Solar energy that has entered the earth must be returned again so that global warming does not occur. Global warming can occur due to activities that use non-renewable energy excessively.

    On the other hand, solar energy can be used as an alternative energy source so that the environment remains healthy and people will be more enthusiastic about living their lives. In addition, an environment will not be damaged quickly, so that the next generation can still feel the pleasures of life on earth.

    2 Water

    As many people know that water is needed by the human body because without water, we will experience dehydration. In addition, water can also be used to make alternative energy because it can replace fossil fuel energy. However, new water can be used as alternative energy as long as it is in large quantities. If it is still in small quantities, it will be difficult to make water as an alternative energy.

    Several countries have started to develop water into electrical energy, even Indonesia already has dams that are large enough to be used as a source of electrical energy. If we can’t turn water into maximum electrical energy, then we can use just enough water.

    3. Geothermal

    The existence of geothermal occurs because of an event that is caused because there are many radioactive particles that come from inside the rock. For some people, they don’t know where the geothermal energy comes from. Geothermal comes from magma. Magma itself is an outer core of the earth made of rock with very hot temperatures.

    The location of geothermal is at a depth of approximately 6,400 km from the earth’s surface. In addition, geothermal energy can be said to be energy that originates from within the earth. Even though geothermal energy is hot enough, it can still be used for renewable energy sources. In general, geothermal energy is used as energy to generate electricity through turbines.

    4. Biomass

    Biomass is a material obtained through plants or plants, either directly or indirectly and in large quantities can be used as energy. Sources of biomass do not only come from plants, but can also come from animal waste. Biomass is also known by another term, namely phytomass or natural resources. There are several things that fall into the category of biomass sources, such as water hyacinth, giant seaweed, sawdust, wood chips, rice husks, straw, kitchen waste, animal dung, and others.

    These sources of biomass if left too long can cause more and more piles of waste, and can even cause global warming. Therefore, we can maximize the sources of biomass to be used as an alternative energy source or renewable energy. By using this biomass, human life will last longer because the environment will be healthy and not easily damaged.

    5. Wind

    Wind is a moving air caused by differences in pressure on the earth’s surface. The movement of wind from high areas to low areas, so that it can cause the air temperature in an area to be different. We can feel this difference in temperature at night and during the day.

    Wind is very much needed in human life, even almost every activity carried out by humans requires wind. If the wind can be maximized properly, it can be used as an alternative energy source. Some countries have made wind an alternative energy source, such as the United States. In general, wind is used as an alternative source of electricity or often known as wind power generation.

    6. Nuclear

    The next alternative energy source is nuclear. Nuclear is a substance related to the nucleus or atomic energy. Some countries in the world, have used nuclear to serve as a renewable energy source. One country that has developed and used this energy source is Japan. This is done because nuclear can prevent the occurrence of the greenhouse effect, so that global warming can be prevented properly.

    Nuclear energy is used as a source of electrical energy. There is no doubt about the ability of nuclear energy to convert it into electrical energy. This can be proven by 1 gram of radioactive substance can generate electrical energy of around 50 thousand kWh per hour.

    Examples of Alternative Energy

    1. Solar Panels

    As many people already know, the sun is the main source of geothermal energy. Therefore, some of the energy sources that exist on earth come from the sun. The radiation emitted by the sun can actually be used as a source of electrical energy and heat energy. To convert solar radiation into electrical energy, usually the tool used is a solar panel.

    Solar panels are able to convert solar radiation into electrical energy because they contain a series of photovoltaic cells or, if interpreted, are “electric light”. This alternative energy that comes from solar panels can be used in any object, such as electric boats, electric cars, electric lights, and so on. However, all of these objects must be placed with solar panels, if there is no solar panel, then solar energy cannot be converted into electrical energy.

    2. Windmills

    As the name suggests, this tool can be used as alternative energy, namely converting wind energy into electrical energy or kinetic energy into mechanical energy. The windmill will be connected to a new generator engine that can be converted into electrical energy. In simple terms, the windmill will rotate, then the turbine or generator for electricity will move. After the generator is moving, the electrical energy can be used.

    One country that has developed this wind energy is the Netherlands. The Netherlands has long been using windmills to get electricity. Therefore, the Netherlands is also known as the “country of windmills”.

    3. Geothermal

    Alternative energy derived from heat energy not only comes from solar heat, but geothermal energy can also be used as an alternative energy source. Geothermal or known as Geothermal can be used as electrical energy. Even research conducted in Iceland revealed that geothermal energy has the ability to multiply electrical energy up to ten times.

    In simple terms, the workings of hot steam are converted into electrical energy, such as a source of hot steam originating from below the earth’s surface to be drilled, then the hot steam that comes out of the drilled hole is then filtered and used to drive a generator, so that electrical energy can be used.

    4. Hydropower

    After the example of alternative energy from wind, now is an example of alternative energy derived from water or known as hydropower . In this example you can see it in a reservoir that is directed through a water pipe to go to a turbine. After the turbine moves due to the abundant amount of water, it will produce electrical energy. Electrical energy with hydropower is also called a Hydroelectric Power Plant (PLTA).

    Several regions in Indonesia have used water energy to be converted into electrical energy through reservoirs, such as the Jatiluhur reservoir in Purwakarta, the Asahan reservoir in North Sumatra, the Saguling reservoir in the West Bandung area, and so on.

    5. Biodiesel

    Biodiesel is a fuel that can be used as a substitute for alternative energy. Biodiesel is derived from renewable sources, such as animal fat or vegetable oil. Biodiesel derived from vegetable oil will go through several processes, such as lipid transesterification. This process needs to be done to change the base oil into esters by removing free fatty acids.

    After going through that process, biodiesel can be used as fuel. Basically the workings of biodiesel are almost the same as the workings of diesel derived from diesel (fossil fuel). If we frequently use biodiesel, then we have reduced the use of fossil fuels, so that we can also maintain environmental sustainability on earth and human health.

    Benefits of Alternative Energy

    Alternative energy has several benefits that can be felt, including:

    1. Reducing Dependence on Fossil Fuel Energy

    As previously discussed, if fossil fuel energy will run out in time and can damage the earth. What’s more, fossil fuel energy is overused. Therefore, by using alternative energy, we have reduced our dependence on fossil fuel energy, so that humans can feel a more beautiful environment.

    2. Environmentally Friendly

    The next benefit that can be felt when using alternative energy is that the quality of the environment will be maintained or you could say it doesn’t pollute the environment. This is because almost all alternative energy is environmentally friendly and does not produce excessive pollution.

    3. No Scarcity Happens

    Almost all alternative energy sources do not experience scarcity or can be renewed, so humans do not have to worry about running out of alternative energy sources. With these benefits, the economy can run well.

    Conclus ion

    It is time for alternative energy to be used by every human being. This needs to be done so that the earth’s condition is not quickly damaged, so that the next generation can live longer. Alternative energy or renewable energy is indeed very difficult to implement because almost all humans are used to using fossil fuel energy. To realize the importance of using alternative energy, we need to realize that alternative energy has many benefits in our daily lives.

     

  • Understanding Endurance, Benefits, and How to Train It

    Definition of Endurance – Physical fitness must always be considered, maintained, and maintained. If our physical condition is strong, then we will be able to carry out various daily activities smoothly. A person who has a good level of physical fitness will be able to do activities well, for quite a long time, and not experience excessive physical fatigue.

    DEFINITION OF ENDURANCE

    What is meant by endurance is the ability to resist fatigue and quickly recover from fatigue. Someone who has good endurance will be able to carry out activities that are longer continuously. Enhancing the body’s resistance properly can also delay the onset of fatigue.

    More simply, the notion of endurance is the ability of living things to mobilize themselves to remain active for long periods of time. Endurance is also related to the body’s resistance, namely the ability to fight, fight, survive, or recover from fatigue. In other words, endurance is a person’s ability to move the whole body with moderate to fast tempo and frequency, for a relatively long time, and without experiencing severe fatigue or pain.

    Having good endurance can be one of the main assets that greatly contribute to increasing the ability of various sports that prioritize endurance in the game. There are many sports that rely on endurance as one of their main capital, for example running, martial arts, basketball, soccer, and other similar sports. Endurance is very useful for athletes so they can play well on the field for a long time.

    Endurance can be divided into 2, namely muscular endurance and cardiovascular endurance. Muscular endurance is a person’s ability to make his muscles contract for a relatively long time, continuously, while carrying a certain load, while cardiovascular endurance is a person’s ability to use the lungs, heart and other circulatory systems effectively and efficiently to carry out work continuously, for quite a long time, and also with high intensity.

    The key to endurance is processing oxygen, the body needs oxygen as a material to produce energy. Oxygen must be continuously included or distributed to all organs or all body tissues that require energy. Each sport definitely requires a certain amount of energy. Endurance or endurance has several other names, namely anaerobic capacity, aerobic power, and also vitamaxsima. Endurance is also symbolized using the VO2max symbol, the units used are liters per minute or cc/kg/BB/ min

    BENEFITS OF TRAINING ENDURANCE

    1. Improve self-fitness

    Practicing endurance is the same as increasing fitness. This can happen because the exercises done to train endurance are also the same as exercises to improve fitness. For example, doing jogging, gymnastics, and or other sports activities on a regular basis can certainly help make your body more fit.

    2. More difficult to tire

    Doing endurance exercises can also make yourself more energetic and less tired. This can happen because by doing endurance training, it will make yourself accustomed to doing physical activity so that it makes you have more energy when compared to when you are not doing physical activity.

    The analogy is, for example, if you are used to doing gymnastics or workouts in the morning before going to work, then your body will have warmed up, your respiratory system will get better, and your body will feel lighter because calories have been burned previously through gymnastics or work-out activities. the outs. However, this will be felt if you do it regularly and continuously.

    3. Reducing the risk of heart disease

    Heart disease is a degenerative disease or it can also be called an old disease. Old disease is a disease as a long-term effect that is obtained in old age as a result of activities in the past. A person can get heart disease usually caused by not having a healthy lifestyle in his youth, not maintaining a good diet, and consuming unhealthy foods as well. By doing sports activities to maintain endurance, it will help you to reduce the risk of heart disease in old age. This can happen because you are used to training the heart to work while reducing fats in the blood vessels that can hinder heart performance.

    4. Lowering bad cholesterol levels

    There are two types of cholesterol in our bodies, namely good cholesterol and bad cholesterol. This bad cholesterol is commonly called LDL or Low Density Lipid which means Low Density Lipid. Bad cholesterol or LDL can cause various types of diseases such as heart attacks, gout, pain in the joints, strokes, and so on.

    By doing regular and sustainable body strength training, you can help your body get rid of bad cholesterol while reducing the risk of developing these scary diseases.

    5. Control blood pressure

    Human blood pressure can be divided into two, namely hypertension or high blood pressure and hypotension or low blood pressure. Both types of blood pressure, both hypertension and hypotension, are not good things for the body.

    High blood pressure or commonly called hypertension usually occurs when flowing blood pushes very hard against the arteries which causes the heart to have to work very hard to pump blood throughout the body. If this continues continuously, it can cause various types of diseases such as heart disease and stroke.

    Not only physically, maintaining endurance data also has a positive effect on mental health, including for people with hypertension. According to the American Heart Association (AHA), exercise is recognized to reduce stress levels in a person. There is also stress can make blood pressure rise temporarily. If this situation occurs continuously it will cause permanent hypertension.

    Low blood pressure or hypotension is a condition in which blood pressure is much lower than it should be. It can occur both as a symptom of a variety of conditions or as a condition on its own. If blood pressure is too low, eating can cause blood flow to vital organs, especially the brain and kidneys to be obstructed or reduced.

    Practicing endurance with light exercise such as leisurely walks, light workouts, yoga, and so on will help in dealing with low blood pressure and make blood pressure more stable than usual.

    HOW TO TRAIN ENDURANCE

    Endurance or body resistance can be maintained and increased through various kinds of physical exercise. Proper exercise can maintain and increase endurance well. So what are the right types of physical exercise to increase endurance?

    1. Muscle Exercise

    Muscle training or basically also known as muscle endurance training is the ability to fight or withstand heavy loads in a relatively long period of time. In order to increase the endurance of the muscles, the usual forms of exercise are sit-ups, pull-ups, push-ups, planks, and also squats .

    It can be seen from the examples of exercises that have been mentioned, apart from maintaining endurance, these forms of muscle training can also be used to measure and train muscle strength and endurance. For example , pull-ups will have a good impact on the arm and shoulder muscles, squats can help increase the endurance of the thigh muscles, while  push-ups can train the strength of the arm and chest muscles.

    2. Jogging , running, and light walking

    Jogging or running is a light sport that can be done by anyone, anywhere, and anytime. Jogging or running within 15-30 minutes and done regularly every day can increase endurance and train leg muscles.

    Meanwhile, running long distances at a slow tempo or walking leisurely for long distances can also provide benefits for increasing endurance and improving cardiovascular fitness.

    3. Cycling

    Currently, cycling is becoming a trend in various circles, both children and adults. The right cycling activity can have a very good impact on body fitness and health. Cycling can train stamina and maintain and increase heart strength. In addition, cycling can also strengthen and train leg muscles.

    4. Aerobics

    Doing high-intensity aerobic exercise can have a good impact on heart muscle training and also increase stamina. This can happen because when doing aerobics, almost all the muscles in the body move.

    5. Fartlek

    Fartlek or also known as speed play is one of the various forms of exercise to increase endurance. This exercise is a combination of different forms or different types of running. Whether it’s slow running, fast running, twisting fast running, and also jumping.

    Fartlek also has benefits besides training endurance, fartlek  also has a function to increase agility, train reflex responses, train muscles, and help synchronize the eyes, brain, and movement.

    6. Up and Down Bench

    Up and down the bench as the name suggests this activity is useful for maintaining endurance by just getting up and down from the bench. The items needed are only a bench, but adjusted to your height. Movement up and down the bench can be done in the following way:

    1. The bench is placed on a flat surface such as the floor
    2. You stand in front of the bench.
    3. Then, you start up on the bench and then down again.
    4. Then, up again and down again.
    5. Make movements up and down the bench, adjusting to the abilities you have

    This activity is also useful for practicing breathing and increasing the strength of the thigh, calf and leg muscles.

    7. Circuit Training

    Circuit training is an exercise that is carried out by making several training posts. Each post has a form of training with a specific purpose and function. The main purpose of this training is basically to combine various forms of exercise that are useful for improving various physical components. Circuit training activities are carried out in stages and continuously.

    Circuit training activities can be done in various places, for example in the wild, in the field, or just using tools for weight training. Here are some things to consider in circuit training activities :

    • The distance to be covered .
    • Weights or training weights.
    • Light and heavy variations of each post.
    • Involvement of various muscles (upper body muscles, lower body muscles, small muscles, large muscles).
    • The time spent doing the movement or exercise.
    • Focus on the physical component to be trained (eg agility or speed).
    • The number of repetitions of the exercise.

    The following is an example of a circuit training form with multiple post objectives:

    1. Post 1 warm up for 10 minutes
    2. Post 2 does skipping exercises (playing jump rope) for 40 seconds.
    3. Heading 3 did a shuttle run (run back and forth) with a distance of 5 meters seven times.
    4. Pos 4 sit ups 20 times.
    5. Pos 5 push up 30 times.
    6. Post 6 back up 30 times.
    7. Pos 7 squat jump 30 times.
    8. Post 8 squat thrust 30 times.
    9. Post 9 cools down for 10 minutes

    8. Training intervals

    Interval training is a form of exercise to maintain endurance by requiring several factors. The following factors are needed in interval training :

    1. Sets the distance to be traveled. For example 100, 300, or 600 meters according to ability.
    2. Determines the number of repetitions of the run. For example, 300 meters six times.
    3. Set the tempo or rhythm of running speed (seconds / minutes).
    4. Set rest times or intervals. The rest time between running repetitions is set for seconds or minutes. Rest can be done by controlling your breath, walking slowly, jogging, or light exercise.

    9. Swimming

    Swimming is a sport that is quite popular with many people from all walks of life, both children and adults because it is fun and can be used as an activity for refreshing. Besides being fun, swimming also has various benefits for health and fitness, one of which is to increase stamina.

    When swimming, the whole body will work to fight the water. This high resistance will be useful for training muscles and increasing stamina in the body to become stronger.

    10. Yoga/Pilates

    And the last exercise recommendation is yoga or pilates. Movements performed in yoga or pilatee activities generally aim to help train balance. However, from these goals it is possible that yoga or pilates are also effective for maintaining and increasing your immunity level.

    Various kinds of yoga or pilates movements not only require physical flexibility but also require qualified physical strength. If you are interested in doing endurance training but feel it is too difficult, heavy, or lazy to try the nine sports mentioned, then try practicing yoga or pilates because these exercises are more concise, can be done anytime, and anywhere.

    Enough of the summary regarding the meaning of endurance , its benefits, and also how to train it. Thank you for visiting, I hope this article is useful and can help you.

     

  • Understanding Empathy: Traits, Factors, and Facts of Empathy

    What is Empathy? Empathy is a mental state, in which a person feels the same thoughts, feelings, or circumstances as others.

    Many times people hear the word ’empathy’, but don’t know the exact definition. Empathy and sympathy are often equated, even considered the same, even though these two things have their own characteristics. What’s that like? Let’s get to know empathy through the following explanation.

    A. Definition of Empathy

    To be able to better understand the feelings experienced by oneself and others, Readers can also read the book Series Me and My Family: My Various Feelings.

    This sense of empathy can arise as the ability to be self-aware when dealing with the feelings of others, then act to help them. Oneself will understand them, from their point of view. This feeling is very important in building relationships or establishing relationships with other people.

    Then according to Chaplin, the notion of empathy is the ability to project one’s own feelings on an event, a natural object or aesthetic work and the realization and understanding of other personal needs and suffering.

    B. History of Empathy

    The term empathy was originally used by an aesthetic critic to understand another person’s perspective. EB ‘Motor mimicry’ as another term used by Titchener, who is an American psychologist.

    He interprets it from physically impersonating someone else’s burden, then sharing that feeling. This is because humans as social beings need each other as discussed in the Empathy Generation book.

    C. Definition of Empathy According to Experts

    1. M. Umar and Ahmadi Ali

    Empathy is defined as a tendency that a person feels to feel something someone else would, if he were in that position.

    2. Patton

    Establishing a close relationship, so that you can understand other people’s feelings requires time and process. Even though it is not easy, one has to do it for the sake of having compassion and caring for the person it is aimed at. “Posing yourself in someone else’s shoes.”

    3. Chaplin

    Able to project a sense of self onto an event or object, aesthetic work and realization of needs, to the suffering of others.

    4. Al Barry and Partanto

    The attitude of activeness of the muscles or feelings experienced by humans when facing objects or humans, then unites with them at a certain time and holds a response when accompanying them.

    5. EB Titchener

    Feelings that arise as a result of physical imitation, which is ultimately able to create the same feelings.

    D. Development of Empathy

    1. Emotional Empathy

    Babies aged zero to one year will usually cry when they see another baby crying. Hoffman calls it global empathy because one cannot distinguish between oneself and the world.

    2. Egocentric Empathy

    In toddlerhood or under the age of five, a child begins to be able to distinguish that grief is not his, the distress that is befalling other people, not his own.

    Their cognitive development is immature, but instinctively they will try to help even though they don’t know for sure whether the actions taken are appropriate.

    3. Cognitive Empathy

    Beginning at the age of six, a child begins to see things from other people’s perspectives. This type does not require emotional communication, such as crying. Whether shown or not, a child has begun to understand.

    4. Abstract Empathy

    When childhood will end at the age of 10-12 years, empathy is not only aimed at people who are known or often met. Groups of people who have never met before can also be the target of empathy.

    E. Characteristics of Empathy

    1. Ability to Understand Others

    The person’s behavior is multifactorial, influenced by many things. When you see someone feeling a certain emotion, you will naturally feel the same way yourself. Being able to read situations and understand what other people think and feel is also discussed in Nunchi’s book which calls it the sixth sense.

    This is useful for daily interactions, so that you can relate to others.

    The conversation becomes more connected, the other person becomes happy. However, there were times when a person couldn’t understand other people’s feelings. It’s not that they don’t care, they just don’t understand.

    2. Understand Sign Language

    Why is sign language so important? A person’s emotions can be seen through their gestures, so their movements can speak.

    For example, when someone is happy, they will look more cheerful and enthusiastic, while when they are sad, they will tend to be gloomy and look lethargic when doing activities.

    Intonation and other non-verbal ways can be used to find out their emotions.

    3. Role Performed

    Empathy will manifest a reality and action on the feelings that are felt. However, not everyone can respond to other people’s feelings. When sad, there are those who feel sorry for them and listen to their outpourings, there are also those who ignore them and leave.

    When the listeners returned, only apologies came out and they reasoned that they couldn’t stand listening to sad stories. Or, not at all, just don’t care and bring up old events.

    4. Understanding Yourself

    If you continue to face strong negative feelings, the impact is quite severe emotional exhaustion. Not everyone is also taught to accept emotions. For example, boys shouldn’t be crybaby, crying will make themselves look weak, or being concerned with emotions is a waste of time and useless.

    In the end, they become unaware of their own feelings. The feelings that are being felt are difficult to understand. If you can’t understand yourself, empathy that has a positive impact will not appear.

    Emotions towards feeling sad or happy are commonplace. When angry or feeling a problem, you can cry yourself or tell others about it. As long as it doesn’t drag on. “Our emotions are our own.”

     

    5. Doesn’t Mean Dissolving In Other People’s Problems

    Understanding feelings or feeling the same way as someone, that’s okay. However, it is not permissible to interfere or deal with the problem too deeply, so that empathy still has certain limitations.

    F. Empathy Factor According to Siwi (1992)

    1. Parenting

    In fact, 98% of humans are born with the potential to empathize. The rest are people with psychopathic tendencies.

    The parenting style of parents who instill empathy in their children from a young age. For this reason, during the growth and development of children, parents become the main teachers and guides in shaping their character.

    Parents are examples that will influence children’s behavior. You do this by not being too self-centered, encouraging children to experience and express their emotions, not restraining children when they want to interact with their friends, as long as it is still in a positive sphere.

    2. Personality

    Often self-reflect and have a calm demeanor? That means, the individual will certainly have high sensitivity when sharing with others. The person is usually able to exercise good emotional control over himself. Introvert personality is believed to have a high sense of empathy, you know!

    3. Age and Degree of Maturity

    The older you get, the higher a person’s empathy. The degree of maturity of a person will be higher, so they can socialize well with each other.

    4. Socialization

    For example, when a child is playing with his friends. In the games that are held, of course there will be cooperation or close relations. They can be more open to others and feel tolerance.

    G. Benefits of Empathy

    1. Liked by People Around

    With empathy, one can produce positive emotions or aura. Life will be happier with people around who feel love and compassion.

    2. Keep Away From Selfish Attitudes

    Compassion will keep the heart away from jealousy, selfishness, and pride. This ugliness is certainly not good for oneself, it can cause stress, high ambition, and even lies. Hostilities with other people can make bad days. Life becomes unhealthy.

    3. Acquiring Kindness

    With a caring attitude and action in helping others, someone will become a better person. God and fellow human beings will reward him with something good too. Life will be made easier and not filled with problems.

    H. Examples of Empathy

    When there is sad news from a friend whose relative has passed away, condolences and prayers can be sent. Learn more about this feeling through the book The Art of Reading People’s Hearts, Minds, and Feelings.

    Visit a friend who is sick, comfort him, and provide what is needed. Collected voluntary donations from classmates for a sick friend. Participate in providing assistance to victims of natural disasters. Everything is a positive action and makes the heart feel happy.

    I. Characteristics of Highly Empathized People

    1. Has High Sensitivity

    With this condition, someone will usually naturally open up to help others, at least willing to listen. When a friend is feeling sad or happy, you will always be there and embrace him. However, because of this one feeling, a person becomes easier to be offended or hurt.

    2. Have High Intuition

    Someone with high empathy will usually develop life according to his intuition. Another way is to feel or want to feel the emotions of others.

    3. Tend to be alone

    This person usually does not like to join a group that makes him uncomfortable. This person needs more me time , especially if he is in a busy life that often makes him tired.

    Usually, the me time you get will be used to rest and recover energy. They will love themselves, so that when listening to other people, the feelings conveyed feel as if they were felt by themselves.

    4. Taking a Role ( Role Taking )

    Concrete behavior, as well as empathy will come by itself. Individuals will feel the reactions or emotional feelings felt by others.

    However, empathy will open the eyes of an individual to the suffering felt by the other person.

    After feeling this, you will usually be spontaneous to take a role or action, either in a positive and helpful way or just let it be.

    5. Emotional Control 

    Realizing that he is feeling empathy and not being too absorbed in other people’s feelings.

    J. How to Build Empathy

    1. Learn More Sensitive

    Be sensitive to things that are happening around. This factor is very important to build a good sense of empathy. Don’t expect big things if you can’t do small things.

    Starting with the closest environment, namely the family. How to empathize with your father, mother or next of kin. After success, practice in the community, such as neighbors, school friends, and the community.

    Tell them that you can help them if they need help.

    2. Don’t be high

    With a sense of pride, arrogant attitude will be reflected in a person. Learn to be sociable in any environment, act as if there is no distance between yourself and others because empathy also arises from mutual respect.

    3. Imagine If Yourself Became Someone Else

    Empathy can emerge if instilled in yourself. By imagining that the person feeling something is yourself, gratitude will be felt to be the most important thing in life. Empathy is not just feeling or helping others, but feeling sincere and being a good form of worship.

    4. Accepting Differences

    It is undeniable that the differences that exist in each individual sometimes have two sides. One side of myself can accept differences, the other side of myself feels that there is no need for differences.

    Therefore, instill in yourself that differences exist as a gift that allows humans to continue to learn and improve themselves.

    5. Be Friends With Anyone

    Empathy can arise if you interact a lot with other people. That way, their feelings can be easily identified. By making friends with anyone, it doesn’t mean that everyone has to follow their habits, preferences, or interests.

    6. Don’t Judge

    Can’t understand other people’s feelings, but don’t judge either. On the other hand, people who want to be heard should not immediately make mental judgments and think that other people don’t care. Be considerate , not everyone shows the response, as expected.

    Be more specific and elaborative, say in detail or at least be clear about the feelings you are feeling. Sometimes, people can feel sad because they are not understood or understood. However, everyone can develop or change with effort.

    K. Tips for Becoming a Good Listener ( Active Listening )

    That way, the other person who is telling the story will feel more comfortable when pouring out his heart. For this reason, the role of a mentor or psychologist is needed by some people. They have been trained to listen to others. Actually, this active skill can be learned by everyone. Its application can be done when making relationships in the office or discussing with study groups.

    When talking, someone really needs active listening , especially someone who feels that it is difficult for him to get close to other people. In the simplest way, namely simply listening, other people have found it helpful. Still sure you have great empathy?

    If you put this aside, in social life everyone as a human being must have concern for the environment and others around him. Why? This concern greatly impacts survival. Every human being will get help if it helps. Don’t be too proud to talk if the situation is urgent, for sure the people closest to you or those within your own circle will be moved to take part.

    Also read articles related to “Understanding Empathy” :

    • Social Structure in Society
    • Social Differentiation
    • Social Deviations in Society
    • List of Tribes in Indonesia
    • Definition of Social Interaction
    • Examples of Legal Norms
    • Definition of Norm
    • National Movement Organization

    This book presents very important information to be used as a therapy tutorial in contemporary life. If Readers already knows Erich Fromm’s book The Art of Loving, this book is his counterpart—that is, starting with listening. And, Erich Fromm presents this listening method as an art.

    Give empathy to those who are currently grieving. Follow and feel the sadness as if it were your sadness too. Give encouragement so that they will always survive and fight in difficult times. This book “We Are the Same as Humans” will give hope so that we can continue to face tomorrow.

    When it rains we ask for the sun. When it’s hot we ask for rain. As if there is never an end to us asking without trying to be grateful for what we get now. In fact, the circumstances faced this time may be better than the circumstances faced by others out there. This book teaches us to be more empathetic and give thanks more, how many blessings the universe has given us.

     

  • Definition of Issuer: Purpose, Type, Terms, and Duties 

    Issuer is a term most widely used in the world of investment and capital markets. This term denotes a private or state entity that makes an effective effect on society for the purpose of raising additional capital or funds.

    In general, the term is associated with companies on the stock market. That is, the company’s actions have been sold to the public.

    This definition is not wrong, but also inaccurate. Because this term is not only for companies, but individuals, joint efforts, associations and groups or organizations.

    The offer given by the issuer is an offer to sell joint securities with the procedures regulated in the capital regulations and the applicable legislature.

    Definition of Issuer

    In the world of finance, an issuer itself means a party that conducts a Public Offering, such as an issuer offering securities to sell Securities to the public based on procedures regulated by applicable laws and regulations.

    This can be interpreted as a company, both private and state-owned enterprises, seeking capital from the stock exchange by issuing securities.

    There are also securities offered by issuers, namely debt acknowledgments, stocks, bonds, futures contracts on securities, proof of debt, commercial paper, units of collective investment contract participation, and every derivative of securities.

    Another type of securities is sukuk, a sharia securities. It is a contract and how it is issued in accordance with sharia principles in the capital market. In general, companies in this category conduct securities offerings through the capital market for stocks, bonds and sukuk.

    What’s an Effect?

    When talking about Issuers, it is closely related to Securities. Securities in English are called “securities” or securities, which means securities that have value and can be traded. Securities can be categorized as debt and equity like bonds and stocks. Companies or institutions that issue securities are called issuers.

    Differences between Issuers and Public Companies

    Due to the sale of Securities in the Capital Market, issuers are often equated with public companies. However, the Issuer itself is not the same as a Public Company.

    Based on what is written in the Law of the Republic of Indonesia No. 8 of 1995 concerning the Capital Market, the Issuer is a Party that conducts a Public Offering, which means that the party conducts an offer of Securities to sell Securities to the public based on the procedures regulated in the applicable laws and regulations.

    Issuers themselves are in the form of individuals, companies, joint ventures, associations, or also in the form of organized groups that are different from public companies, which means companies whose shares are owned by at least 300 shareholders and have paid-up capital of at least IDR 3. billion, or a number of shareholders and paid-up capital that has been stipulated by Government Regulation.

    The Role of Issuers in the Capital Market

    The role of an issuer in a capital market, among others:

    1. Expansion of a business, capital that has been obtained from investors or shareholders will be used to expand business fields, market expansion or production capacity.
    2. Besides that, it also improves the capital structure, balances between own capital and foreign capital.
    3. Conduct shareholder transfers. Transfer from old shareholders to new shareholders.

    Issuer’s Presence Enliven the Stock Exchange

    As we have discussed together above, the issuer itself can be in the form of a private company or a state-owned company, both in an open or closed company.

    However, the important thing that needs to be underlined is that not all companies have issuer status, because the status of an issuer company that is only held for companies is if they have traded their shares or bonds on the stock exchange floor.

    Therefore, an issuer needs to carry out an IPO or what is called an Initial Public Offering before it can be called an issuer company. However, there are also some quite striking differences between public companies and issuer companies.

    Reporting from the official website of the OJK or the Financial Services Authority, a Public Company is a company that has a Limited Liability Company basis, according to what is stated in Article 1 paragraph 1 concerning General Provisions of Law Number 40 of 2007 regarding Limited Liability Companies.

    So, we can conclude that the most striking difference between an issuer company and a public company is that an issuer company is a company that has conducted an IPO, while for a public company it is a company with the status of a Limited Liability Company or PT that has already conducted an IPO.

    The Company’s Purpose to Become an Issuer 

    What is the reason for a company to take the floor in the capital market? Companies that decide to become issuers are not without reason. They want to get benefits for the development and sustainability of the company.

    Below are some of the benefits that you will get if you become an issuer, including:

    1) The value of the company has increased

    By becoming an issuer and being listed on the capital market, the value of a company will increase. This increase will also have a significant impact on public trust.

    If the company has an ever-increasing value, the public will also trust and be interested in investing in that company. Which means that the more capital is pushed into the company, the funds will be obtained from the investors and then used to support decisions on the company’s strategic steps, such as for example business expansion.

    2) The image of the company is increasing

    If a company has been listed on the capital market, it can be said that the company is trusted and its image has been recognized by the public.

    All information about a company can be accessed easily by the public as proof that the company can be trusted.

    3) Business continuity becomes more secure

    After becoming an issuer, the company will have the opportunity to get capital injections or funds from investors. These funds can be used as capital for the continuity of the business in the future.

    4) Get tax incentives

    In accordance with Government Regulation No. 56 of 2015 states that a company in the form of a public company can get an income tax incentive of 5 percent lower than domestic corporate income tax.

    Reasons for Companies to Issue Securities

    In general, the reason for a company to issue securities is to get a large amount of additional capital. There are two ways companies obtain capital, namely:

    1. Debt Financing

    Debt financing itself means a debt financing. Which, issuers can get foreign capital by issuing securities which are also known as bonds, which means they borrow funds from the public.

    2. Equity Financing

    Equity financing means funding by offering half of the company’s ownership rights to those who wish to provide capital. From this funding, a company will greatly benefit. In addition to obtaining funds, the company also does not need to return these funds and also does not need to pay debt interest.

    Types of Securities Traded

    There are many types of products offered, namely:

    1. Shares (Right Issue, Warrant)

    Shares are a sign of equity participation in the company. Simply put, shares are like evidence of ownership in a company or business entity.

    So, when you own these shares, you can already be said to be the owner of the company. Therefore, shares are often referred to as securities, because they can be used as proof of legal ownership of the company.

    2. Corporate Bonds

    These corporate bonds are issued by a national private company such as BUMN and BUMD. Bonds are also often known as medium-long term notes whose ownership can be transferred.

    The contents of this letter are an agreement from the company that will issue bonds to pay profits in the form of interest for a certain period of time and will pay off the principal debt at a predetermined time.

    3. Mutual funds

    Mutual funds themselves are a choice of stock instruments for investors, especially for investors who only have a little time and investors who do not have the expertise to calculate investment risk.

    With this one instrument, it is hoped that investors who have the will to contribute to the Indonesian capital market.

    In general, mutual funds can also be interpreted as a container that is used to collect funds from investors so that they can then be invested in securities portfolios by related investment managers.

    4. Exchange-Traded Fund (ETF)

    Exchange Trade Fund or ETF is a financial bond that exists in the form of a collective investment contract, in which the participation units are traded on the stock exchange floor.

    Even though ETFs can be said to be almost the same as mutual funds, these products are also traded just like other common stocks on the exchange floor.

    Basically, ETF itself is a combination of mutual funds in terms of management and the entire stock mechanism in terms of buying and selling.

    5. Derivatives (Stock Option Contracts, Futures Contracts)

    Derivatives have the form of a contract or an agreement whose profit value is directly related to the performance of other assets or commonly known as underlying assets.

    The effect of this derivative is a special derivative effect, whether it is an investment or debt. The effect in question is a direct descendant of the main effect or a further derivative.

    You can learn about the issuers that are printing losses from the industry and sectors most affected by COVID-19 on the IDX throughout 2020 by Buddy Setianto

    Requirements to Become an Issuer

    If you want to be on the floor of the exchange, there must be a number of requirements that need to be met. Among them:

    • Preparing securities to be offered and traded to investors in the capital market.
    • In a company that becomes an issuer, it is necessary to guarantee that the securities to be issued are appropriate and legally valid.
    • Companies need to provide information that is as complete as possible and can be accounted for.

    In addition to the things above, there are several documents that must be prepared and submitted as conditions, including:

    • The document contains other information according to the request of the Financial Services Authority.
    • Records of company financial statements that have been audited by a public accountant.
    • Curriculum vitae of the board of commissioners, directors or other equivalent positions.
    • Opinion in terms of applicable law.
    • Agreement with Underwriters.
    • A statement letter regarding the issuer’s commitment.
    • Document requirements, as requirements for small-scale issuers and medium-scale issuers.
    • Statement from capital market supporting professionals.

    Issuer Registration and Information Disclosure

    Issuers must include a registration statement in a public offering. On the other hand, public companies also need to be able to present a registration statement as a public company.

    Regarding the registration statement, OJK will provide an effective statement to show proof of completeness, if all procedures and requirements have been fulfilled or a registration statement required in the established laws and regulations.

    Issuer companies whose registration has become effective or public companies must be able to submit their reports regularly, as well as announce them to the public at large.

    Apart from that, a report also needs to be able to announce to the public regarding material events that affect securities prices no later than the second working day after the existence of these conditions.

    In accordance with RI Law no. 8 of 1995 concerning the capital market, a director, commissioner of a publicly listed company, and all parties who own issuers, at least 5% of the shares of issuers of public companies also need to report ownership, as well as any change in ownership of the company’s shares at least 10 days after the change in ownership .

    Differences between Small and Medium Scale Issuers

    Companies that have made public offerings are divided into two, namely small-scale and medium-scale issuers. What is a small-scale company and what is a medium-scale issuer? This definition has been written completely and clearly in the Financial Services Authority Regulation Number 53/PJOK.04/2017. 

    1. Small scale company

    The small-scale company in question is a company in the form of a legal entity established in Indonesia with assets of no more than IDR 50 billion. Companies on this scale are also not controlled by public companies whose total assets are on the medium scale or more than IDR 250 billion. 

    2. Medium scale companies

    This medium-scale issuer is a company that has a legal entity built in Indonesia, but has assets equivalent to or more than IDR 50 billion to IDR 250 billion. Another characteristic is quite the same as a small scale, which is not controlled directly or indirectly by a public company that has assets of more than IDR 250 billion.

    Issuer Duties

    In general, the task of an issuer to provide a public offering of securities is to be responsible for managing public funds in good condition. The securities offered are as described above.

    Apart from those mentioned above, there are several other types of securities that the Issuer will offer to the public. Which of course depends on the development of the capital market in Indonesia. Until now, the government has also attempted to raise capital by issuing various innovative financial products.

    How to Assess Issuers’ Securities Offerings

    It is easy for us to understand that it is not easy to be able to assess the effect that has been given by the issuer in an initial public offering. There are a number of things that need to be considered when purchasing a securities offered by an issuer.

    1. Pay attention and also learn the fundamentals of the company related to how to see the prospectus in it. In the prospectus there are usually financial statements, and in it there are also risks and opportunities for the company.
    2. Check whether the company and other sectors are related to the issuer. Also check the opportunities from the group, or other related issuer sectors in the future. We need to analyze macroeconomics in order to be able to read the prospects for the securities offered by issuers.
    3. Pay attention to the securities that guarantee the company’s emissions. As a suggestion, to choose a company that works with experienced and well-known underwriter services. The way to find out is to check the company’s underwriter experience.

    Example of Issuer Company 

    Below are some examples of issuers that have been listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange.

    1. ADHI (Adhi Karya (Persero) Tbk)
    2. AKRA (AKR Corporindo Tbk)
    3. ANTM (Aneka Tambang Tbk)
    4. ASII (Astra International Tbk)
    5. BBCA (Bank Central Asia Tbk)
    6. BBNI (Bank Negara Indonesia (Persero) Tbk)
    7. BBTN (Indonesian Savings Bank (Persero) Tbk)

     You can learn about the 597 Issuers listed on the Indonesia Stock Exchange September 2018 Edition Summary of Business Background and Management of Issuers by Buddy Setianto

    After getting the full explanation above, it can be concluded that an issuer company is a private company or BUMN that seeks capital assistance or injection of funds on the stock exchange by issuing securities. The types of securities traded in it are quite varied, such as stocks, bonds, mutual funds, exchange traded funds, and derivatives.

    If you are interested in helping or funding an issuer company, then there are a number of things you must pay attention to, such as paying attention to the fundamentals of the issuer company, paying attention to the securities that have guaranteed the company’s emissions and so on.

     

  • The Definition of Islamic Economics and Its Characteristics

    Understanding sharia economics – In the world of economics, Islamic economics is also called sharia economics. Islamic economics is basically a middle way between the capitalist and socialist economic systems. Therefore, the Islamic economic system applies the principles of goodness from both of these economic systems.

    You may have often heard the term Islamic economics in the Indonesian banking industry. However, what exactly is Islamic economics? To find out more about Islamic economics, you can see this article till the end, Readers.

    Understanding of Islamic Economics According to Experts

    pixabay
    The following is the definition of Islamic economics according to several experts.

    Yoyok Prasetyo

    Quoting from the book Sharia Economics by Yoyok Prasetyo, the term Sharia Economics is the same as Islamic Economics, the difference is only the point of view of each expert who defines it.

    Yusuf Qardhawi

    According to Yusuf Qardhawi, the concept of sharia economics is an economy that is based on God, with God’s ultimate goal and the use of facilities that are inseparable from God’s sharia.

    MA Mannan 

    According to MA Mannan, the term sharia economics is a social science that studies the economic problems of the people imbued with Islamic values.

    Omar Chapra 

    On the other hand, according to Umar Chapra, the concept of Islamic economics is a branch of knowledge that helps humans create wealth by allocating and distributing various resources according to predetermined goals. However, it does not unduly restrict individual freedom, create macroeconomic and ecological imbalances, or weaken family and social cohesion.

    Broadly speaking, Islamic economics is an economic system that applies the teachings of the Qur’an and hadith or Islamic law in its activities.

    Readers can read a book entitled ” Introduction to Islamic Economics Basic Concepts, Paradigms, Development, Islamic Economics” to find out more about the history and understanding of Islamic Economics itself.

    Characteristics of Islamic Economics

    After discussing the meaning of Islamic economics according to several experts, the next discussion is the characteristics of Islamic economics. The following are some of the characteristics of the Islamic economy.

    1. Using a Profit Sharing System

    One of the principles of Islamic economics is the distribution of ownership that prioritizes justice. In other words, all profits derived from economic activity are shared fairly, for example in Islamic banking there is a profit share for the bank as well as for the customer.

    2. Relationship Between Spiritual Values ​​and Material Values

    Islamic economics is a form of helping the customer’s economy to benefit according to Islamic teachings. According to Islam, wealth from economic activities can be used for Zakat, Infaq and Sadaqah.

    3. Granting Freedom Based on Islamic Teachings

    Islamic economics gives freedom to economic actors to act according to their rights and obligations in carrying out economic activities.

    4. Recognition of Various Types of Ownership

    Ownership of funds and assets in the economy actually belongs to Allah alone. Hopefully the economy runs according to Islamic teachings.

    5. Bound by Faith, Sharia and Morals

    All economic activities are based on Aqidah, Sharia and morality to balance the economy.

    6. Maintain Mental And Physical Balance

    The goal of Islamic economics is not only to gain physical benefits, but to gain inner peace and profit in one’s life.

    7. Providing space for the state and government

    The sharia economy provides space for the government and the state to intervene as intermediaries when problems arise.

    8. Prohibition of Riba

    A form of usury is the accumulation of payments from a person who owns property to a person who lends property because of a failure to make a promise to repay the loan by a certain time. In Islamic economics, riba is prohibited.

    The Purpose of Islamic Economics

    Islamic Economics According to Islam, the best economic system is: As Muslims, it is appropriate for us to run this economic system. The objectives of Islamic economics, among others:

    1. Purify the soul 

    Purify the soul so that every Muslim can become a source of virtue for society and its environment.

    2. Uphold justice in society

    Justice in question includes aspects of life in the field of law and muamar. In this way, the bond of brotherhood increases.

    3. Creating economic prosperity

    With the sharia economy, economic growth can become more prosperous.

    Principles of Islamic Economics 

    The implementation of Islamic economics must follow the following principles (Sudarsono, 2002:
    105):

    1. Various sources are considered as gifts or entrusted by God to humans.
    2. Islam allows private ownership within certain limits.
    3. The main driving force of the Islamic economy is cooperation.
    4. Islamic economics rejects the accumulation of wealth controlled by a handful of individuals.
    5. The Sharia economy guarantees public property and its use is designed for the benefit of the many people.
    6. Muslims must fear Allah and the Day of Judgment in the hereafter.
    7. Zakat must be paid on wealth that reaches the ceiling (nisab).
    8. Islam prohibits all forms of usury.

    Benefits of Sharia Economics

    If Islamic economics is practiced, Muslims will benefit greatly. The benefits of Islamic economics include:

    1. If Muslims are found to be still struggling and practicing conventional economics, it means they have not converted to Islam.
    2. The application and practice of Sharia economics by Islamic financial institutions such as banks, insurance companies, pawnshops and Baitul Maal wat Tamwil will benefit the world and the future.
    3. The benefits of this life are obtained from the sharing of profits, but the benefits of the hereafter are freed from usury which is prohibited by Allah.
    4. Business practices based on Islamic law have religious value because they carry out God’s law.
    5. Islamic economic practices by Islamic financial institutions. This means supporting the development of Islamic economic institutions.
    6. Practicing the Islamic economy by opening savings and deposits and buying Islamic insurance means supporting the economic empowerment of the people. Because the collected funds are collected and sent to the real trading department.
    7. Practicing the Sharia economy means supporting the Amar Ma’ruf Nahi Munkar movement. This is because the funds raised by Islamic financial institutions can only be used for halal companies and projects.

    What are the Roles of Islamic Economics? 

    In the 2020 Sharia Economic and Financial Report (LEKSI), Bank Indonesia describes the three roles of the Islamic economy in the recovery of Indonesia’s national economy.

    1. The aim is to support the liquidity of Islamic banks so as to facilitate the distribution of Islamic funds in Indonesia.
    2. Implementing a partnership business model (KKMU Syariah) to optimize profit sharing properly. Thus, business opportunities are maintained by supporting resilience to manage business risks.
    3. Optimization of Islamic social finance.

    Sharia Economic Potential in Indonesia

    Indonesia’s Islamic economic and financial potential is enormous, according to the Ministry of Finance (Kemenkeu). This can be seen in the increasing trend of the Financial Inclusion Index which is supported by Islamic financial assets as a whole. Moreover, this potential is supported by the rise of Sharia KUR and the rise of Sharia debtors.

    As a bridge between economic development and Islamic finance, several financial institutions, such as the growth of social finance with zakat and waqf, tokenization of sukuk, digitization and development of Islamic fintech, and regulation of Islamic finance and impact investment (ESG). I have a chance.

    In fact, according to the Ministry of Finance of the Republic of Indonesia, Indonesia currently ranks fourth after Malaysia, Saudi Arabia and the United Arab Emirates in terms of Islamic economic and financial development.

    In order to support the sharia economy and financial ecosystem, the Ministry of Finance of the Republic of Indonesia is committed to coordinating policy makers, supporting regulations and developing the halal industry. all supporting elements of the Islamic economy, including government incentives to encourage Indonesia’s Islamic economic and financial potential will continue to grow.

    What are the Sharia Economic Products in Banking? 

    Islamic economics deserves thumbs up. Of course this makes a significant contribution to the productivity and professionalism of Islamic banking itself. The following is the presence of Islamic economic products, especially in the banking sector, which support the development of a very large Islamic economy.

    1. Sharia Savings

    Savings are described as deposits whose withdrawals are subject to various conditions imposed by the bank on its customers. Withdrawal facilities allow passbooks, ATMs, withdrawal slips, and other advanced methods such as internet banking.

    The hallmark of sharia savings is the implementation of the wadiah contract. In other words, the savings are only deposited, the customer does not receive interest, but the bank gives gifts or bonuses to customers, which is of no use.

    2. Sharia deposits

    Time deposits are deposits that ordinary people choose to invest in. Not only is it easier, the profit you get is also higher than ordinary savings. Deposits are bank savings products that allow deposits and withdrawals to be made only at certain times because the bank needs time to invest.

    A bank’s business or investment must be included in the halal category according to Islamic law. The terms or terms offered are the same as traditional deposits and range from 1 to 24 months.

    Sharia deposits use Mudharabah contracts. This means saving through a profit-sharing system (relationship) between the customer and the bank. The advantage of this mudharabah contract deposit is usually using a ratio of 60:40 for customers and banks. The higher the bank’s profit, the higher the customer’s profit, and the lower the bank’s profit, the lower the customer’s profit, which means that the profit is risky.

    3. Sharia Pledge (Rahn)

    Sharia Pledge, practiced at PT. Pegadaian lends its customers valuable, salable and insurable assets. The money you lend is interest free. However, if the pawnshop cannot pay off its debt on the agreed date, the customer (rahin) is obliged to provide collateral (marhum) for the purpose of paying off the debt.

    In practice, collateral is sold to cover debts if confirmed by the trustee. when the security interest is sold.

    4. Sharia Demand Deposits

    One of the sharia banking products included in the Wadiah (Deposit) Concept is Current Accounts. Current accounts are generally understood as deposits that can be withdrawn at any time by check, demand deposit slip, other methods of payment, or bookkeeping. Sharia demand deposits are current accounts managed in accordance with Sharia principles.

    In this case, the National Sharia Council issued a fatwa stating that current accounts that are justified by sharia are those based on the principles of Wadia and Mudarabha.

    The Mudharabah Current Account Sharia contract is a cooperation contract between the customer as a depositor of funds (Shahibul Maal) and the party managing the funds by a Sharia Bank (Mudharib). The provisions for Sharia Current Accounts using a Mudharabah contract are:

    1. In this transaction the customer acts as shahibul maal or owner of funds and the bank acts as mudharib or fund manager.
    2. In its capacity as Mudharib, banks can conduct and develop various types of businesses that do not violate Sharia principles. This includes mudharabah with other parties.
    3. Capital must be stated in cash and not in debentures.
    4. Profit sharing is expressed in the form of a percentage and stated in the Account Opening Agreement.
    5. The bank, as Mudharib, finances the operational costs of site deposits with its personal profit margin.
    6. Banks cannot reduce customer win rates without proper authorization.

    On the other hand, Sharia Current Accounts with Wadiah Contracts are contracts to store customer funds in Islamic Banks, and Islamic Banks can manage these funds without giving compensation to customers when they make a profit. Sharia demand deposits for wadiah contracts are subject to the following conditions:

    1. Deposit nature
    2. The deposit can be taken at any time (on-call).
    3. No compensation is required except in the form of a voluntary contribution (athaya) from the Bank.
    4. In practice, most Islamic banks use Wadiah contracts for demand deposits. This is because customers have to open deposit sites for smooth and easy transactions, not for profit. Intermediate mudharabah contracts are usually used for profitable investment contracts.

     5. Sharia Financing (Ijarah)

    Leasing is a very familiar part of our daily lives and many people use this service to buy cars, motorbikes and other valuables. Rent was originally known in America, from the word lease which means rent. In Islamic economics, the term associated with flower bouquets is Ijarah (al Ijarah), derived from the word al ajru, which means al iwadhu (change).

    According to the Decree of the Minister of Finance No. 1169/KMK.01/1991 dated 21 November 1991, what is meant by lease is a lease with options (financial lease) or lease without options (operating lease).

    After we already know about Islamic Economics products in Banking, of course, Readers is also interested in learning more about them. Well, you can read a book entitled ” Development of Islamic Banking Products in Indonesia “. This book discusses the theory and practice of developing sharia products creatively, innovatively and prospectively – the main key to opening the door to the success of the sharia banking industry.

    Differences between Islamic Banks and Conventional Banks 

    The Indonesian banking system has two bank operating systems. The two banking systems are regular banks and Islamic banks. Traditional banks are indeed very familiar to the ears of the Indonesian people, but what are the differences between Islamic and traditional banks?

    Sharia Banks are banks that operate based on Sharia principles or Islamic law as stipulated in the fatwa of the Indonesian Ulema Council (MUI). Thus, every activity carried out by this Islamic bank, both raising funds and in the context of channeling funds, provides and charges rewards based on sharia principles, namely buying and selling and profit sharing.

    Meanwhile, conventional banks are banks that carry out their activities conventionally, referring to national and international agreements, and based on state law.

    The Financial Services Authority (OJK) explained the difference between Islamic banks and conventional banks, that the principles of Islamic banking regulated in the MUI fatwa include the principles of justice and balance (‘adl wa tawazun), benefit (maslahah), universalism (alamiyah), and not contains gharar, maysir, usury, unjust, and objects that are forbidden.

    Islamic banking law also stipulates to perform a social function by performing functions like a biturmal institution, based on the differences between Islamic banks and traditional banks. Manager (Nazhir) at the will of the Waqf giver (Wakif).

    In this difference between Islamic and traditional banking, the Islamic banking system and traditional banking work synergistically to support the wider mobilization of public funds to increase the financing capacity of national economic sectors.

    In general, the difference between Islamic banks and conventional banks lies in the form of business of Islamic banks, which consist of commercial banks and Islamic People’s Financing Banks (BPRS), the prohibition of accepting deposits.

    After we already know about the history, understanding, characteristics, goals, principles, benefits, roles, potential, various products to differences with conventional banks. Surely Readers is very curious besides bank products, is there any investment but Sharia? Of course! Readers can read a book entitled “Sharia Capital Market “. This book is very suitable to read especially for those of you beginners who want to know about the capital market but in Sharia.

  • Definition of Microeconomics: Scope, Theory and Differences with Macroeconomics

    Microeconomics: Definition, Scope, Theory and Differences with Macroeconomics – Microeconomics or also known as microeconomics is economics that studies demand and supply curves which then helps to understand the relationship between changes in wages, appropriate employment patterns and understanding variable costs in the production of goods and services. Check out a more complete explanation of Microeconomics below:

    A. Definition of Microeconomics

    Several aspects of microeconomic analysis include market models, industry, benefit analysis, demand theory, cost and supply analysis, elasticity, production theory and price theory. In addition, microeconomics also plays a role in making company policies regarding resource management such as price management.

    The existence of policies within the company can also make the company more strategic and innovative. Microeconomics plays a very important role in predicting and designing a company’s strategy in the future. Microeconomics will make it easier for a company to understand consumer behavior, wants and needs.

    The book entitled Theory of Microeconomics Edition 3 from Muh Abdul Halim will help Readers understand more deeply about microeconomics itself. If Readers is interested, click “buy a book” below.

    B. Definition of Microeconomics According to Experts

    Here are some definitions of microeconomics according to experts:

    1. Mary A Marchant and William M Snell

    Microeconomics is the study of individuals, households and companies making decisions in the economic process.

    2. David A. Moss

    Microeconomics as a step for analyzing a decision made by an individual or group starting from the factors to consideration of costs and benefits.

    3. Adam Smith

    Seeing the existence of various rational considerations in making decisions that are chosen by economic actors.

    4. NG Mankiw

    In his book he writes, the notion of microeconomics is a science that discusses the role of individual economic actors , how households and companies make decisions, and how they interact in certain markets.

    5. Sadono Sukirno

    In the book Microeconomics Theory of Introduction, Sadono Sukirno states that the notion of microeconomics is a branch of economics that studies consumer and corporate behavior and determination. Microeconomics itself functions to analyze how all these decisions and behaviors affect the supply and also the demand for goods and services that will determine prices, determine the supply and demand for goods and services further.

    6. David Ricardo

    According to David Ricardo, the notion of microeconomics is a condition in which economic actors already have information about the ins and outs of a market. That way the macro economy is a determining factor of the global economic market.

    7.Marshal and Piqou

    According to Marshal and Piqou, the notion of microeconomics is a high level of mobility in the market so that these economic actors can immediately adapt or adjust to changes in the market.

    C. Scope of Microeconomics

    Microeconomics itself has a broad scope as discussed in the Microeconomics book by Dr. H. Bachrudin Sjaroni, Se., MM Noveria S, SE., MM Edi Djunaedi, SE., MM.

    The scope of microeconomics itself studies about matters surrounding consumer and market behavior in the individual or corporate sector. Consumers and producers themselves are individuals in every household, organization, community and company. Know what the scope of microeconomics is, here are some of them:

    1. Interaction in the Goods Market

    The market is a meeting place between demand and supply. The market is also a place where sellers and buyers can meet to be able to make buying and selling transactions.

    2. Seller and Consumer Behavior

    Both have a rational nature, where the seller wants maximum profit, and the buyer wants optimal satisfaction in terms of product quality and price. In analyzing the behavior between sellers and buyers, there are 3 assumptions that can be considered, namely economic activity between sellers and buyers occurs in an open and rational manner.

    3. Interaction in Factor Markets of Production

    From the seller’s point of view, having products that meet human needs also requires factors of production by buying them, while consumers need money to fulfill their needs.

    4. Use Value Theory

    Studying how an item generates use or satisfaction for consumers who buy or use the product.

    5. Market structure theory

    Explain market classification based on the number of companies, characteristics or types of products and the convenience of companies or producers to enter and leave a market.

    The market structure will be declared as a non-competitive market structure when there are companies that do not have the power and ability to influence the quantity of goods and prices in the market.

    Conversely, if the company has the power or ability to influence the amount of goods in circulation or the prices of goods on the market, then the market structure is said to be a competitive market structure.

    6. Price Elasticity

    Studying how the prices of goods and services are formed in the market. This price is influenced by how many requests.

    7. Industry

    Study how the flow of circulation of goods and services can be formed. It also Analyzes production, producer, consumer, and distribution goods in terms of rational possibilities in economic decision making.

    8. Input Markets

    Study how producers can obtain production materials at minimum cost but produce goods or services that have high selling value.

    D. Microeconomic Theory

    Microeconomic studies aim to analyze the failure of an economic decision, bring up rational analysis and produce theoretical analysis results that enable perfect competition markets.

    This behavior is useful in analyzing the effect on demand and supply of goods and services, pricing, and determining the amount of supply and subsequent demand.

    Microeconomic Theory – Mathematical Analysis written by Prof. Jogjyanto HM, Akt., MBA., Ph.D. this can help Readers understand various theories that exist in microeconomics.

    Analysis from microeconomic studies allows for the emergence of rational explanations for an economic decision, which can be used as a consideration in overcoming a failure in making previous economic decisions. Microeconomic or microeconomic analysis is further divided into four, including:

    1. Price Theory

    Analysis is carried out on the process of price formation, factors that can affect changes in demand and supply, the relationship between demand and supply prices, market forms and the concept of elasticity of demand and supply.

    The price theory itself explains the equilibrium price between sellers and buyers where both of them carry out a bidding process until an agreement is reached at a certain price level.

    2. Production Theory

    Production theory is also used as a basis for analyzing the level and cost required of a production process.

    The analysis is carried out on all matters related to the cost of production of goods and services. The combination of these factors must then be chosen by the producer to get the maximum profit.

    3. Distribution Theory

    Distribution theory is carried out with the aim of analyzing labor wages, profits and the amount of interest that must be paid to the owners of capital. Distribution theory as the activity of distributing products from producers to final consumers through several distribution channels.

    This theory takes into account the time of ordering, product durability, and the distance between producers and consumers. Distribution itself is not only about getting a product from producers to consumers, but also about product promotion and packaging.

    4. Consumption Theory

    Consumption theory is a theory that refers to the behavior of various consumers in the context of meeting their needs. The market demand curve is derived from the individual consumer demand curve. The decrease in this curve itself is obtained through a consumption theory approach.

    Subjects that can be studied in this consumption theory in general are the concept of utility, the relationship between the use of goods and the quantity of goods, consumer behavior, conditions for achieving maximum satisfaction or utility, marginal utility and indifference curves.

    E. Examples of Microeconomic Policies

    Microeconomics is also useful in making predictions, with microeconomics, companies can then develop strategies or predictions going forward.

    Microeconomics can help companies predict what might happen in the market, for example product trends, with microeconomics will also help understand consumer behavior and consumer needs.

    With microeconomics it will also help to know Product Turnover. The following are some concrete examples of microeconomic policies:

    1. Lowest Price Policy

    The lowest price policy is applied when the quantity supplied is greater than the quantity demanded, causing a buildup of products and not all people will buy the product, so the product is then sold at the cheapest possible price. Here the government plays a role in setting a minimum price limit for products so that producers are protected. Concrete examples on:

    • Analysis of Demand and Supply of Red Chili in North Sumatra Province
    • Analysis of Consumer Satisfaction on Service Quality and Product Prices at Supermarkets Using the Importance Performance Analysis (IPA) Method
    • Analysis of Production Factors Affecting Robusta Coffee Production in Sumowono District, Semarang Regency
    • Analysis of Business Income of Palm Sugar Craftsmen in Tulo’a Village, North Bulango District, Bone Bolango Regency
    • Marketing Analysis of Merang Mushrooms Independent Institution Rooting the Community (Lm3) Agrina in Tanjong Paya, Peusangan District, Bireuen Regency
    • Analysis of Calculation of Cost of Production Using the Full Costing Method as a Basis for Calculation of Selling Prices (Case Study on Kertina’s Home Industry)
    • Analysis of the Market Structure of the Rubber Industry and Rubber Goods in 2009

    2. High Price Policy

    The highest price policy is set when market conditions experience price uncertainty, namely price spikes become very high. This policy can then occur because the number of offers is low so that the number of requests increases.

    In this situation, the stock of goods is very lacking, so consumers want to buy these products and then resell them at high prices. For example, fuel prices are increasing, but fuel stocks are becoming scarce and difficult to obtain, the government’s role is to set the maximum price because consumer demand is soaring.

    F. Examples of Microeconomic Activities

    Basically, to understand microeconomics further, we need to know examples of microeconomic activities, namely:

    1. Request

    Demand is the amount of goods and services demanded by buyers and they are able to buy at a certain time and price level. When the price of goods and services continues to increase, the demand for goods and services will decrease. However, when the price of goods and services decreases, the demand will increase.

    2. Offer

    Offer can be interpreted if there are goods and services sold to the seller or producer at a certain price and within a certain time. In this case, the offer is made by the manufacturer. In addition, the theory of supply in the applicable economy is that the higher the price of goods and services, the greater the quantity of goods and services supplied, and the opposite applies.

    3. Price

    The next microeconomic example is price which has a function as a measuring tool for goods and services. In determining the price, it will usually be determined based on production costs, the demand curve, and economic conditions. 

    4. Market

    The market is a place that consists of sellers and buyers who meet each other to carry out economic transactions. However, the understanding of the market does not have to be buying and selling transactions that are carried out in one place, but can also be done online  .

    5. Fees

    In this case, costs can be interpreted as an effort made by producers, be they individuals or companies, so that they can get benefits and profits from the economic activities that have been carried out. Therefore, costs will affect price changes which are usually caused by rising raw material prices.

    6. Consumer and Producer Behavior

    Consumer and producer behavior can be interpreted as an activity carried out to select, search, buy, and use goods and services. Goods and services purchased are usually used to meet the needs of everyday life.

    G. How Micro and Macro Economics Affect the Running of Business

    1. The Law of Supply and Demand

    A Business gains by trying to understand the behavior patterns of its consumers. He observes the interaction between producers and buyers (consumers). The things that affect the demand itself include the price of goods, consumer income, the level of demand and consumer interest.

    2. Start-ups

    Startups are new companies that are in the research and development stage to find the right market segmentation. When starting a business, industrial research is a very important thing to do. Market interest analysis aims to provide and develop products and services that suit the needs of the intended target market.

    For Readers who want to learn how to manage a business and the economics of a business, a book entitled Successfully Managing Micro, Small and Medium Enterprise Finances by Aries Haru Prasetyo will be able to help.

     

    3. Economic Cycle

    A high level of demand will trigger an increase in prices, which will then affect the smaller amount of the budget issued. Then when the number of offers exceeds the number of requests, this will contribute to the prosperity of the community.

    The economic cycle itself is a wave of ups and downs of an economic activity consisting of four elements: an upturn or commonly known as an upturn or expansion, a peak or culmination point, a downward movement or commonly known as a downturn or recession, and a lowest point or nadir.

    4. Cost of Goods and Services

    In microeconomic theory, companies try to increase their efficiency in production based on the highest level of income, taking into account various additional costs but only minimal.

    For example, when production is increased, the need for labor will also increase, this will then increase wage costs and potential changes in selling prices. In microeconomics, labor costs are usually the highest cost of a business.

    In the book Microeconomic Analysis on Indonesian Criminal Law by Prof. Dr. Romli Atmasasmita, SH, LL.M. This discussion discusses how microeconomics is used to analyze Indonesian criminal law, which not only affects defendants, but also companies, assets, and employees who are laid off and many more.

     

    5. Pricing Decisions

    In microeconomics there are ‘equilibrium prices’ or prices that are formed at the meeting point of the supply and demand curves. The price of these products and services will then have an impact on the number of consumers.

    For example, setting a price above the average does not mean greater profits, because fewer people will buy the product, so the price of the product must be in accordance with the consumer’s budget according to the predetermined target market.

    H. Objectives of Microeconomics

    Basically, the main goal of microeconomics is to make it easier for a company to understand consumer needs. Even so, microeconomics also has other goals, namely:

    1. To conduct an analysis of the price of a product to be traded. Not only product prices, but can also be applied to service prices.
    2. To analyze if there is a market failure. In other words, products that are marketed and then fail can be evaluated to be even better, so that they are able to compete with competitors.

    I. Differences in Micro and Macroeconomics

    Differences between micro and macroeconomics can be seen through the definition, scope and variables, unit of analysis, and purpose of analysis.

    Understanding

    Microeconomics as a branch of economics studies various economic variables in a small scope, such as companies and households, it studies starting from smaller economic variables (consumption, investment, and savings).

    Macroeconomics is a branch of economics that discusses the economy as a whole, starting from behavior, decision-making processes, and performance.

    Scope

    The scope studied by microeconomics is consumers and producers. While in macroeconomics we will study various economic variables as a whole. This variable will have a broad impact on employment opportunities, the inflation rate, national income, economic growth, and the international balance of payments.

    The foundation of macroeconomic theory is Keynesian theory. The scope of macroeconomic theory is the efforts of society and government to manage factors of production efficiently. In addition to definitions, variables, and scope, things that can explain the differences between micro and macroeconomics are the units and objectives of analysis of each type of economy.

    Units of Analysis

    The unit of analysis of microeconomics is the discussion of individual economic activities (for example: demand and supply, consumer behavior, producer behavior, markets, revenues, costs and profits or losses from companies), while the unit of analysis of macroeconomics is the discussion of activities the economy as a whole (example: national income, economic growth , inflation, unemployment, investment and economic policy).

    Purpose of Analysis

    Then the purpose of the analysis of microeconomics is to focus more on the analysis of how to allocate resources so that the right combination can be achieved, while the purpose of the analysis of macroeconomics is to focus more on the analysis of the effect of economic activity on the economy as a whole.

    This is information about Microeconomics: Definition, Scope, Theory and Differences with Macroeconomics. Hope it is useful!

  • Youth Congress I, Youth Congress II, and Contents of the Youth Pledge

    Youth Congress I, Youth Congress II, and Contents of the Youth Pledge

    History of the Youth Pledge – The Youth Pledge is an important milestone in the history of the Indonesian independence movement. This promise is seen as a crystallization of the spirit of asserting the ideals of the founding day of the Indonesian state.

    The meaning of the Youth Pledge was determined by the Second Youth Congress which was held for two days, 27-28 October 1928 in Batavia (now Jakarta). This decision affirmed the ideals of “Indonesian homeland”, “Indonesian nation”, and “Indonesian language”. The decision should also form the basis for every “Indonesian national association” and be “published in various newspapers and read out before union meetings”.

    The term “youth oath” itself did not appear in a congressional decision, but was introduced later. Where the youth oath appeared after the II Youth Congress. However, before that Youth I of course also became the impetus for the youth oath after the Youth Congress II.

    On this occasion, Sinaumedia will discuss the history of the youth oath. For those of you who want to know more about the history of the youth oath, you can see the review below.

    A historical atlas is an atlas that displays spatial information on a historical area at a certain time period. This book in front of you is a historical atlas (collection of maps) about the histories that occurred in Indonesia and those that occurred in the world. The great events that humans always remember are presented in this book.

    Youth Congress I

    The First Youth Congress was held from 30 April to 2 May 1926 at Banteng Square, Jakarta. During the meeting several things were discussed, starting from the composition of the central body, the idea of ​​unity, the role of women, the role of religion, to the role of language in achieving Indonesian independence.

    In 1908, the first national movement organization was born under the name “Budi Utomo”. Since Budi Utomo was founded, various youth organizations with regional characteristics have emerged, such as Tri Koro Dharmo or Jong Java, Jong Sumatranen Bond, Jong Ambon, and others.

    Over time, wider organizations such as the Indonesian Association were born, which later became political organizations. Many other thoughts or ideas also came from many youth organizations that appeared but had one goal, namely the achievement of national goals.
    One of the efforts to reach a consensus was to hold a large meeting, which was later called the First Youth Congress. The First Youth Congress was intended to generate a spirit of cooperation between youth organizations.

    Youth Congress Committee I

    The First Youth Congress was chaired by Mohammad Tabrani and Soemarmo was appointed as his deputy. While the secretary position was filled by Djamaluddin Adinegoro and Soewarso was appointed as treasurer. Apart from that, there were also members of the First Youth Congress consisting of Bahder Djohan, Jan Toule Soulehwij, Paul Pinontoan, Achmad Hamami, Sanusi Pane, and Sarbani.

    Implementation of the Youth Congress I

    In its implementation, the Youth Congress I lasted for three days. During these three days, of course, there will be different discussions at the meeting. The following is the implementation of the Youth Congress I.

    The first meeting

    The First Youth Congress was held on 30 April 1926 at the Vrijmetselaarsloge building (now the Bappenas building), at 20.00. The first day of the congress was opened with a speech by the chairman of the congress, namely Mohammad Tabrani. He talks that there is a way to get rid of the occupiers. Because of that, Tabrani asked all congress participants who attended to become a pillar of strength for Indonesian independence.

    Regarding the Congress, Tabrani also said that the aim of the Congress was to increase the spirit of cooperation among Indonesian associations. After the opening of the Congress, representatives of each association were invited to speak. After everything went smoothly according to its purpose, the first day of the congress ended at 00.15.

    Second meeting

    On Monday, May 1, 1926, the congress was held again at 20.00. The main topic raised was the position of women presented by three speakers namely Bahder Djohan, Stientje Ticoalu-Adam, and Djaksodipoera. On the second day of the congress, Tabrani raised a discussion about women because, according to him, the struggle for independence was not only led by men. Bahder Djohan said that the topic of women is just as important to discuss, as political and economic ideals.

    In a family, a woman who plays the role of a mother can start teaching her children to love their homeland. Therefore, the idea of ​​national unity can be initiated by women in the family circle.

    Apart from that, Mrs. Stientje also stated that although the position of women in Indonesia is not the same, there is one thing in common, namely the inner urge to gain freedom. Likewise Miss Adam, who said women can choose which one is best to campaign for. Then from the third speaker, Djaksodipoera gave his speech entitled “Rapak Lumuh”.

    In his speech he said that the position of women is very weak in marriage, because they can be divorced at any time, but they cannot divorce their husbands. Therefore, Djaksodipoera obliges the wife to have the same rights as her husband. After expressing different opinions, there was a discussion on women’s issues. After the implementation of the second day went smoothly, the second day of congress ended at 24.00.

    Third Meeting

    The third day of the First Youth Congress was held on May 2, 1926 and was held at 09.00. The agenda for the third day of the congress was listening to lectures from two speakers, Moh.Yamin and Pinontoan. Moh. Yamin gave a speech about languages ​​in Indonesia, one of which is Malay which according to him is easy to learn and can be adapted for widespread use. Therefore, Moh. Yamin suggested that Malay could be used as the unifying language of the Indonesian people.

    Apart from that, Pinontoan also talked about the importance of Islam and Christianity in Indonesia. He argued that, in order to achieve national unity in Indonesia, Muslims and Christians had to let go of their bigotry towards religion. Pinontoan said that in a solidarity movement, religion should not play a direct role. After completion, the third day of congress ended at 12.30 WIB.

    Results of the Youth Congress I

    After the First Youth Congress was held in three days, important results or points were found that had been discussed at the congress. The following are the results of the First Youth Congress.

    • The ideals of an independent Indonesia are the aspirations of all Indonesian youth
    • All youth associations strive to unite youth organizations in one forum
    • Recognizing and accepting the ideals of Indonesian unity

    These results can certainly support the progress of the Indonesian nation in terms of youth unity and integrity in Indonesia. Where the role of Indonesian youth was of course very important to make Indonesia a country free from colonialism at that time.

    This book, which elaborates on Pancasila as an Indonesian philosophy on the one hand and on the spirit of mental revolution that can be contributed by it on the other hand, is truly valuable for the treasury of studies related to Pancasila in the current context of our nation’s life. The valuable contribution of this book lies in trying to describe Pancasila with images of our nation’s everyday mental revolution

    Youth Congress II

    The Second Youth Congress was held on 27-28 October 1928 in Jakarta led by Soegondo Djojopoespito from the Indonesian Student Association (PPPI). The congress was divided into three meetings, in which the second session of the Second Youth Congress discussed education issues.

    The Second Youth Congress was the result of the failure of the First Youth Congress in 1926 to realize the ideals of youth unity. In addition, the reason for holding the II Youth Congress was to foster open political ideas among young people through various events.

    For example, the failed KPI rebellion, the emergence of cooperative and non-cooperative youth movements, the return of members of the Indonesian Association from the Netherlands, and the formation of political parties after 1927. At the First Youth Congress which was held at Clubgebouw Jalan Kramat Raya on 2 May 1928 , the young students met and agreed to hold a Youth Congress II.

    This II Youth Congress certainly has certain objectives in its implementation. This congress aims to realize the aspirations of all youth organizations in Indonesia, discuss the problems of Indonesian youth associations, and strengthen national awareness and Indonesian unity.

    Youth Congress Committee II

    On August 12, 1928, youths from various circles met again. At this meeting, the congress committee, time, place and tasks of the second youth conference were decided. After long discussions, it was decided to hold the II Youth Congress from 27 to 28 October 1928 in three different buildings.

    The Second Youth Congress was chaired by Sugondo Joyopuspito and accompanied by RM Joko Marsaid as a representative player. Meanwhile, Moh. Yamin was elected secretary and Amir Sjarifuddin was elected treasurer. In addition, the committee for the Youth Congress II were Joham Mohammad Tjaja (first assistant), R Kaca Sungkana (II assistant), RCL Senduk (III assistant), Johanes Leimena (IV assistant), and Rochjani Soe`oed (V assistant).

    Implementation of the Youth Congress II

    More than 700 people from various groups and religions participated in the Second Youth Congress. The youth organizations participating in the Second Youth Congress were divided into three categories.

    The first category has a regional character, such as Jong Java and Jong Sumatranen Bond. The second category is based on study clubs such as the Indonesian Study Club. The third is based on many nationalisms and religions, such as the Indonesian Association, Jong Islamieten Bond, and others. The Second Youth Congress was held for two days in 3 congresses and 3 different buildings as follows.

    The first meeting

    On October 27, 1928, the first meeting was held at the Catholic Youth Building from 19.30 to 23.30. At this meeting, the participants discussed the importance of the Malay language as a political language to create the unity and oneness of the Indonesian nation. In addition, the idea of ​​hosting a struggle movement in the form of a national organization was discussed.

    Second meeting

    The second meeting was held on 28 October 1928 from 08.00 to 12.00 in the Oost Java Bioscoop building (now Jalan Medan Merdeka Utara). The participants discussed the important role of education in realizing Indonesian independence. The speakers at the congress were Sarmidi Mangoensarkoro, Sarwono, and Ki Hajar Devantoro who emphasized the importance of national education which must be given to all Indonesian children.

    Third Meeting

    This third meeting was held on the same day as the second meeting, namely on 28 October 1928 from 17.30 to 23.30 at the Indonesische Clubgebouw Building. This congress discussed five matters, the scouting procession, presentation from Ramelan for scouting, presentation from the Indonesian Youth Movement and Youth in Tanah Luaran by Soenario, decision making and closing of the congress.

    Results of the Second Youth Congress

    On Sunday, October 28, 1928, at around 10.00 WIB, all participants in the Second Youth Congress gathered to summarize the results of the two-day congress. At that time, Moh. Yamin asked for time to read out the text of the resolution he had adopted.

    In addition, on October 28, 1928, the chairman read out the decisions of the II Youth Congress and obtained the approval of the participants. When it was read out, the congress decision was referred to as the Youth Pledge, which became known as the Youth Pledge. Thus, the Second Youth Congress produced the Youth Pledge, which began in 1959, and is celebrated every October 28 as Youth Pledge Day.

    Contents of the Youth Pledge

    The following is the contents of the Youth Pledge which was the result of the Second Youth Congress which was held on 27-28 October 1928.

    1. We, sons and daughters of Indonesia, confess that we have one blood, the land of Indonesia.
    2. We sons and daughters of Indonesia, claim to be one nation, the Indonesian nation.
    3. We sons and daughters of Indonesia uphold the language of unity, the Indonesian language.

    You, this is an article about the history of the Youth Pledge which discusses the First Youth Congress, the Second Youth Congress, and the contents of the Youth Pledge itself.

  • World Food Agency: Definition, Departments, and Purpose

    World Food Agency – Has Sinaumed’s ever heard of the World Food Agency? The World Food and Agriculture Organization known as the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) is a multinational organization under the auspices of the United Nations (UN). Formed since 1945 in Quebec City, Quebec, Canada. This organization, having moved from place to place, is now located in Rome, Italy.

    The purpose of establishing FAO is to improve nutrition and living standards, increase productivity, marketing to distribution of food and agricultural products. In addition, promoting rural development and eliminating hunger.

    FAO’s efforts are a joint effort to achieve food security and equalize living standards by eliminating hunger. From FAO objectives, there are at least 4 main activities including:

    1. Providing development assistance, especially for developing countries.
    2. Provides information related to nutrition, food, agriculture, forestry and fisheries.
    3. Provide advice to the government regarding food security.
    4. Hold a neutral forum to discuss and formulate policies on the main issues of food and agriculture.

    On this occasion, we will discuss more about the World Food Agency or FAO. In this article, we will discuss everything from definition to departments within FAO. So, read this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of the World Food Agency

    FAO was founded by the United Nations (UN) in 1945, the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) is a neutral intergovernmental organization. This organization seeks to inform and support sustainable agriculture through legislation and national strategies with the goal of reducing hunger.

    FAO contributes to international efforts to end hunger and boost local economies by helping member countries modernize and improve agricultural, forestry and fishing practices. Serving 149 member countries, the World Food Agency also aims to be a neutral forum where countries can negotiate agreements and debate policies.

    FAO is headquartered in Rome, Italy and has offices in more than 130 countries employing more than 11,500 staff members. More specifically, FAO is working to promote public-private partnerships, improve smallholder farming, and develop mechanisms to monitor, mitigate and warn about hazards in the food chain. Funding comes from industrialized nations, development banks and other sources.

    7 Departments of the World Food Agency

    The World Food Agency itself has seven departments, where each department has its own function and duties. The following are the departments within FAO.

    1. Ministry of Agriculture and Consumer Protection

    The Department of Agriculture and Consumer Protection is a department within FAO that promotes agriculture to eradicate human poverty while protecting the environment, ensuring safe food practices and standards.

    2. Department of Climate Biodiversity, Soil and Water

    The Department of Climate, Biodiversity, Soil and Water is the department whose job is to promote sustainable management practices for soil, energy, water, biodiversity and genetic resources.

    3. Corporate Services Department

    The Corporate Services Department is the support department for the entire FAO organization.

    4. Department of Economic and Social Development

    The Department of Economic and Social Development is a department that promotes economic development through internal production and trade.

    5. Department of Fisheries and Aquaculture

    The Department of Fisheries and Aquaculture is a department that promotes the management of aquaculture and fishing.

    6. Ministry of Forestry

    The Ministry of Forestry is a department that promotes resource management through forestry.

    7. Department of Technical Cooperation and Program Management

    The Department of Technical Cooperation and Program Management is the department that supports member countries in their programs and responds to threats and crises related to food and agriculture.

    World Food Agency Strategic Goals

    The official strategic objectives of the World Food Agency include:

    1. Help eliminate hunger, food insecurity and malnutrition.
    2. Making agriculture, forestry and fisheries more productive and sustainable.
    3. Reducing rural poverty.
    4. Activating inclusive and efficient agriculture and food systems.
    5. Increase resilience of livelihoods against the threat of crisis.

    Food Agriculture Organization Program

    In carrying out its function as an international organization for the welfare of children, FAO certainly has special programs aimed at all of its members. These programs include:

    1. Helps Overcome Hunger, Food Insecurity and Malnutrition

    There is sufficient capacity in the world to produce and adequately feed all people, but progress over the past two decades, 821 million people are still suffering from chronic hunger. Among children, an estimated 155 million children under 5 years of age are chronically malnourished and more than 52 million are acutely malnourished.

    So, what we do is support policies and political commitments that promote food security and good nutrition, conduct field research regarding the latest information on challenges and solutions to hunger and malnutrition and ensure that information is accessible.

    2. Making Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries More Productive and Sustainable

    The world population is expected to increase to 9 billion people by 2050 and some of the world’s highest population growth rates are expected to occur in areas that are highly dependent on the agricultural sector.

    Population growth that continues to increase can threaten the stability of food availability if it is not accompanied by the preservation of food production sources. Growth in the agricultural sector is one of the most effective ways to reduce poverty and achieve food security.

    3. Reducing Poverty in Rural Areas

    Most people in rural areas tend to live in poverty which often causes problems of hunger and food insecurity. This is one of FAO’s mission centers.

    In 1990, about 54% of the total population living in rural areas in developing countries lived on less than $ 1.25 per day and were classified as very poor, especially in South Asia and Africa.

    FAO seeks to assist smallholder farmers to increase agricultural productivity while increasing off-farm employment opportunities as well as promoting better ways to manage and address risks in their environment.

    4. Enabling Inclusive and Efficient Agriculture and Food Systems

    With increasing globalization, agriculture as an independent sector will cease to exist, becoming only one part of an integrated value chain. The value chain from production to processing and sales is highly concentrated, integrated and globalized.

    This is a major challenge for smallholders in many developing countries because even the most economical smallholders can easily be excluded from important parts of the value chain. Increasing participation in food and agriculture systems will achieve FAO’s goal of a world without hunger.

    5. Improving Livelihood Resilience Against Threats and Crisis

    Every year many people depend on production, marketing and consumption activities. However, this good condition is not matched by the environment, internal politics or the weather which does not run the same every year.

    Conflicts or natural disasters such as earthquakes, floods, landslides, and even droughts can suddenly strike. Emergency situations like this can threaten people’s production and access to food at the local, national, regional and global levels. FAO’s mission is to help countries manage, prevent and reduce risks that occur and support them in preparing for and responding to disasters.

    Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) Partners

    The Partnerships, Advocacy and Capacity Building Division is responsible for developing partnerships with non-state actors that will help to achieve FAO programs. This includes non-governmental organizations, civil society organizations, academia, research and development institutions, the private sector, producer organizations and cooperatives.

    Food Security Sub System

    The food security sub-system consists of three main sub-systems namely availability, access and absorption of food. Meanwhile, nutritional status is an outcome of food security. Availability, access and absorption of food is a sub-system that must be fulfilled as a whole.

    If one of these subsystems is not met, then a country cannot be said to have good food security. Even though food is sufficiently available at the national and regional levels, if individual access to meeting their food needs is uneven, then food security is still said to be fragile.

    There are several sub-systems of food security, as follows:

    1. Availability Sub System (Food Availability)

    The sub-system of availability is the availability of food in sufficient quantities that are safe and nutritious for all people in a country, whether originating from own production, imports, food reserves or food aid. The availability of this food must be able to provide enough food which is defined as the number of calories needed for an active and healthy life.

    2. Food Access

    Access to food is the ability of all households and individuals with the resources they have to obtain sufficient food for their nutritional needs which can be obtained from their own food production, purchases or through food assistance.

    Household and individual access consists of economic, physical and social access. Economic access depends on income, employment opportunities and prices. Meanwhile, physical access concerns the level of regional isolation/distribution facilities and infrastructure, while social access concerns food preferences.

    3. Food Absorption (Food Utilization)

    Food absorption is the use of food for the needs of a healthy life which includes the need for energy and nutrition, water and environmental health. The effectiveness of food absorption depends on household/individual knowledge, sanitation and water availability, health facilities and services as well as nutrition counseling and toddler care.

    4. Stability

    Stability is a time dimension of food security which is divided into chronic food insecurity and transitory food insecurity . Chronic food insecurity as the inability to obtain food needs at any time.

    Meanwhile, temporary food insecurity is temporary food insecurity caused by drought, floods, disasters or social conflicts.

    5. Nutritional Status

    Nutritional status is an outcome of food security as a reflection of a person’s quality of life. Generally, nutritional status is measured by life expectancy, under-five nutritional status and infant mortality.

    Ways to Maintain Food Security

    Basically, there are several ways you can do to maintain food security, including:

    1. Simple Ways to Solve Food Problems

    The food problem is a global problem that concerns human life. This is because those who have the responsibility to handle it are not only food organizations but all human beings. Each food sector has an important role to play in ensuring food availability.

    There are many ways that can be done to participate in ensuring food availability. No need for heroic ways, just change your lifestyle by eating healthy foods. Moreover, if it can produce its own food for consumption.

    By producing their own food, each individual can play an active role in maintaining world food security. There is no need to wait for the activities of FAO as a world food agency to create global food security.

    2. Consume Healthy and Diverse Foods

    Improving lifestyle by consuming healthy food for a healthy body, also keeping away from various diseases. In addition, it should be noted that consumption of healthy food is good for the health of the body and can play a role in overcoming food problems.

    Consumption of healthy and varied foods is an effort to encourage a variety of healthy foods to be continuously produced. With a healthy and diverse diet will encourage biodiversity.

    3. Select Local Products or Stores

    By choosing local products or buying from local shops/sellers, you can help local farmers and Small Micro Medium Enterprises (MSMEs). This is so that farmers can continue to produce food products and encourage plant diversity. Consumption of local products is also fresher, moreover taken directly from the farmers. Apart from being fresher, consumers can also ensure the quality of the products from the producers themselves.

    4. Choose Seasonal Foods

    Food products circulating in the market when they are not in season can be obtained from foreign imports. The product needs to travel a long way which can reduce its quality. Therefore, it is better to choose to consume food when it is in season, because it is the production of local farmers or producers. The taste and level of maturity of food is also of higher quality and of course still fresh and nutritious.

    5. Initiative to Join the Community

    Instead of just consuming, it would be better to be a producer for self-consumption. The initiative can be by finding and joining communities that aim to achieve food security.

    By producing your own food needs, you can ensure the quality of the product yourself. For example, if you want to consume food that is free of chemical fertilizers, you can replace it with organic fertilizers. Planting activity is also a positive activity to overcome boredom.

    6. Growing food at home

    You don’t have to join collectively, Sinaumed’s can also create green land to grow food at home, you know. You don’t need a large area of ​​land to be able to plant, even with a balcony you can turn it into a place to grow vegetables and fruit for consumption.

    If it is occupied, the food products produced are not only for self-consumption but can be distributed or sold. So besides being able to save expenses it is also profitable when taken seriously.

    7. Respect Farmers by Not Wasting Food

    It looks trivial, but the impact is quite significant, namely not wasting food. By taking enough food so as not to leave a lot of food. In addition, not wasting food means respecting farmers as food producers.

    8. Spread Positive Influence

    Inviting more people to participate in supporting food security could be better. such as the habit of consuming healthy food to the movement to grow needs independently.

    In this day and age, invitations or campaigns can be carried out using social media. On social media you can easily find similar campaigns tagged with various hashtags.

    9. Food Support Program in Education

    Creating serious food security can be done by creating programs in the world of education as a long-term food security investment. Programs in the world of education can be in the form of instilling awareness of the importance of a good diet, promoting healthy food through education, not wasting food and so on.

    So that’s a complete explanation of the meaning, goals and sub-systems of the World Food Agency , Sinaumed’s. Hopefully all of the discussion above can increase Sinaumed’s’ insight.

  • Wifi Inventor and Development History

    Wifi Inventor – In this modern era, of course we are all familiar and familiar with wifi technology. The technology is no longer a luxury tool. Because, almost everywhere we can find it. Starting from coffee shops, small shops, schools, offices, to shopping centers, there are also many that provide wifi.

    Even ordinary houses are now starting to have wifi to support the internet network to keep it stable. When viewed from its definition, wifi is short for Wireless Fidelity, which is a wireless computer network that has been widely used to facilitate people’s activities. But, do you know who invented wifi? So, in this article, we will discuss who invented wifi and the history of its development to date. Don’t forget to listen carefully.

    So, at first wifi could only be used for wireless device users and also Local Area Network (LAN). However, now wifi has a wider function, which is a technology that can be used to access the internet. Behind the presence of the wifi facility that we can enjoy now, do you believe that the inventor was a beautiful woman from Vienna, Austria named Hedy Lamarr. Not only has a beautiful face, but he also has a very bright brain. So that Hedy Lamarr can make a technology and patent it with the name wifi.

    History of Wifi Inventor: Hedy Lamarr

    Hedy Lamarr was born on November 9, 1914. She is better known as a popular Hollywood actress who became famous when she played in a film called Ecstasy. That film finally succeeded in making Hedy Lamarr a famous Hollywood artist during the golden age of MGM.

    It turns out that besides having a beautiful face, this woman who was born in Vienna, Austria is also considered to have a very genius brain. This was proven in 1942, where Hedy Lamarr succeeded in patenting a product called a secret communication system that uses radio frequency to exchange data. The product is considered to be a very strong and important foundation in communication technology.

    This beautiful woman from Vienna has a talent for mathematics, then she tries to fight against the Nazis. Hedy Lamarr, who during World War II was the wife of Fritz Mandl, continued to observe the remote controlled torpedo system. But unfortunately, the technology did not make it to the production stage. Because, at that time such technology was still very vulnerable to jamming originating from enemies. There is one way that can be used to take advantage of the point of weakness, namely by stabilizing the synchronization between the signal from the sender and the signal from the receiver.

    In 1940, Hedy Lamarr met George Antheil, a music composer. The meeting between the two people made Hedy Lamarr interested in inviting George to help him in making a tool that could help in synchronization. Then George also made a system based on the frequency of 88. The frequency is based on the number of keys on the piano. In order to avoid jamming, paper is then rolled which can help to synchronize between one and the other.

    Obtained a Patent Regarding the Invention of Wifi

    After two years of discovering wifi, Hedy Lamarr obtained her patent as someone who invented wifi technology. Initially the name of the invention concept was called Frequency Hopping. However, now the name has been changed to spread spectrum with the same basic idea.

    Then in 1997, Hedy Lamarr received an award from the Electronic Frontier Foundation, then three years later on January 19, 2000, Hedy Lamarr passed away. But until now wifi technology is still being used and developed. Almost all gadgets that exist today, ranging from laptops, smartphones, tablets, to even game consoles, are equipped with a wifi feature as a tool used to connect these devices to the internet. Therefore, many places such as airports, shopping centers, offices, restaurants, hotels, and others provide wifi facilities for the public. Usually the wifi facility provided is called a hotspot.

    What is Wi-Fi?

    Wifi is a form of utilizing wireless communication technology that is quite superior today. Wireless Fidelity or wifi can connect various devices to exchange information in two directions using the help of radio waves. This technology is indeed quite popular among teenagers. According to the Wi-Fi Alliance, namely someone who holds the wifi trademark, this technology has another definition, namely a wireless local area network product or any WLAN based on standards from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers or IEEE 802.11.

    This definition is disclosed because wifi has the ability to operate a Local Area Network or LAN without the use of wires or wireless. Meanwhile, according to experts, wifi also has several other definitions, such as:

    a. Definition of Wifi According to Priyambodo

    Priyambodo revealed that Wifi is an improvement of the internet network component through wireless wireless networking standards.

    b. Definition of Wifi According to Onno W Purbo

    According to him, Wifi is a network that uses radio as an intermediary between devices to be able to share information that can be used simultaneously with a certain speed and capacity that can affect it.

    c. Definition of Wifi According to Yuhefizar

    According to him, Wifi is a standard device used for communication using a wireless local network whose network is based on the IEEE 802.11 standard.

    d. Definition of Wifi According to Doni Kurniawan

    He revealed that Wifi actually existed since the advent of the Pentium Three netbook. So it can be said that ifi is a technology that has existed for a long time. Until then this technology must be provided in netbooks pentium four and the next generation.

    The name Wifi itself was first used as a commercial name in 1991, in August to be precise. The originator of the name Wifi is Interbrand Corporation, a brand consulting company employed by the WiFi Alliance. Interbrand Corporation has been appointed directly by the WiFi Alliance to create a trademark to replace IEEE 802.11b which is considered very difficult to remember by consumers and the general public. With the emergence of a new trademark, namely Wifi, it is hoped that it can become a well-known trademark among the public and certainly easy to remember.

    History and Development of WiFi

    WiFi itself has a long history. From the beginning of its discovery until it could develop into a sophisticated and popular technology as it is today. WiFi technology has been pioneered in the late 1970s by IBM. At that time, IBM was only releasing test results that they had designed, namely a wireless local area network or WLAN using IR technology. At the same time, Hewlett-Packard or HP companies were doing almost the same trials as IBM. It’s just that the difference is that HP only tests WLAN with RF technology.

    But unfortunately, the results of the innovations of the two companies failed to be marketed because they did not meet the IEEE 802.11 LAN standard, namely 1 Mbps. Instead, they can only produce speeds of 100 Kbps. Then in 1985, WLAN development began to enter a more serious stage from a commercial perspective. The FCC designates the ISM band consisting of 5725-5850 MHz, 902-928 Mhz, and 2400-2483.5 MHz to be an unlicensed industrial band. This of course further supports the marketing of WLAN products that were circulating in the market in 1990.

    The products being marketed are WLAN products that are equipped with IR technology, frequency 18 to 19 Hz, and have speeds of more than 1 Mbps, and have SS or Spread Spectrum techniques in the ISM band which make them even stronger. Then in 1997, the first WLAN standard was created by the IEEE or the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. The standard contains 802.11 codes. Where devices that meet the qualifications of the 802.11 standard can work with data transmission speeds of up to 2 Mbps with a frequency of 2.4 GHz.

    In 1999, to be precise in July, IEEE again presented its innovation which had a new standard entitled 802.11b. However, the 802.11b standard has a drawback, namely that it is easier for intervention to occur when it is used together with other devices that also use radio waves with the same or similar frequencies. It didn’t stop there, at almost the same time, IEEE also launched a new standard, namely 802.11a, which is much better and more capable. This is because these standards use different techniques. Where the standard frequency is 5 GHz. So that it can run fast with a speed of around 54 Mbps it has.

    Although technically 802.11a is better than 802.11b, the 802.11a standard has a shorter range. This is because the waves cannot penetrate walls and other obstructions. Then in 2022, IEEE is back with a new standard, namely 802.11g which is the result of combining the advantages of 802.11a and also 802.11b. However, the 802.11g standard can work with speeds of around 54 Mbps and a frequency of 2.4 GHz. The advantage of 802.11g is that the device can be exchanged with the 802.11b standard and vice versa.

    Not content to stop there, IEEE is back again with a stronger existence by issuing a new 802.11n standard. It is the result of a merger between 802.11b and 802.11g. This technology eventually became the newest Wifi technology known as MIMO or Multiple Input Multiple Output. MIMO itself has its own advantages compared to several existing technologies, namely 802.11a/b/g. Not only that, MIMO can also run very fast up to 108 Mbps and can penetrate all kinds of obstacles well and has a wider range.

    One of the figures that is quite important and has an important role in the history of the development of Wifi, namely Vic Haley, who until now is known as the Father of WiFi. This nickname was given to Vic Haley because he was directly involved in the process of designing the first IEEE standard.

    In 1992 and also in 1996, CSIRO, an organization originating from Australia, obtained a patent for a method for dealing with signal interference on WiFi networks. However, there are many other companies that infringe on these patents. So that there were 14 technology companies that ultimately had to pay compensation in the amount of 250 million dollars to CSIRO.

    The development of WiFi at this time is quite rapid. As long as humans on this earth still need an internet network, then as long as WiFi will continue to develop to provide the best for society. If based on observer predictions in 2006, it is possible that in the United States there will be 530,000 hotspots that appear. Even in European countries it can reach 800,000 hotspots. Then in the Asian region there will be even more, namely around 1 million more hotspots.

    Function From WiFi

    As a technology that is loved by many people, WiFi certainly has several useful functions and can make human work easier. The following are some WiFi functions that need to be understood:

    a. Make Internet Network Connection Smoother

    With the presence of WiFi, users can access the internet more easily and practically, as well as with more capable speeds without using cables or wireless.

    b. As File Sharing Media

    WiFi can connect two electronic devices so that they can share files more easily and quickly without the need to install intermediary cables.

    c. Smartphone and PC connector

    By using WiFi, we can connect smartphones to laptops or PCs without the need to use USB.

    d. Using a Smartphone As a Modem

    If our smartphone is connected to WiFi, we can use the smartphone as a modem or hotspot.

    e. Make Internet Connection Faster

    The speed of data transmission that is owned by WiFi technology is indeed very high. Even for the latest version now it can reach 54 Mbps. So that it can make the internet connection faster.

    f. Print on the Printer

    By using WiFi, we can print a document on a PC and transfer it to a printer for later printing without the need to use a USB cable.

    g. Transfer Photos or Videos From Digital Cameras

    Through WiFi, we can directly transfer photos or videos of our work to a PC or laptop.

    How Wi-Fi Works

    Generally, WiFi or Wireless Fidelity operates using the help of radio waves. Radio waves are used as a medium for sending data requested or sent by WiFi users. The signal from the radio waves that are used will later be sent to the router which functions as a code translator or usually referred to as a decoder. After being translated by a code translator, the data will be sent to the internet network. How WiFi technology works with a two-way system, where data obtained via the internet at the same time will also pass through the router to be used as a code. It is then sent back to the wireless computer adapter in the form of a radio signal.

    Those are some explanations about who invented WiFi, the history of its development, to its functions and how it works. In this increasingly sophisticated era, WiFi technology will certainly always be useful to help with all kinds of work and our affairs anywhere and anytime. So, it is appropriate for us to thank the people who have created and also developed this technology.

  • Why Should We Live in Harmony?

    Why Should We Live in Harmony? Humans are social beings who live side by side or in groups with one another. Thus, every human being certainly cannot live alone. This can be seen directly in a certain area in every society which consists of a group of people or groups.

    Therefore, it is fitting that all people in this world must live in harmony side by side. Living in harmony is a life of mutual respect, respect and love among fellow human beings.

    Living in harmony will make between people have a harmonious relationship. The harmonious living atmosphere that is created will make life in society peaceful and peaceful because people can understand each other.

    Not only that, harmonious living conditions will prevent us from having disputes or conflicts. This of course also has an impact on increasing the sense of belonging to one another which creates a safe, peaceful and peaceful life.

    That is why it is important for every society to be able to live in harmony with each other. Because basically humans are social beings who need the help of each other.

    Therefore, there are several important benefits of living in harmony for every community that does it in everyday life. This will certainly form a supportive environment so that the people who live in it will be more comfortable and avoid various disturbances or threats.

    In this one article we will discuss why we have to live in harmony, see until the end of the article, Sinaumed’s.

    Reasons to Live in Harmony

    The following are some of the reasons that every human being can live in harmony in his life, including the following.

    1. Creating Peace

    Sinaumed’s will get one of the reasons as well as the first benefit if he can live in harmony, namely creating peace in his life. This is because each individual can appreciate and respect the differences that exist in other people.

    You can also find out more about the meaning and ways of creating peace through one of the following books, Sinaumed’s. Just click below! Hurry don’t miss it!

    2. Mutual Help Attitude

    Living in harmony among individuals will create attitudes and behaviors that help each other in solving a problem that is happening at that time. This will certainly minimize the existence of disputes to hostility between each of these individuals.

    3. Expanding the Scope of Association

    Another reason to get from living in harmony is to broaden the scope of association with one another. Why is that? This can be seen from the existence of communication interactions in relations between humans that can be well established so that they can expand the existence of connections or relations within the scope of the association.

    4. Creating Harmony

    Living in harmony will certainly make the life you have more harmonious. Thus, every community can respect each other’s differences and help each other to be able to live in harmony side by side.

    5. Creating Good Communication

    Harmony in life will create better interaction and communication within the community. This is what makes communication from each individual better and of better quality from one side.

    6. Creating Prosperity

    In a harmonious life, prosperity will be created. Good prosperity for yourself, others, or others. This is because each individual will focus on improving or improving that will make life even better and prosperous.

    7. Avoid Conflict or Social Conflict

    Good communication will reduce selfishness and prejudice in every human being. This is what fosters an attitude of mutual respect and respect for one another in solving any problems that arise in a calm and deliberative manner so as to avoid a dispute or social conflict in society.

    8. Creating a Safe, Peaceful and Peaceful Atmosphere

    Of course this is one good reason if you can live in harmony within the community. A safe, peaceful and serene living atmosphere will make the environment around you better and more comfortable to live in for longer.

    9. Creating Calm in Life

    Living anywhere will feel calm if the environment around it has a harmonious attitude among each other. There is nothing to worry about any conditions or problems that arise around us if peace and harmony in life are well created. This also needs to be accompanied by a good attitude and role involvement in each individual.

    Sinaumed’s is still confused even though he has read the explanation above about how the solution is to create peace in life. Don’t worry, because you can make the following two books a solution in creating calm in life. Come on, click on the book below! Buy now, don’t run out!

     

    10. Reducing Crime

    Basically, an ordinary crime often occurs regardless of age and other categories. Usually various types of crimes occur not from external factors but from internal factors themselves. Therefore, if you have a harmonious life then crime can be reduced because you can be protected from good attitudes and roles in creating an atmosphere around you.

    11. Creating an Attitude of Mutual Caring and Helping Each Other

    When Sinaumed’s live in harmony, the level of trust and concern among individuals will be very good. This is clearly seen from the avoidance of disputes and the ease with which you can get help from others because of that caring attitude. Living in harmony means being able to respect, help, and care for one another regardless of their background.

    12. Tolerance in Appreciating Every Difference

    Living in harmony will make Sinaumed’s realize that in this life we ​​must be tolerant of any differences that exist in society. With this attitude, we know that in this world there is so much diversity with all its aspects and categories. Thus we can benefit from this harmonious life.

    Well, Sinaumed’s already knows about several reasons why we have to live in harmony through the explanation of the article above. Next, you will find out some of the benefits that you will get if you apply this harmonious life. What are the benefits of that huh? Let’s see below.

    Benefits of Living in Harmony

    The following are some of the benefits that Sinaumed’s will get if he practices living in harmony in the surrounding environment, including the following.

    1. Strengthening brotherhood or hospitality.
    2. Keep away from selfish attitudes and racism.
    3. Improving welfare within oneself or group.
    4. Creating a more conducive and comfortable atmosphere.
    5. Support the achievement of shared goals.
    6. Increase the progress of a nation.
    7. Increase the sense of strength, togetherness, unity and oneness within.

    So, that’s the discussion in this article about why it’s important for us to live in harmony in society. Sinaumed’s must already know about some of the reasons and benefits that you will get if you live in harmony through the explanation of the article above.

    Hopefully after reading this article you can apply it in your life, Sinaumed’s. Even though it’s hard to change it, try to learn little by little to create a better personality with a good atmosphere too.

    If Sinaumed’s has an interest in finding reasons and other benefits about the importance of living in harmony, you can look for references to related books that are only available on the sinaumedia.com website , which are ready to become #Friends Without Borders in accompanying you to grow and move forward every day. Happy learning and hopefully useful!

    Author: Elsya Islamay

  • Why Salty Seawater

    Why is the sea water salty – know the causes, processes and unique facts about why the sea tastes salty and other unique facts

    According to geomarine geology scientists, salt in the sea is the result of rainwater which previously carried mineral ions from land to sea. As a result of carbon dioxide in the air which then dissolves into the rain water it will taste salty.

    When rainwater falls, it releases the salt mineral content which separates into ions which are carried by the flow of water from the land to the ocean. The following below are several theories that explain why seawater then tastes salty. Check these out!

     

    Causes of Salt Sea Water?

    Every part of the ocean tastes salty even though the level of saltiness varies. One of the reasons oceanographers love using salinity to study the oceans is because there are only a few ways that it can change it, and almost everything happens on the surface or on the ocean floor.

    For example, surface water in the Mediterranean Sea is usually saltier when compared to the equatorial Pacific, this is due to increased evaporation in dry climates which then concentrates the salt, while rain on the Equator dilutes the salt.

    This salinity itself is inherent in sea water. This is the result of the give and take of ions that enter and leave the ocean. The same process occurs in other waters although ion intake is not always high enough to make the water completely salty.

    This is the reason why rivers and streams that deliver salt to the sea are still considered fresh water. Dilution from rain tends to offset whatever ions they carry. The oceans meanwhile, act as the salt dumps of the world, and no amount of dilution can change that.

     

    1. Mineral Content

    According to the National History Museum, seawater is salty because it contains lots of minerals. This mineral is obtained from rocks on the mainland. How did this mineral then get to the sea?

    Carbon dioxide in the air that combines with rainwater. This mixture then makes the rainwater slightly acidic. This acidic rainwater then breaks down the minerals and ions in the rocks.

    These minerals and ions are then carried by river water to the sea. Because it has been going on for a very long time, minerals and ions keep accumulating. The content of these substances will then cause sea water to become salty.

    Another source that causes seawater to taste salty is hydrothermal fluids. Quoted from the US National Oceanic and Atmospheric Institute (NOAA), this liquid comes from vents on the ocean floor.

     

    2. Heated sea water

    Seawater will seep into the cracks on the ocean floor. This water will then be heated by magma that comes from the earth’s core. This heat will give rise to several chemical reactions. Water will release oxygen, magnesium, sulfate and some iron.

    This reaction then adds to the salt content in seawater. Chloride and sodium are the most abundant ions in seawater. Nearly 85% of seawater is sodium and chloride. 10% of seawater contains magnesium and sulfuric acid while the remainder is other ions.

    Minerals from rocks and chemical reactions themselves are the main cause of salty seawater. This seawater seeps into the cracks in the ocean floor. This water is then heated by magma that comes from the earth’s core.

    The heat causes several chemical reactions. Water will release oxygen, magnesium, sulfate and some iron. This reaction then adds to the salt content in seawater. Chloride and sodium are the most abundant ions found in seawater. Nearly 85% of seawater is sodium and chloride.

    10% of seawater contains magnesium and sulfuric acid while the remainder is other ions. So what causes why seawater is salty isn’t fish urine at all, huh. Minerals from rocks and chemical reactions are the main causes of salty seawater.

     

    3. Hypersaline

    The Dead Sea contains hypersaline waters because the salt content is very large due to inequilibrium evaporation processes so that humans easily float on the surface of the Dead Sea.

    In the Dead Sea there are also various types of water between salty and fresh, namely in the area between the sea and rivers, namely brackish water. Currently, on average every 1 kilogram of seawater contains 35 grams of salt.

    The saltiness of the oceans on Earth also varies, the most foreign ocean water is the Atlantic ocean, because there is more evaporation than falling rainwater and rivers that flow into it.

    However, the variation in the level of saltiness of each ocean is very small, but has an impact on the circulation of ocean currents. So it turns out that at first the ocean was a bit salty and the water from the rivers just kept making the sea water even saltier. Researchers don’t know for sure what will happen next, whether the sea water is getting saltier or vice versa.

     

    5 Processes Causing Salty Seawater

    Since school we have studied the cycle of rotation of water (hydrology). But maybe you are wondering, why does sea water taste salty? It is from these stages that the sea water tastes salty.

    That is, when water flows through objects on land such as soil and rocks, the salts and minerals contained therein are carried away by the water flow.

    Mineral content that flows like mineral salts: potassium, calcium and sodium will then remain in seawater, while H2O (hydrogen dioxide) will turn into clouds. This is another reason why sea water tastes salty.

     

    1. Temperature Level

    The temperature level for each area is different. The Dead Sea in Israel for example, the sea water there is 30% saltier than other sea water, with very hot temperatures, the evaporation process then becomes bigger resulting in a very high level of saltiness of sea water.

    Vice versa, when the air temperature is cold, the sea water is not so salty, for example in Finland. The sea water is not salty so it won’t hurt your eyes when swimming.

     

    2. Rainfall

    Rain as the most basic process why sea water is salty. When the water seeps into the ground, then flows in the rivers, and passes through the rocks, the mineral salt content will then be carried away by the water currents to the sea.

    Thus, the mineral content will be concentrated in the ocean. Even though in fact the ground water produced from the rain process also contains salt, only in very small amounts.

     

    3. Hydrothermal ventilation

    It turns out that the seabed also has various processes and stages that support the nature and workings of the sea. Other reasons why seawater is salty include hydrothermal vents, a seafloor process in which jets of extremely hot water occur.

    In addition, the process of volcanism is also the cause of salty sea water. With this process water then dissolves a lot of mineral content.

     

    4. Salinity of Each Region Is Different

    Salinity or saltiness (salt content) dissolved in water also affects the saltiness of seawater somewhere. However, every ocean certainly has a different salinity, one of which is influenced by the temperature in the area.

     

    5. Evaporation

    The temperature in an area not only affects the saltiness of seawater, but also affects the evaporation process. For example, the Dead Sea in Israel is 30% saltier than other seas, meaning that the evaporation process that occurs is greater.

    Therefore sea water has a salty taste. This is because the salt content on the mainland is also carried away by the flow of water towards the sea and is concentrated in the ocean. Thus causing seawater to taste salty.

     

    Unique Facts of the World’s Oceans

     

    1. Glowing Sea Water Phenomenon

    Have you ever found the phenomenon of sea water that can glow. This turns out to be due to a chemical reaction between plankton and oxygen where they will then produce “bioluminescence” or commonly known as light emission which causes seawater to glow.

    Bioluminescence (Bioluminescence) is the light produced by sea creatures as a defense mechanism. The chemicals in this creature’s body when balanced with atmospheric oxygen will then produce light.

     

    2. Phenomenon of the Red Sea

    The next most amazing phenomenon is where the sea water turns red. This is caused by the presence of red algae which are rich in the pigment phycoerythrin.

    This algae will also multiply and make the water look red. This algae itself can actually harm fish populations because it can deplete oxygen stocks.

     

    3. Ice Flower in the Ocean

    Ice flowers are not only in the Frozen cartoon. In the real world there is a phenomenon of ice flowers over the ocean. This phenomenon also occurs because the temperature around the ocean is very cold with little wind speed.

     

    4. Expanse of Red Salt

    Red Salt Expanse as is one of the marine phenomena that rarely occurs in the world. This salt bed suddenly changed color. The red algae attack and make the salt across the ocean turn red.

     

    5. The Milky Sea Phenomenon

    Milky Sea refers to the unique milky radiance in the waters of the Indian Ocean. This phenomenon occurs due to the action of luminous bacteria and in turn, causes the water to turn blue, which to the naked eye appears milky white in the dark. The Milky Sea phenomenon has been documented and exists for more than four centuries.

     

    6. Convergence of the Baltic and North Seas

    This marine phenomenon has become a highly debated topic. The North and Baltic Sea convergence point occurs in the Skagen Province in Denmark. However, due to the different levels of density in the ocean waters, the ocean waters remain separated or split apart even though convergence occurs.

     

    7. Steam phenomenon in the Black Sea

    This steam phenomenon in the Black Sea is also known as sea smoke, steam that comes out of the Black Sea due to the humidity of the ocean water which is opposite to the coolness of the wind above the surface of the water.

    Apart from explaining the ocean mystery behind the steam rising from the Black Sea, experts have also proven that the phenomenon is quite common in smaller bodies of water.

    8. The phenomenon of Green Flashes or Lightning

    Green The phenomenon of green flashes occurs at sunset and sunrise. Usually visible for only a few seconds, these green flashes are the result of a natural prismatic effect from Earth’s atmosphere.

    As the sun sets and rises, the light emitted by the sun diverges into several colors, which are seen by flashing a green flash.

     

    Baltic Sea Anomaly

    The Baltic Sea was accidentally discovered by a team of diving experts in 2011. Divers found a 60-meter-thick coiled entity at nearly 90 meters deep in the Baltic Sea.

    A track seemed to lead to the entity, which the divers measured to be around 300 meters. Although various scientists have provided innumerable suggestions about the origins of the entity, the Baltic Sea anomaly still remains one of the world’s oceanic intrigues and unsolved mysteries.

     

    1. The Brinicle Phenomenon

    This phenomenon occurs when concentrated salty water that comes out of the frozen ice that forms above sea level seeps into the depths of the water. However, once the concentrated salt gets under the surface of the water, due to natural processes it freezes and brinicles form.

    Brinicle or brinickel occurs in cold ocean waters around the poles. Many refer to it as an underwater ice tornado or cold finger of death, others as ice stalactites and underwater crystals.

     

    2. The Red Tide Phenomenon

    Red tides or often also referred to as phytoplankton blooms are a natural phenomenon that often occurs because the frequency, intensity and distribution of phytoplankton blooms have increased in the last 10 years.

    Red tide itself can be defined as a condition where small single cell plants that live in the sea grow very quickly and accumulate in a collection that is easily visible on the surface of the sea water.

    Red tide itself is closely related to eutrophication and environmental conditions that support it, such as adequacy of light, suitable temperature conditions, and input of organic matter from the mainland after heavy rains.

    The direct effects of red tides on fish themselves can damage the gills, either mechanically or through the formation of toxic chemicals, neurotoxins, hemolytic or blood clotting agents, which can cause physiological damage to the gills, major organs (such as the liver), intestines, circulatory or respiratory systems, or interfere with the process of osmoregulation.

    Conversely, the indirect effect of red tides is the excessive use of oxygen for respiration and the decay of the phytoplankton assemblage. Some of the organisms that cause red tides can harm humans if humans eat filter feeder animals (such as fish or shellfish) that contain the toxins of red tide organisms that have been eaten by the fish or shellfish.

     

    4. Sea Foam

    Sea foam or sea form occurs due to the disturbance of organisms on the surface of the water, this occurs due to constant tides. Or, in certain cases, this sea foam is also caused by disturbances caused by various human activities such as dumping toxic waste into sea waters.

     

    5. Underwater Crop Circles

    Once thought of as objects of high intrigue, crop circles or circles under the sea are later described as creative demonstrations of the pufferfish’s search for mates.

    This crop circle also has a circumference of more than six feet or about 1.8 meters. Often decorated with shells and other decorative items found on the ocean floor. Underwater crop circles found under the waters of the Japanese island of Amami Oshima.

    That’s all the info about the Causes, Processes and Unique Facts About Why the Sea Tastes Salty and Other Unique Facts. If you want to know about the unique facts of the universe, you must have this encyclopedia. sinaumedia is always here as #FriendsWithoutLimits for you to accompany you during the pandemic by presenting quality books and products while staying at home.

    Hope it is useful!

  • Why is Unity So Important for the Indonesian Nation?

    Why is Unity So Important for the Indonesian Nation? – What comes to your mind when you hear the word unity? The word unity is often associated as an important thing that must be owned by every nation. If interpreted, unity comes from the word ‘one’ which means whole and not divided.

    In a broader sense, unity is the gathering of various styles from various backgrounds, races, customs and cultures in a unified society. The question is, why is unity so important for the Indonesian nation?

    A number of basic concepts, such as unity, unity, nationalism, nation, national integration, and patriotism are contained in the substance of national unity. Simply put, unity means the combination of several parts into something whole.

    The unity of the Indonesian nation living in the territory of the homeland means national unity. A conscious and responsible will to achieve national life in an independent state has encouraged the unity of the Indonesian nation.

    National unity needs to be fostered to produce a complete condition that demonstrates security, glory and peace. Maintaining national unity is very important. Unity reflects one picture of the integrity of the state.

    Quoted from the Ministry of Education and Culture’s website, NKRI is a broad form of country and has a diversity of tribes, customs, beliefs, and cultures. The Indonesian nation needs to cultivate a sense of unity because this nation is an archipelago that is spread out with many differences.

    The basic objective of the establishment of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia is to become an independent, united, sovereign, just and prosperous nation. The birth of the spirit of the Republic of Indonesia which is related to the diversity of the Indonesian nation is the values ​​of unity and oneness.

    In fact, the values ​​of unity can be clearly understood from the state constitution and Pancasila as the basis of the state. The third precept of Pancasila has reflected the condition of Indonesian unity which is intact and not divided.

    The meaning of the importance of unity cannot be separated from the struggle for independence that has been achieved by the Indonesian nation. With unity, the Indonesian people will have the determination to live together and will not be swayed.

    Unity has an important meaning for the Indonesian nation to avoid conflict and divisions between social groups. This relates to the condition of Indonesia which consists of various cultures.

    The Indonesian nation must uphold unity between peoples and groups to maintain sovereignty and independence. As previously stated, this principle has been stated in the third point of Pancasila.

    The motto ‘United we stand, divided we fall’ is one of the behaviors of unity in society. This motto can be interpreted as an effort to respect each other, respect fellow citizens, maintain good relations with others, and behave politely to fellow local people.

    The Indonesian nation can create pluralism in society through unity. The simple word ‘unity’ will make motherland difficult for other parties to divide.

    The motto ‘Unity in Diversity’ has upheld the unity of the Indonesian nation. This motto was formulated by the founding fathers of the nation to serve as a reminder to the people that life in Indonesia is inseparable from what is called unity.

    6 Reasons for the Importance of Unity for the Indonesian Nation

    1. Not Easily Divided by Other Nations

    One of the reasons for the importance of maintaining unity is so that it is not easily divided by other nations. The politics of devide et impera or in Indonesian is called the politics of pitting one against the other will remind us of the importance of unity.

    In the past, the Dutch divided the indigenous archipelago into two groups, namely those who were helped and those who were fought. The Archipelago group that ganged up on and defeated the embattled group was one of the groups assisted by the Dutch.

    After successfully defeating the group that was being fought, the group that was helped would be charged by the Dutch. It’s like ‘no free lunch’. Then the Netherlands will ask for special privileges to the group it helps.

    The privileges obtained usually took the form of interfering in family matters, trade monopolies, and interfering in the affairs of the empire. This picture, of course, occurs because there is no sense of unity.

     

    2. Strengthening Indonesian National Identity

    Strengthening national identity is another reason for the importance of unity for the Indonesian people. Strengthening national identity will maintain regional culture in every tribe in the country.

    In addition, unity can help strengthen national identity from cultural attacks from other nations in the era of globalization which seems to erase boundaries between countries. Then unity can strengthen national identity so that there are no prominent differences between people.

    3. National Development will Run More Smoothly and Safely

    The Indonesian nation will progress more easily if national development runs smoothly. In addition, unity will also make it easier to achieve the national goals contained in the 4th paragraph of the 1945 Constitution. Without unity, civil disorder is likely to ensue.

    This condition will make the government’s focus in national development shift to alleviating societal chaos. For this reason, national unity is needed to facilitate national development.

    4. Maintaining harmony and establishing hospitality

    A sense of unity is important to create an atmosphere of peace, security and serenity. With unity, the Indonesian people can create a balanced, harmonious and harmonious life among themselves. It can be concluded that unity will overcome all differences that arise with full awareness.

    5. Strengthening National Resilience in Defending the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia

    The unity and integrity of the nation is very important for a country so that national resilience has a strong foundation. Colonialists and imperialists once colonized our nation in the era of exploration.

    At that time, the Indonesian national hero fought invaders from Portugal, Spain, the Netherlands, England and Japan. For example, Teuku Umar and Cut Nyak Dhien fought to expel invaders for the sake of Aceh’s own land.

    National heroes try to rise up against the actions of the invaders with regional struggles and wars. This description is one of the proofs that a sense of unity is important to strengthen national resilience.

     

    6. Prevent War or Conflict from Occurring

    In order to avoid the occurrence of a conflict that will harm both parties, unity is important for the integrity of a country. Without a sense of unity, short-term and long-term social relations will be damaged.

    Back to the question in the title. Why is unity so important for the Indonesian nation? The main answer is that the Indonesian people can live side by side and avoid conflict. National unity can be said to be a very powerful weapon to seize, defend and fill independence.

    • Dimensions of Pancasila as an Open Ideology
    • History of Pancasila
    • Understanding Pancasila as a Source of Value
    • The Meaning and Meaning of Pancasila as State Ideology
    • Understanding Pancasila Democracy
    • History of the Garuda Pancasila Coat of Arms
    • Purpose of APBN Preparation
    • Understanding Archipelagic Insight
    • The Meaning of Pancasila as the Source of All Sources of Law
    • Meaning of the Youth Pledge
    • The Practice of Pancasila Values
  • Why is the Sun Called the Biggest Source of Energy on Earth?

    Why is the Sun Called the Biggest Source of Energy on Earth? – The benefits of solar energy can be felt by all living things, both humans, animals and plants. Previously, did you know why the sun is called the largest source of energy on earth? Check out the full reasons in this article.

    The sun is a celestial body in the form of a gas-filled ball that can bring heat and light to the earth during the day. In science, the sun is known as a planet or celestial body which is the center point of the solar system’s circulation.

    The sun as the closest star that provides the much-needed energy to support life on earth. As a celestial body, the sun is a giant ball with a diameter of 1.4 million km which has a fairly dense core and produces thermonuclear reactions.

    The sun as the center of the solar system has a very large gravity. This causes the members of the solar system to revolve around the sun. The core, photosphere, chromosphere and corona are the layers inside the sun.

    The sun is the closest star that has its own light source due to a fusion reaction process in its core. Therefore, the sun is often referred to as the only star that shines during the day. The sun is composed of 75% hydrogen and 20% helium. While the rest of the mass is heavy elements, such as carbon and oxygen.

    The temperature of the sun is closely related to the color of the sun. Morning sunlight will be red to yellow because it has a high wavelength. The light will pass through the thick atmosphere to reach our eyes.

    Later in the afternoon and evening, the sun will appear white to yellowish-orange at sunrise and sunset because it emits the entire spectrum in visible light. The atmosphere also plays an important role in changing the color of the sun.

    As the main source of energy for planet earth, the sun can cause various physical and biological processes. The sun emits a source of energy that is formed through a nuclear reaction. If traced deeper, the surface of the sun has a temperature of around 5,500 degrees Celsius.

    This energy is then emitted by the sun to planet Earth in the form of electromagnetic wave radiation. As a star with an intermediate mass, the sun is estimated to be 4.6 billion years old.

    Not only is it the largest source of energy on earth, the sun is the largest source of energy in the Milky Way Galaxy, you know, Sinaumed’s. Humans can experience the various benefits of the sun’s heat to generate electricity, a source for the formation of vitamin D, and so on.

    Why is the Sun Called the Biggest Source of Energy on Earth?

    Sinaumed’s, please note that the energy that is around you can be felt all the time. Energy can come from many different sources. The sun is one of the most important and largest sources of energy on planet earth.

    The sun produces rays that warm the earth. This allows air and water to circulate. The following are some of the reasons why the sun is called the largest source of energy on earth.

    1. The Sun Keeps Earth Warm

    The sun plays an important role in providing the right temperature for the survival of organisms on planet earth. The sun maintains the temperature of the earth to make it a comfortable place to live. Earth as the third planet receives just the right amount of solar energy to keep water liquid.

    Water itself is one of the supports of life on earth. The sun will move to heat the earth’s surface and the earth will heat the air above it. Then the sun’s heat allows the cycles of rain, wind, weather, and climate. Furthermore, wind will be used by humans to become the newest energy source that is environmentally friendly.

    2. The sun helps plants photosynthesize

    The light produced by the sun can be used directly by plants to carry out photosynthesis. Where photosynthesis plays an important role as a producer of oxygen and a source of food for plants.

    Photosynthesis itself can be interpreted as the process of plants processing food for their survival. For plants, sunlight is the best source of nutrients that must be met to carry out photosynthesis.

    The green substance of the leaves will absorb the energy of sunlight along with the water and mineral content in the soil. As living things, plants are the main producers on planet earth. It can be concluded that plants photosynthesize using solar energy.

    After that, plants would form the basis of the food chain that could provide energy for all higher forms of life. Then indirectly the sun’s energy can make living things that have died into fossils. After that, fossils produce petroleum and coal as energy sources.

    3. The sun produces a source of electrical energy

    To sustain life and support daily activities, humans need energy. The condition of the earth that is getting hotter makes people turn to think about environmentally friendly fuels.

    The sun is a source of energy in large quantities that will not run out. Humans can take advantage of sunlight and convert it into electrical energy through solar panels installed on the roof of the house.

    As a model of the newest energy source, solar power plants utilize solar heat. This latest model of power plant consists of large mirrors or panels that will catch sunlight to a point.

    Then the captured solar heat can be used to produce pressurized hot steam. The hot steam can be used to run turbines that produce electricity.

    Photovolataic cells made of silicon are the principle of solar panels used to capture sunlight. Now solar cells are widely used as solar power calculators. Many solar panels have been installed on the roofs of houses or buildings in urban areas to get free electricity.

    4. The Sun Holds Back the Entire System

    The sun, as the closest star, becomes a unifier for planets and other celestial bodies in the solar system that move around it. The sun’s immense gravitational force can hold entire rotating systems in outer space.

    5. The Sun Regulates the Weather and Provides a Livable Environment

    Solar radiation is useful for regulating the weather and providing a livable environment for living things. Without the sun, life will not run.

    6. The sun as a timepiece

    To determine the time, the phenomenon of alternation of day and night is needed as a guide. The sun as a celestial body that has a dominant role on other planets can be used as a basis for calculating time. In ancient times, humans watched the movement of the sun to see the time.

    There are three main divisions of time in history, namely the time when the sun rises to show the morning, the highest position of the sun to show the time of the afternoon, and when the sun descends to sunset shows the time of the afternoon. Then the three main divisions of time are followed by the disappearance of the sun becoming dark as a marker of night time.

    7. The Sun is the Source of Earth’s Lighting

    Earth would be very dark and cold without sunlight. This gas-filled ball can help produce light and maintain the temperature of the earth where living things live. Living things, both humans, animals and plants will freeze to death without the presence of sunlight.

    Those are some reasons that can be proof why the sun is called the greatest energy on earth. Sinaumed’s can see and feel directly the sun as a source of life which plays an important role for living things.

  • Why is the Sky Blue? Check out the answer here

    Why is the sky blue? For Sinaumed’s who are still wondering about this, in this article we will discuss it in full. Precisely during the day, especially when the weather is sunny, the color of the sky will look blue. Actually, this one phenomenon is the same as the blue ocean phenomenon. When viewed from a distance, it will appear blue, but when approached, the water will appear clear.

    Certainly, curiosity arises in our minds, how can the sky appear blue? Actually this can be explained scientifically. If we used to learn about the refraction of light, we can know the blue color of the sky through one of the sciences of physics.

    Causes of Blue Sky

    The following are some reasons why the sky is blue.

    1. There are short light waves

    The source of light in the universe is the Sun. Its white light radiates to the planets that surround the Sun, including the Earth where humans live. When sunlight shines on Earth, the white light passes through Earth’s atmosphere.

    In a physics lab, the atmosphere can be likened to a glass prism. Where the Earth’s atmosphere which contains various kinds of gases such as carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, and others will cause light to become fragmented when passing through it.

    The split light will turn into different waves. There are long waves and there are some short waves. The long light waves will change to yellow, orange, and also red. Meanwhile, short light waves will be blue and green. These colors can be received by the retina of our eyes.

    2. Short Light Waves Scatter in Space

    If long light waves could be carried straight up a very long distance, then most of the short waves would be scattered in space. That’s what can make most of the sky blue compared to other colors. The short-wave light actually seems to envelop the Earth, so that the vast sky will also appear blue.

    Why is the Sky Blue? The following are the three main factors according to Rayleigh’s theory

    It turns out that there are three factors that can affect the color of the sky, namely sunlight, Earth’s atmosphere, and also human vision. However, keep in mind that the blue color of the sky is not caused by the reflection of the blue color in the ocean, as many people have believed so far. The following are three factors that can affect the blue color of the sky.

    1. Sunlight

    When viewed with the naked eye, sunlight will give the impression of a yellowish white color. However, actually sunlight consists of various colors like the colors of a rainbow, if we look at it from a prism. From there we can see that sunlight consists of various kinds of color spectrum. Where the colors are different waves.

    Reporting from the Zenius page, red has a longer wavelength when compared to other colors such as violet and blue. Now, we already know that sunlight has a spectrum of colors and also various waves. So, the question is, why is the sky blue? To answer this question, we need to first identify the components that exist and what actually happens in the Earth’s atmosphere.

    2. Earth’s atmosphere

    The atmosphere is one of the factors that affect the sky that appears blue. However, what are the particles in outer space? Of course there are many types of particles, with the most abundant notes of Oxygen or O2 and also Nitrogen or N2. The content of nitrogen in the air can reach 78 percent, while oxygen reaches 21 percent. The rest is carbon dioxide, sulfur dioxide, carbon monoxide, and others.

    When sunlight enters the Earth’s atmosphere, there is an interaction between the light and also the particles in the atmosphere. This interaction will cause Rayleigh scattering of light or what can be called Rayleigh Scattering.

    Blue and violet light which has a shorter wavelength will be more easily absorbed by molecules in the air. So, the blue and violet light will be more scattered and also scattered.

    Then, why is the sky blue, not purple or violet? Given that the wavelength is shorter than blue, this is because the intensity of violet or purple light is lower than that of blue. Below is an illustration of the intensity of the color spectrum emitted by sunlight.

    3. Human Sight

    Basically, the human eye is more sensitive to blue than to violet. Sunlight, which has various wavelengths and a spectrum of colors, is scattered due to the interaction between light and particles in the atmosphere.

    Blue and violet colors with shorter wavelengths are scattered and more abundant than the other colors. Then, our eyes which tend to be more sensitive to blue identify the color of the sky as blue.

    Rayleigh Scattering Theory

    Why do short light waves make the sky blue? Actually, this can be explained based on Rayleigh scattering theory. According to this theory, the scattering intensity is inversely proportional to the wavelength to the fourth power of the scattering. The scatterer referred to here is the sun. That means, the smaller the length of the wave, the greater the intensity of the scattering.

    Blue and violet have shorter wavelengths than the other colors. The maximum solar spectrum is in the blue wavelengths. This is what causes the most dominant visible range scattered by the atmosphere is blue.

    The theory of Rayleigh scattering refers to the elastic scattering of light or other electromagnetic radiation by particles that are much smaller than the wavelength of the radiation. According to Rayleigh’s law of scattering, the intensity of the scattered light is inversely proportional to the fourth power of the wavelength of the scattered light. Rayleigh’s law of scattering can be written like this:

    medcom.id

    So, what do these symbols mean? Simply put, the λ sign refers to the wavelength of light. Therefore, the longer the wavelength, the less scattering will occur. Vice versa, the shorter the wavelength, the more scattering will occur.

    Why Can the Sky Also Appear Orange?

    If during a clear day the color of the sky becomes blue, then in the morning and also in the evening, we will usually find the color of the sky to be orange. How come? This happens because short light waves will be replaced by long waves.

    This change is caused by the sun in the morning and evening looking inclined or not right in the middle. It causes long waves of light to be received. As a result, the sky in the morning and evening will appear orange, yellow or reddish.

    Why Does Sunlight Look Yellowish White?

    Besides being able to see the blue sky during the day, the sunlight that is visible to the eye will also emit a yellowish white light. How did it happen? Because the spectrum of the Sun that is visible to the eye has passed through scattering particles with lots of scattering in blue and violet colors.

    As a result, sunlight will appear yellowish white. At a closer distance, the color of the Sun will appear whiter. This is because light from the sun cannot pass through the scattering particles, so they still contain all the mixed colors.

    This is also related to the color of the clouds that look white. The clouds that appear white are caused by water vapor particles whose diameter is above one-tenth the length of the Sun’s wavelength. Therefore, the scattering is not dominantly dependent on the wavelength. The color of clouds that appear white in physics has been explained through the Mie scattering theory. Where cloud particles exposed to sunlight will scatter them into white.

    Blue Sky Associated with Colloids

    The color of the sky that looks blue is associated with colloids. Where the air in space is a colloid system. The colloid will be affected by the tyndall effect when exposed to sunlight. After that, the sun’s light will be scattered and then split into various kinds of color waves. The colloid can be called a mixture consisting of two or more substances that are homogeneous. However, the size of the dispersed particles is quite large. So that colloids will be more easily affected by the tyndall effect when exposed to sunlight.

    Apart from space, colloids can also be seen anywhere. For example, in milk, clouds, and also clouds. The cytoplasm inside the cell is also an example of a colloid.

    Tyndall effect

    As previously explained that colloids will be affected by the Tyndall effect when exposed to sunlight. So what is the Tyndall effect? The Tyndall effect is an effect that occurs when a solution is exposed to light. When a true solution is exposed to light, the light will not be scattered. Because colloidal particles have a relatively larger size to scatter light. Likewise, in a true solution, the particles are relatively small, so the scattering of light will be very small and difficult to observe.

    The Sky on Earth is Inversely Compared to the Sky in Space

    Unlike the sky on Earth, where we usually see it in blue, the sky in outer space will look darker. In fact, the distance to the Sun is relatively closer. So, actually outer space itself is pitch black, but that doesn’t mean it’s dark without light.

    We can take the example of a room with windows painted black. Is it during the day in the room can not be seen anything? Absolutely not. We can apply this example to answer questions related to why the sky in outer space looks darker.

    Outer space is a vacuum, so nothing can reflect light. In addition, outer space consists of 4.9 percent matter, such as planets, gas, stars, and so on, then about 26.8 percent contains Dark Matter. Meanwhile, about 68.3 percent contains something called Dark Energy. This causes outer space to appear darker and blacker.

    We can point the flashlight over an empty space. Then the light coming from the flashlight will not have any effect. Such is the analogy of dark outer space. So, no matter how many stars there are in space, if there is nothing to reflect light, it will cause conditions to remain dark.

    The Role Of The Atmosphere Is Very Important

    As explained above, that sunlight that has penetrated the atmosphere is one of the reasons why the sky is blue or causes other colors on Earth. This atmosphere also serves to reduce radiation from sunlight during the day. Meanwhile at night, the function of the atmosphere is to remove excess heat.

    If there was no atmosphere, then surely the sun’s rays would not be able to reach the Earth and the sky, as it is now, would not occur either. Not only that, if 100 percent of the sun’s radiation reaches Earth without passing through the atmosphere, then we can be sure that our planet is no longer a good place to live. Because there will be no human being who can survive when exposed to radiation from the Sun in full. So it should be as living things that live on Earth to always protect nature and also the environment so that it remains sustainable.

    Thus the explanation of why the sky is blue and the theory that discusses it. Hopefully every discussion in this article can provide benefits as well as add to your insight.

  • Why is the Debate Text Included in the Exposition?

    Why Debating Texts Are Classified as Expositions – Surely Sinaumed’s already understands that debate and exposition texts are material in Indonesian language courses. Yep, both texts use valid data and facts before writing them according to the structure of the text.

    Then, did Sinaumed’s know that the debate text is one of the types of exposition text? Therefore, it can be said that the debate text is a “child” of the exposition text.

    why that thing could happen? What are the reasons behind the fact that the debate text is included in the type of expository text? So, so you don’t get confused, let’s look at the following reviews!

    Reasons Why Debate Texts Are Included in the Exposition

    Previously, we must know what debate text and exposition text are. Simply put, a debate text is a text that contains an argument by comparing the opinions of other parties related to a particular discussion. Meanwhile, expository text is an essay that is useful for conveying arguments with the aim of convincing others.

    So, here are three reasons why the debate text is included in the expository essay.

    1. Text Structure

    The debate text and the exposition text actually have the same structure, you know  Namely, they contain statements of opinion, a series of arguments, and reaffirmations.

    This statement of opinion or often referred to as a thesis “acts” as an essay opener. Then, a series of arguments that contain various arguments about a particular topic. Then, reaffirmation which contains conclusions from the previous explanation.

    So, because both of them need arguments whose data must be valid, in conveying an opinion, it must also be accompanied by supporting facts so that the reader can be sure of your argument. Therefore, the debate text is classified as expository essay, because it is not permissible to have an opinion based on a particular topic.

    2. Linguistic Rules

    As with structure, debate text and exposition text also have more or less the same linguistic rules. The linguistic rules are related to the use of technical words in the text.

    One of the language rules is to use persuasive words to influence and convince the reader, for example ” expected “, ” should “, ” necessary “, preferably , and so on.

    3. Common Goals

    Both the debate text and the exposition text have judgments, encouragement, opinions, and certain invitations to the reader to be sure of what has been conveyed through the writing.

    Therefore, a debate text can be a type of expository text because there are three things in common between the two.

     

     

     

    Recognizing Debate Texts

    The debate text is one of the texts in the Indonesian material. This debate text can indirectly train students for writing, speaking, and listening skills.

    According to Tarigan (2015), debate is an argument made to determine whether or not a proposal is good or bad, with the presence of two parties, namely as supporters or affirmative; and the other party as a denier. Through this opinion, it can be concluded that in a debate there must be two parties who have opposing arguments about a topic.

    Furthermore, according to Semi (2003), debate is a skill of arguing by complaining or comparing opinions face to face. The meaning of the word “complain” does not mean something negative, but can also be interpreted as an activity to compare opinions with other parties regarding a topic being discussed.

    Now, based on the understanding conveyed by these two figures, it can be concluded that a debate text is a text or writing that contains arguments, both pros and cons, based on data validity, related to the topic that has been given so that the reader can be sure and believe in what is said. has been stated in this article.

    Debate Text Structure

    1. Introduction to Issues , this section will contain an introduction to the topic or issue to be discussed.
    2. Series of Arguments , in this section will contain a series of arguments or reasons that state whether the author agrees or denies the topic being discussed. The argument must be supported by valid data evidence.
    3. Reaffirmation , in this section will contain statements stating conclusions and reaffirming the arguments that have been presented previously.

    Variety of Languages ​​in Debate Texts

    • Using standard language rules, both spelling and grammar (covering the formation of words, phrases, clauses, sentences and paragraphs).
    • Arguments must be based on facts and acceptable to common sense.
    • The arguments conveyed have one meaning that can and directly go to the target, in a systematic order so that they can form effective sentences.
    • The selected vocabulary has real meaning.

    Debate Text Language Rules

    1. Using Mental Verbs

    Please note that the debate text is an argumentative text, so that in writing it will use a lot of opinion sentences. Well, mental verbs that are usually found in debate texts, for example predict, assume, argue, guess, want, understand, know, agree, and so on.

     

    2. Using Personal Pronouns

    The debate text is indirectly a form of communication that involves two parties directly, so that in writing you have to use first person and second person pronouns. For example, we, I, we, you, and you .

    3. Use of Conjunctions

    As with other texts, debate texts must also have conjunctions in their writing. The conjunction needed is a causality conjunction, namely one that is convincing or conclusive. For example, cause, effect, so, thus , and so on.

    In addition, chronological conjunctions are also needed or which express time relationships, for example before, finally, after, then , and so on.

    4. Use of Sentence Definitions

    If you look at the structure of the discussion text, at the beginning it will contain an explanation of a concept related to the topic or issue to be discussed. Therefore, there will be the use of sentences that state the definition of a thing, for example, that is, is, is, that is , and so on.

    5. Use of Terms

    The debate text has many focus themes, for example education, environment, to religion. So, in explaining the argument, it is necessary to use terms related to certain fields.

    For example, in an environmental theme that takes the topic of illegal logging, it would be natural to use the words reforestation, afforestation and protected forest.

    6. Use of Persuasive Words

    Persuasive words are words that aim to influence and convince the reader or listener regarding the arguments presented. For example the words need, should, should, and expected .

    Things To Look For In Compiling Debate Texts

    A good debate text is when there are solid and effective issues, arguments, and conclusions. So, here are the things that must be considered in compiling a good debate text.

    1. Problems or Issues to be Discussed

    The issues that will be discussed in the debate text should be issues that are currently happening and which are likely to raise pros and cons. The criteria that determine the issue get the pros and cons are:

    • Touching the emotional side of the public
    • Get the attention of the masses in terms of humanity
    • Issues are in demand and discussed by many people

    2. Viewpoints or Arguments Presented

    After determining the issues to be discussed, the next is the point of view or argumentation which will be structured in a concrete, logical, and scientifically justifiable manner.

    In compiling this argument there must be two parties, namely:

    • The pro party, namely the one who gives a statement of agreement related to the problem that has been determined.
    • Counter parties, namely those who provide rebuttals or statements of disapproval regarding the issues that have been determined.

    So, when compiling an argument, both the pros and cons, it must contain the following:

    • The reasons stated are logical by showing a causal relationship related to the problem.
    • The reasons stated are logical by showing real examples of these arguments.
    • Can be trusted and can be proven that the arguments presented are true as they are, accompanied by valid evidence.

    3. Conclusion

    After compiling valid arguments, the last step is drawing conclusions. In compiling conclusions, it must be objective both from the pros and cons.

     

    Getting to Know What Expository Text Is

    After discussing the debate text, next is the exposition text. The exposition text is more or less the same as the debate text, because both have valid arguments in their delivery.

    The most striking difference between these two texts is that the expository text does not try to convince the reader or listener of the arguments that have been presented. This is because the expository text only provides information and knowledge.

    According to Kosasih (2016), expository text is a text that expresses opinions or ideas from the point of view of the author, and serves to convince other parties that the arguments they have conveyed are true and based on facts.

    Then, according to Rusyana (2012), expository text is a type of essay that explains the main ideas so that it can broaden the reader’s knowledge.

    Now, based on the understanding that has been conveyed by these two figures, it can be concluded that expository text is a text or writing that contains an explanation of the main contents of the author’s thoughts, ideas or ideas accompanied by facts so that readers can easily understand them.

    Exposition Text Function

    As with the debate text, this exposition text is also included in the type of text that is argumentative. Therefore, indirectly, expository text serves to raise awareness or provide information to readers and listeners.

    Characteristics of Expository Text

    • Writing that conveys knowledge or information related to a subject to readers or listeners.
    • Does not affect the reader, so that it seems to leave the decision to the reader whether they will believe and believe in the arguments that have been presented.
    • Not subjective and emotional in its delivery.
    • It seems to be able to answer the questions about what, when, why, and how of the matter being discussed.
    • Do not impose the reader’s attitude on the reader.
    • Don’t take sides with any of the facts.

    Expository Text Structure

    Previously, it has been explained that the structure of the debate text and the exposition text are the same, so that the debate text can of course be included in the exposition text.

    1. Introduction to the Issue or Thesis 

    This section will contain an introduction to the topic or issue to be discussed. This section tends to introduce issues or even general opinions related to the issues to be discussed. Opinions expressed in this part of the thesis are usually general truths that cannot be disputed.

    1. Argument Series

    This section will contain a series of arguments or reasons that state whether the author agrees or denies the topic being discussed. The argument must be supported by valid factual evidence.

    1. Reaffirmation or Conclusion

    This section will contain statements stating conclusions and reaffirming the arguments previously presented, starting from the beginning to the series of arguments.

    Expository Text Language Rules

    Likewise with the rules of language, the debate text and exposition text have more or less the same things.

    1. Using statements that contain facts to prove the truth of the author’s argument.
    2. Using statements that contain expressions that are judging or commenting.
    3. Use of causality and chronological conjunctions.
    4. Use of mental verbs.
    5. Using standard language.

    Types of Expository Text

    According to Kurniasari (2014), exposition text has eight types, namely:

    1. Definition Exposition Text, namely writing that focuses on the theme or topic to be discussed.
    2. Process Exposition Text , that is, the writing contains certain processes related to the theme or topic being discussed.
    3. Classification Exposition Text , that is, the writing contains categories related to the theme or topic discussed.
    4. Comparative Exposition Text , namely writing that contains comparisons between the ideas or opinions of the author and other things.
    5. Analytical Exposition Text , namely writing that contains an analysis of a particular topic.
    6. Illustrated Exposition Text , which contains a simple description of a topic with other topics. Through this simple description, it will usually make the reader understand the intent of the author.
    7. Contradictory Exposition Text , which contains arguments that are contradictory to one another with regard to certain matters or topics.
    8. News Exposition Text , which contains notifications of an event that has occurred, such as news.

    Well, that’s the explanation why the debate text is included in the exposition text. The similarity between the two texts is the use of arguments which must be based on the validity of data or facts, so that the writing of the arguments should not be arbitrary. Meanwhile, the difference between the two lies in their purpose, namely whether to entice readers to believe or not.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    Source:

    Joseph, Muhammad. (2020). Indonesian High School Learning Module: Content Analysis of Indonesian Class X Debates . Jakarta: Ministry of Education and Culture.

    Sihombing, YK (2020). The Use of the Learning Cycle Learning Model in Learning to Write Expositional Texts.

    Rosdiana, DS (2018). Learning to Analyze Oriented Exposition Texts on Thesis Sentences Using a Problem Based Learning Model for Class X Students of SMA Negeri 27 Bandung in the Academic Year 2018/2019 (Doctoral dissertation, FKIP UNPAS).

    Nurahmat, SD (2019). Learning to Analyze the Content of Debate Texts Oriented to Motions and Arguments Using the Creative Problem Solving Method in Class X SMA Nusantara Bandung in the 2018/2019 Academic Year . (Doctoral dissertation, FKIP UNPAS).

     

  • Why is Indonesia’s population not evenly distributed? The following are the reasons and contributing factors

    Why is Indonesia’s population not evenly distributed? Following are the reasons and causative factors – The distribution of the population in general is the distribution or distribution of the population. This population distribution is closely related to the occupancy rate and population density in Indonesia, which is not evenly distributed. Approximately 60% of the population who live on the island of Java only has an area of ​​approximately 6.9% of the total land area of ​​Indonesia.

    In general, the level of population density is defined as the ratio of the number of residents to the area or area they occupy based on a certain unit area. The population density in each region in Indonesia is not the same, this of course can lead to population problems.

    A. Factors Why Indonesia’s Population Is Not Evenly Distributed

    This problem relates to the provision of social facilities and infrastructure, employment opportunities, security stability, and equitable development. As a result, the distribution of the population in Indonesia is uneven. The following are several factors that affect the uneven distribution of the population, including:

    1. Physical Factors

    Areas that have easy-to-build landscapes tend to have more population than areas that are difficult to develop.

    2. Climate Factors

    Regions with ideal climate conditions have a much higher population density than areas with extreme climate conditions.

    3. Soil Factor

    Areas with high soil quality can accommodate more people than areas with marginal soils.

    4. Vegetation Factor

    Areas with dense vegetation tend to find it difficult to support a larger population.

    5. Water Supply Factor

    Areas with adequate and well-maintained water supplies will be able to support more people than areas without water sources.

    6. Factors of disaster and disease

    Areas that are not in areas prone to disasters or diseases that tend to have a fairly high population density.

    7. Natural Resource Factors

    Regions with abundant natural resources tend to have a higher population concentration than areas with poor resources.

    8. Communication Factor

    Areas that are easy to build communication and transportation facilities tend to have a higher population concentration than remote areas.

    9. Economic Factors

    Economic factors have a very high influence on population density. Subsistence economies tend to require large areas to meet people’s needs while intensive commercial economies require only a small amount of space.

    B. The Impact of Indonesia’s Unequal Population

    The existence of an unequal population distribution can be influenced by the attractiveness of cities with all social, business and cultural facilities that have economic opportunities to encourage urbanization. This is common in a number of countries, especially in developing countries, and Indonesia is no exception.

    So it is not imaginary that many densely populated urban communities will have various negative impacts on the management of the state system. The following are some of the impacts that are the result of uneven population distribution, including:

    1. Social, economic and cultural gaps

    Life in society sometimes experiences social, economic and cultural inequalities. Migration often occurs which is characterized by reduced population which means rural areas will often be abandoned by young people. This will affect the cultural sector in an area because there is pressure on certain areas with high densities. In general, a city is an area or area that requires a lot of space to accommodate a large population. But not all areas can afford it, because there are some areas or areas that are so urbanized that they only have a small amount of green space left. The region includes the northeastern United States, eastern China and central Japan. The good or bad quality of the environment is influenced by the amount of available green space.

    2. Depleting resources and increasing air pollution

    Environmental conditions are very important in everyday life. Therefore, the resources needed by humans are of various types and benefits. A large population requires large and abundant natural resources, for example water, energy and food resources. Ineffective and inefficient ways of using it will use up various types of natural resources. Besides that, it can increase pollution and damage the surrounding environment, for example, if an area is densely populated, it will result in high fumes from motorized vehicles and industrial areas.

    3. Lack of contact with nature

    Today many big cities build housing complexes by clearing a green area. This is one example that in the city area they are starting to create an environment without any contact with nature and its benefits. These changes have a negative impact on nature by losing green open spaces that have benefits in human life.

    4. Exploitation of natural resources

    Humans now do a lot of exploitation of natural resources owned by an area. Dense population can lead to excessive exploitation of natural resources. Increasing needs (clothing, food and shelter) are able to do something to meet these needs. Forests are the target of the community to meet their needs. Illegal logging, emptying of forest land and so on will cause natural disasters without us knowing it, for example floods, landslides, forest fires and so on. Destruction of nature will disrupt the balance of nature itself, so be wise in exploiting natural resources.

    5. The emergence of illegal settlements (slum areas) in densely populated areas

    Dense population will result in the emergence of poverty if it is not matched by the existence of adequate abilities and skills. The bad impact of experiencing poverty will have an impact on environmental conditions, for example a place to live or a slum area (slum area). This happens a lot in urban areas, because of the high competition for survival, it will be difficult, so in the end they choose to live in makeshift places. Slum areas are often found in riverside areas or in narrow alleys. The presence of a slum area will reduce green open space and the surrounding environment will be prone to pollution. One of them is that in Indonesia there are many slum areas that do not have proper sanitation and in the end the disposal will go straight to the river.

    6. Social problems (theft, robbery and prostitution)

    In densely populated areas there will be competition for jobs. It is likely that many will experience unemployment (not getting a job), so in this case they will have difficulty surviving. From this point of view, it is possible for them to commit theft, robbery and even become prostitutes to make ends meet. Therefore social problems are very dangerous, so be careful in taking care of yourself in social problems and in relationships. Associating can also have a bad impact if you can’t sort out friends to hang out with.

    7. Water pollution

    Water pollution often occurs, starting from households and ending in the sea. The increasing population will affect the amount of waste production or domestic waste which becomes environmental pollution. In general, many people tend to throw garbage directly into the river. This will result in the accumulation of waste and is accompanied by a change in the quality of the water which becomes dirty because it is polluted due to the materials contained in the waste.

    8. Lack of manpower in an area

    Areas that have a low population will have an unfavorable impact. In the development system, it will experience a relative slowdown due to the lack of labor availability. In addition, the community will also urbanize with the aim of getting decent jobs with higher and appropriate salaries. This will cause the area of ​​origin to lose a productive workforce that gradually disappears. This will have an impact on decreasing productivity and a relatively low rate of product growth which will eventually slow down the development of the economic structure in a particular village or area. Industrial areas in Indonesia are currently numerous and require a large number of workers, so it is necessary to have an even distribution of population throughout the region.

    9. Inadequate education

    Education is very important in life, there are still many areas where the development of education is lagging behind, especially in remote areas. This will make it difficult for children to get an education in general. Education is an asset that must be owned and it is even better to get a higher education. In remote areas, in general, education for them is an ordinary thing, but education is important. In addition, remote areas have facilities and infrastructure that are inadequate and fulfill the existing conditions, therefore many of them are left behind in education. But for now there are many government activities that carry out education in remote areas,

    10. Traffic jams

    In a city, it often experiences traffic jams due to the dense population that drives motorbikes, cars and so on. Congestion often occurs and is a problem for everyone going to or coming home from work and so on. Traffic jams are also a waste of time and this often happens in big cities like Jakarta. The higher the population of an area, the higher the volume of vehicles with less possible road capacity and traffic jams cannot be avoided. In addition, the problem of congestion can also result in traffic accidents either intentionally or unintentionally. Congestion that can not be avoided can make a solution in the use of public transportation,

  • Why Don’t Ships Sink? Here’s Why!

    Why Ships Don’t Sink – Sinaumed’s, have you ever seen a ship at sea? This transportation is currently often used to transport passengers and goods. When you see a ship sailing, maybe some of us will wonder, “Why doesn’t this ship that weighs tons sink and float in the sea? Pebbles that weigh only a few grams will immediately sink when we throw them on the same surface.

    This article will provide a review of the factors that cause why the ship does not sink, even though it has a very large load. However, before that we need to know the etymology and types of ships that exist today.

    Etymology

    The word “ship” in Indonesian and Malay comes from the Dravidian language family “kappal”. This word started appearing in Tamil literature after the 17th century, namely கப்பல். Before the 17th century, the word “ship” in Indonesian literature always referred to foreign-made vessels (in this case India), while the word “boat” referred to large vessels (see: K’un-lun po), until eventually actually replaced by the word “ship” to refer to large water vehicles.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), a ship is a vehicle for transporting passengers and goods at sea, rivers, swamps, and so on, made of wood or iron, has one or more masts, has a deck, and is driven by engines or sails.

    Ship Types

    Ships are actually very difficult to categorize, mainly due to the many criteria on which the classification is based. However, the ships that exist today can generally be categorized into three types, namely based on propulsion, type of voyage, and function.

    1. Driving Force

    Based on the propulsion, ships are divided into five types, namely:

    • human-powered boats (rowers);
    • Diesel or motor boats;
    • Sailing boat;
    • nuclear ship;
    • Steamship or fireboat.

    2. Type of Sailing

    Based on the type of voyage, ships are divided into four types, namely:

    • hovercraft or hovercraft;
    • floating ships;
    • surface ships;
    • Submarine.

    3. Functions

    Based on its function, ships are divided into types, namely:

    • Freight ships or cargo ships;
    • Ferries or ferryboats;
    • Passenger ship;
    • Warship;
    • tankers;
    • Icebreaker;
    • tugboats;
    • pilot boat;
    • barges or pontoons;
    • tenders;
    • Ro-Ro Ship;
    • refrigerated cargo ships;
    • Dredger;
    • Container ships or container ships;
    • Tiger trawler.

    The Origins of the Working Principles of Marine Ships

    Archimedes of Syracuse.

    Actually, there are differences of opinion regarding the theory that underlies the working principle of marine vessels. However, the main basis for the creation of ships in the world that is recognized is the law of the mathematician of the third century BC from Greece, namely Archimedes of Syracuse.

    Archimedes of Syracuse was a mathematician, physicist, engineer, astronomer, and inventor who lived around 287 BC–212 BC. He studied in the city of Alexandria, Egypt. Some historians view him as one of the greatest mathematicians in history, along with Sir Isaac Newton and Johann Carl Friedrich Gaus.

    At that time, Hieron II, a friend of Archimedes, became king of Syracuse. Archimedes became known to people after he received an order from Hieron II to prove the purity of his gold crown.

    He then went home and took a bath in his tub. He noticed that there was water spilling out when he went inside. At that moment, he realized that the water that came out weighed equal to the weight of his body that went into the water. He remembered that pure gold would sink and some water would come out, so he could find the density by calculating the weight of gold divided by its volume.

    From this event, Archimedes was able to find out the density by calculating the weight of gold divided by its volume. He then compared it to the density of a king’s crown. If the density of the king’s crown is lighter, the crown is said not to be made of pure gold, but a mixture of other metals. This eventually became the formula for buoyancy used in the ship system.

    Archimedes’ Law

    With Archimedes’ law, we can classify objects into three types. These objects include sinking, floating, and floating objects. Objects can sink if the lifting force of the water is less than the weight of the object, while objects will float if the lifting force of the water and the object’s weight are the same. For objects that can float occurs when the lifting force of water is greater than the weight of the object.

    Archimedes’ law reads as follows:

    An object that is partially or completely immersed in a liquid will experience an upward force equal to the weight of the liquid it displaces.”

    So, this law explains that there is a relationship between gravity and upward force in an object when it is placed in water. As a result of the upward lift (buoyancy), of course, objects that are in the liquid will experience a reduction in weight. As a result, objects lifted in water will feel lighter than when lifted on land.

    1. Drown

    This situation occurs when the density of the liquid is less than the density of the object. For example, iron or steel will sink if put in water because the density of iron is greater than the density of water. When submerged, the weight of the object in the liquid is greater than the upward force exerted by the liquid.

    The force of water pressure < the weight of the object

    2. Drift

    This situation occurs when the density of the liquid is the same as the density of the object. The floating object is between the bottom of the vessel and the surface of the liquid. For example, an egg placed in water with a little salt added will float because the density of the two is the same. The same thing happened to fish. The fish can equalize its weight with the weight of the water it displaces so it can float.

    The force of water pressure = weight of the object

    3. Floating

    This situation occurs when the density of the liquid is greater than the density of the object. For example, styrofoam or plastic will float if placed in water.

    The force of water pressure > the weight of the object.

    Relationship between Buoyancy and Density

    If a one cubic centimeter block of wood is placed in a container of water, the amount of water displaced will be equal to the weight of the block of wood. In the case of wood, the weight of the water displaced is small, so the buoyant force is greater than the force of gravity and makes the wood float.

    Then, what if the blocks of the same size are made of tin? Tin has a higher density, so it will displace more water than wood. The gravitational force in the lead exceeds the buoyant force and causes it to sink.

    Archimedes’ principle states that the force exerted on an object in a fluid is equal to the weight of the fluid displaced (moved out) by the object. The buoyant force pushes it upwards against the object. Gravity exerts a downward force on the object, which is determined by the object’s mass. If the force exerted by an object with gravity is less than the buoyant force, the object will float or float.

    Reasons Ships Don’t Sink

    Ships can have a mass of hundreds of thousands of tons, let alone those that use steel. Steel is much denser than water. However, the steel ship remained afloat. This is because a large ship displaces a very large amount of water too.

    Unlike the case with a stone that we throw into the water will sink. This is because the rock only displaces a small amount of water. The rock sinks because it is heavier than the amount of water it displaces.

    An object will float, float, and sink in a liquid because the density of the object is compared to the density of the liquid in which the object is immersed. So, an object will float if the density of the object is less than the density of the liquid. An object will float if the density of the object and the liquid are the same. Objects will sink if the density of the object is greater than the density of the liquid.

    So what affects density? As explained above, density is the ratio between an object’s mass and its volume. That is, the smaller the mass of the object (the lighter), and the greater the volume of the object, the smaller the density.

    Say, a needle and a vessel are placed in the same liquid (which must have the same density). The needle will sink because the density of the needle is greater than the density of water, and it is still greater than the density of the ship.

    Why is the density of the ship smaller than the density of the needle? The reason is that ships have such a large “room” along with cavities filled with air, which makes the “volume” of ships so large and causes their density to become smaller.

    Confused? You see, density is mass divided by volume. If the volume increases while the mass remains the same, the result of division will certainly be more. Just try the number 8 divided by 2 = 4, while 8 divided by 4 = 2. So it’s smaller right?

    Density also depends on the type of material. A solid cube of the same size made of wood will of course have a lower density than a cube made of metal.

    When a ship sinks, water enters the ship and forces the air inside out, so the average density of the ship is greater than that of the water.

    Titanic at Southampton dock before departure.

    One of the famous ship tragedies is the sinking of the Titanic. The ship was built from 1909 to 1911 by the Harland and Wolff shipyard in Belfast. There were 1,317 passengers on the Titanic at that time: 324 in first class, 284 in second class, and 709 in third class. 869 (66%) of them were men and 447 (34%) women.

    There were 107 children on board, most of them in third class. Titanic was deemed not to have reached capacity on her maiden voyage, as she could accommodate 2,566 passengers – 1,034 in first class, 510 in second class and 1,022 in third class.

    After leaving Southampton on 10 April 1912, Titanic stopped at Cherbourg, France and Queenstown (now Cobh), Ireland before sailing west to New York. On April 14, 1912, four days after sailing, exactly 375 miles south of Newfoundland, the ship struck an iceberg at 23:40 (ship time; UTC-3).

    This collision and friction caused Titanic’s hull plate to buckle inward in several places on the starboard side and ripped five of sixteen watertight compartments. Over the next two and a half hours, the boat slowly filled with water and sank.

    The number of passengers and crew were evacuated into lifeboats, most have been released in a state of half-full. Many men in disproportionate numbers – nearly 90% in second class – left because officers were loading the lifeboats comply with the protocol “women and children first”.

    Just before 2:20 a.m., the Titanic broke and its bow sank with a thousand people on board. The people in the ocean died within minutes from hypothermia caused by contact with the freezing ocean. 710 passengers safely removed from the boat by the RMS Carpathia a few hours later.

    The wreck of the Titanic was rediscovered in 1985 and is still on the seabed today, but slowly disintegrating at a depth of 12,415 feet (3,784 meters). The Titanic has become one of the most famous ships in history. His existence continues to be remembered in a number of books, films, exhibitions, and memorials.

    One of the most important legacies of this disaster is the establishment of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), which governs maritime safety until now.

    Experiments at Home

    Even though it sounds simple, some of Sinaumed’s’ friends may be confused about understanding the working principles of marine vessels. So, to make it easy to understand, we will provide an overview using the objects available at home. You only need to prepare a bowl or other container that is similar in shape.

    When done, place the bowl above the surface of the water. The object will definitely float and swing to the rhythm of the crashing water.

    Then, when you gently press the bowl inward, the water will react in the form of an upward push, so that the bowl can still float. That’s more or less what happens in ships.

    So, Sinaumed’s is a brief explanation of the working principle of the ship that keeps it from sinking in the ocean. Archimedes’ law is actually a simple physics principle, that is, any object that is submerged in water, either in whole or in part, will receive an upward force pushing it to make it float. This principle is also often referred to as the principle of buoyancy.

    However, it should also be understood that in such cases the density of the ocean liner must be less than that of water in order to float. That is what makes the sea vehicle have a section filled with air cavities. This part of the hull makes the ship balanced and floats in the ocean. Apart from air cavities, one other thing that allows ships to float on the surface of the water is the depressions at the bottom.

    ***

    “While at sea, the ship exerts pressure on the water. The weight of the ship pushes the water downward, then with the same force, the water exerts pressure on the ship in the opposite direction, namely upward.

    (Jalaluddin Rumi).

    ***

     

  • Why does seawater taste salty?

    Why does seawater taste salty?

    Why Sea Water Tastes Salty – If there is a joke question about why sea water tastes salty, the answer must be original but also true, because there is salt in it. There is even a study which suggests that the salt content in seawater is an average of 3.5 percent.

    This means that every 1000 ml of seawater will contain 35 grams of salt. Therefore, many people who live on the coast rely on salt from sea water.

    Then, why does sea water taste salty? How is the use of salty sea water for humans? If sea water is polluted, is the salt content also polluted?

    So, so that Sinaumed’s isn’t curious about this, let’s look at the following review!

    Explanation Why Sea Water Tastes Salty

    Actually, the water doesn’t have to taste salty, but it can also taste fresh. Even though it turns out that fresh water also contains salt levels but not too high, namely below 0.5 ppt.

    The main reason why seawater has a salty taste is because its salt content or salinity is very high, around 3.5 percent. The salt content includes chloride (55%), sulfate (8%), sodium (31%), magnesium (4%), potassium (1%), and the rest is bicarbonate, bromide, boric acid, fluoride, strontium approx. 1%.

    However, not all seawater has the same salt content in every place. Then where does the salt content in seawater come from? Is it suddenly salty? Of course not, there are two sources for the salt content to reach the seawater, namely by the phenomenon of rain and hydrothermal fluids.

    Through the Phenomenon of Rain

    Sinaumed’s must be no stranger to the origins of rain, right? Yep, this material has always been discussed since elementary school because the presence of rain is very familiar to everyday human life.

    When sea water is exposed to the sun’s heat, the sea water will evaporate “up” and form clouds. The clouds are blown by the wind towards the mainland. After the water droplets in the cloud form grow larger, the droplets will fall to the surface of the earth. That is what is called the rain process, in simple terms.

    So, when the falling water mixes with carbon dioxide from the surrounding air, it makes it slightly acidic and can even erode rocks. Apart from eroding rocks, it turns out that rainwater can also break down minerals and ions in rocks.

    The mineral and ion content will later be carried away by the river flow and eventually towards the sea. Please note, if these minerals and ions accumulate, they can cause a salty taste, so that’s what makes seawater taste salty.

    This process occurs for a long time and continues repeatedly until without us knowing it, the minerals and ions will be “recycled” making seawater taste very salty.

    Through Hydrothermal Fluids

    The next source of the salty taste in seawater is the presence of hydrothermal fluids originating from vents on the seabed. Please note that on the seabed, there is a kind of crack that is shaped like a vent.

    The existence of a vent on the seabed causes seawater to seep down to the seabed, then it is heated by magma that comes from the earth’s core. When you get volcanic heating (because of the size of the earth’s core), a chemical reaction will occur.

    The chemical reaction in the form of water will release oxygen, sulfate, magnesium, and other minerals, then add ions or salt content to seawater. Therefore, the salt content in seawater will increase, causing seawater to taste very salty.

    Factors Influencing Seawater Salinity

    Seawater salinity is the amount of salt content contained in seawater, which of course each region has a different salinity. Many factors affect the salinity of seawater in the waters of the entire planet, namely:

    1. Evaporation

    As previously explained, the salty taste of seawater comes from the rain phenomenon. In the phenomenon of rain, there is a process of evaporation or evaporation. The greater the evaporation rate of seawater, the higher the salinity level will be. Conversely, if the evaporation rate of seawater is low, then the salinity level will also be lower.

    2. At least many rivers that flow

    The more rivers that empty into the sea, the lower the salinity of sea water. Conversely, if there are a few rivers that empty into the sea, the salinity level of seawater will also be higher.

    3. Rainfall

    The greater the rainfall in an area, the higher the salinity of seawater will be. Conversely, if the rainfall in the ocean is low, then the level of salinity will also be lower.

    4. Carbon dioxide (CO2)

    Carbon dioxide is the main element in the process of photosynthesis, especially needed by phytoplankton and aquatic plants. Carbon dioxide can also be formed in water by the process of decomposition (decomposition) of organic matter by microorganisms. This usually occurs in polluted water.

    5.Magnesium (Mg)

    The magnesium content in seawater is around 1,300 ppm, in addition to sodium. Even sea algae and oysters also contain Magnesium which is 6000-20,000 ppm and 1,200 ppm respectively.

    6. DO (Dissolved Oxygen)

    DO (Dissolved Oxygen) is dissolved oxygen, also known as Oxygen Demand. This is one of the elements to analyze water quality.

    The greater the DO value in water, the better the water quality will be. Conversely, if the DO value is low, it can be seen that the water has been polluted.

    7. Calcium (Ca)

    The presence of Ca content in water with a certain level, is very useful for the growth of bones and teeth. However, if excessive, it can cause corrosive effects.

    8. Aluminum

    The maximum limit for aluminum content in water is about 0.2 mg/l. If it is more than that, the taste of the water will be unpleasant for consumption.

    9. Sulfates

    Excessive sulfate content in water can cause scale to form in the water boiling pot. In addition, it can also cause odors that even cause corrosion in pipes.

    10. Organic Substances

    Actually, the organic matter in the water comes from food nutrients and other energy sources for the flora and fauna that live in the waters. However, if you overdo it, it can also cause an unpleasant odor that can make your stomach ache when consumed.

    11. Nitrates and Nitrites

    The large amount of nitrate in the water will hinder the passage of oxygen in the human body that consumes it.

    Utilization of Sea Water for Life

    The existence of sea water certainly provides many benefits for everyday human life. Not even for human life, but also for this planet earth. What are the benefits of sea water besides being used as a land to earn rupiah coffers?

    Come on, see the following reviews!

    Benefits of Sea Water for Planet Earth

    • Acts as a climate controller on Earth, namely by transferring heat from the equator towards the poles.
    • The source of the rain, both on land and in the ocean itself.
    • Hot ocean currents can improve climate, especially in the areas passed by these currents.
    • Shallow seas make climate temperatures and droughts not just happen.
    • Cold currents cause climate, especially in desert areas.

    Benefits of the Sea for Humans

    1. As a Food Source

    In the sea there are lots of marine animals and plants which of course can be consumed by humans, and even have a high nutritional content. Call it fish and seaweed. Even health experts also recommend consuming fish frequently because it is proven to make the body healthy.

    2. As a Place of Recreation

    Recreational activities can not only be done on land, but also in the ocean. The view of sea water which is dominated by blue color is the people’s favorite choice to relieve fatigue from daily activities. Moreover, coupled with a breezy wind.

    3. As a Transportation Field

    Continents, countries, to provinces throughout the planet are actually separated by oceans. Especially in countries that have ocean territory, to go from one place to another must use means of transportation.

    Therefore, the ocean was chosen as the field for this means of transportation. Many are aware that sea transportation has a major impact on human life.

    4. As a Defense and Security Tool 

    Especially for Indonesia, which is an archipelagic country, will definitely rely on sea waters to maintain the integrity of this nation and state. Other countries that want to come to this country must use sea transportation in the form of ships.

    Well, the existence of fishermen will also play an important role in maintaining the sovereignty and integrity of the state, namely by participating in supervising water areas.

    5. As a Sports Facility

    Apart from being a means of recreation, sea water is also useful as a means of sports, one of which is surfing or surfing. This sport takes advantage of large ocean waves.

    6. Source of Energy

    Large oceans can actually be a source of energy for human survival. Especially the waves and powerful currents can be used as energy to turn turbines to generate electricity.

    7. As a means of education and research

    It should be noted that to date, only 5 percent of the oceans have been successfully explored and researched by humans. The rest, still leaves many unsolved questions and mysteries of nature.

    Therefore, the oceans and their contents will be useful as a means of human education and research in order to take advantage of the natural wealth of the sea.

    8. As a Source of Minerals and Mining

    Not only as a source of food, it turns out that the ocean can also act as a source of minerals and mining, for example oil and other natural minerals. However, even in obtaining it should not be arbitrary, so that the ocean ecosystem is still maintained.

    9. As a Source of Drugs

    The existence of marine biota and plants turns out to contain many substances that are useful for healing several diseases, you know…

    For example, seaweed, which is often known as a healthy food, also has benefits for health and beauty.

     

     

    Sea Water Pollution

    Unfortunately, increasingly here, sea water has actually been polluted by various substances and other components causing the quality of the water to decline. Based on Government Regulation No. 20 Article 1 paragraph 2 of 1990 concerning Water Pollution Control, it explains that water pollution is the process of entering or inserting living things, substances, energy, and other components into water, through human activities, causing the water quality to decrease to to a certain level, causing water to no longer function according to its designation. 

    Previously, the benefits of sea water have been explained for human life and the planet earth. Then, if the water becomes polluted, of course, these benefits cannot be recovered because the condition of sea water becomes unfit.

    Usually this water pollution comes from the remains of sewage obtained by household activities and industrial activities. The remains of the sewage disposal contain toxic substances such as acids, bases, to agricultural chemicals. These toxic substances are of course very dangerous when consumed by humans.

    Impact of Sea Water Pollution

    According to Hartanto (2008), sea water pollution has many negative impacts on human survival, namely:

    1. Damage to Beach Aesthetics

    Not only is the sea water polluted, but also the rocks and sand. Beach sand that has been exposed to pollution tends to turn black in color.

    2. Decreasing Algae and Protozoa Populations

    This is caused by contact with slick poison or layers of oil on the surface of sea water. Slicks generally make the sea surface calmer and attract birds to land on it.

    When there is contact between the slick and a living creature, the oil will seep into the living creature’s body and damage the organ system, then it dies.

    3. Inhibited Growth of Marine Phytoplankton

    If the amount of phytoplankton decreases, the population of fish, shrimp and shellfish will also decrease. If that’s the case, then the human need for high protein foods will be difficult to obtain.

    4. Biological Damage

    In this case, the effects can be lethal and sublethal. Lethal effects are reactions that occur when physical and chemical substances interfere with cell processes in living things to the point of causing death.

    Then, sublethal effects affect the physiological and behavioral damage of living things, but do not result in direct death. For example, coral reefs that have experienced lethal and sublethal effects, the healing process will take a long time due to the complexity of the community.

    Well, that’s an explanation of why sea water can taste salty and the impact that humans feel when sea water is polluted. As future generations, it is appropriate for us to maintain the preservation and cleanliness of sea water from pollution, especially from toxic substances which of course have a bad effect on the health of living things that consume them.

  • Why Do We Need to Save Energy? Find Out Why!

    Why Do We Need to Save Energy? Find Out Why!

    Why We Need to Save Energy – In this digital and modern era, we all know that there are more and more needs. The number of new technologies created is of course also accompanied by an increase in the need for energy.

    So energy conservation or policies to save energy continue to be echoed. This action is also a policy to reduce energy needs in everyday life.

    Especially in the use of fossil fuels. Because fossil fuels are non-renewable fuels, which means they have limited supplies.

    The use of non-renewable energy must not be arbitrary. Because if it is used continuously, then this energy will eventually run out and no longer exist.

    Then why do we need to save energy? And since when should we start? Check out the following article reviews.

     

     

    Reasons Why We Need to Save Energy

    The Ministry of Energy and Mineral Resources or ESDM has actually initiated a program to save energy, namely the 10% cut. The program involves various parties, including the government, business people, community organizations, and especially the general public to reduce energy use by 10%.

    The goal is to save energy, which is still the main need for electricity in Indonesia, where now the reserves of fossil energy are starting to decline.

    Energy is indeed the main need of today’s society. People’s daily demand makes the demand for energy supply also increase. Though most of it is intended for the supply of fossil fuels.

    Community needs are high enough to make reserves decrease every day. In addition, its use also affects global warming. Then more broadly can cause climate change.

    When this fossil fuel is burned, the carbon dioxide will rise into the sky and be captured by the atmosphere. This then starts global warming.

    According to the Global Carbon Project (GCP), in 2021 the world is predicted to emit as much as 36.4 gigatonnes of carbon dioxide. The high carbon dioxide has an impact on increasing the earth’s temperature.

    In November 2021, the earth’s temperature on land and sea surface is 0.91 degrees Celsius. The temperature was the fourth highest for November for the fourth time since 1880.

    Global warming is also caused by the greenhouse effect. The increase in greenhouse gases on earth makes the temperature unbalanced. The average temperature on earth increases, and the gases trap heat, so it is known as the greenhouse effect.

    The main factor of climate change according to the European Commission is the greenhouse effect.

    The increase in the earth’s temperature due to the greenhouse effect causes heat waves to occur more frequently with a longer duration. Earth’s high temperature also causes a series of natural reactions, ranging from weather patterns, oceans, ice and snow including animals and plants.

    If the temperature gets even higher, it is possible that it will also cause floods, storms, heat waves, and also droughts in various parts of the world. In addition, it also has a negative impact on human health, such as causing cramps, heat stroke, and can even cause death.

    That is the reason why we need to save energy. The bad impact is clearly a warning, so that we can use energy more wisely, including by conserving energy. Don’t let our ignorance and indifference towards energy actually backfire on the life of our beloved earth.

    How To Save Energy

    The explanation above is sufficient to answer the reasons why we need to save energy. Therefore, let’s implement energy conservation as well as possible. So that we can anticipate what we are afraid of the bad effects of damage to nature.

    Well, then how to save energy in everyday life? Here are some ways.

    1. Turn off the light

    When you want to leave the house, make sure all the lights are turned off. Especially if you are traveling for a long time. Then while sleeping, you can replace the lamp with a low power one, and turn off the lights that are not used.

    2. Turning off the television if not watched

    Currently everything can be accessed via mobile phones. Even watching television can already be accessed via HP. Even so, television is still widely used by every home. However, some young people nowadays actually turn on the television more often even though they are actually engrossed in playing with their cell phones.

    Therefore, avoid turning on the television when not being watched. It’s best if you turn off the television when you’re engrossed in playing your cellphone, as an effort to save energy.

    3. Turn off the air conditioner when the room is not in use

    The third way to save energy is to turn off the air conditioner when not in use. Many offices now use air conditioning.

    If you work in an office with air conditioning, then first turn off the air conditioning when you get home or when you want to leave. If you also use air conditioning at home, save money by turning it off before traveling.

    4. Print paper back and forth

    Fourth, you can save energy by printing on double-sided paper. This means you can use both sides of the paper, so you don’t need more paper when printing.

    5. Turn off electronic devices when not in use

    Fifth, you can use electronic devices to taste. When finished using, immediately turned off. Like when watching television, charging cellphones, using fans, turning on room lights, using washing machines, refrigerators, and so on. Use these tools as necessary, so as not to cause waste.

    6. Use energy-saving lamps

    You can use electricity with a low voltage, so it doesn’t use up more energy. Some lamps are also available that are energy efficient, so when buying, you can choose one. Not only lamps, of course, various other electronic devices that are more energy efficient should also be used more.

    Benefits of Saving Energy

    Energy that is used every day of course will run out. Therefore, it is necessary to control its use. One of them is by saving energy. The following will explain some of the benefits of saving energy:

    1. Prevent Global Warming

    The first benefit is of course preventing global warming. As previously explained, when global warming occurs, there will be a lot of damage to the earth. The balance of human life will be disrupted due to the greenhouse effect.

    Therefore, by saving energy, it means that we have also helped reduce fuel use, and save it for the future.

    2. Improve health

    The more global warming occurs, the more people will be affected. The health hazards lurking in society are becoming more and more. Therefore, by saving energy, we can prevent the negative effects of global warming on health.

    For example, choosing to walk or cycle instead of using a motorized vehicle can reduce air pollution. So that the air you breathe becomes healthier. In addition, by choosing such a lifestyle, the body can also avoid obesity, cholesterol and other diseases.

    3. Save costs

    By saving energy, we automatically save costs. Because the use of energy also requires comparable costs. The more energy spent, the more money is needed.

    For example, we prefer to use air conditioning over fans, of course the costs will be cheaper. Moreover, if you prefer to take advantage of the wind by increasing the ventilation of the house and increasing the shady trees around the house, of course the costs incurred will also be much less.

    4. Maintain the Health of Electronic Devices

    Every electronic device has a useful life, including the electrical devices around us. The more often it is used, of course the tool will be damaged more quickly. So by saving energy, it means we can save on the use of these tools.

    So that the performance can last longer. An example is a lamp. Every day of course we need a lamp as lighting. Well, if the lights are used all the time, of course the performance will continue to decline.

    It’s different if we use lights more sparingly, the performance will certainly decrease, but the lights will last much longer.

    Likewise with other items. If we use a motorcycle for example. The longer and more used, of course the machines will also be easily damaged.

    But if we want to save money, of course the machines will be more durable and long lasting. Like by walking or cycling when you want to reach a close place. Motorcycles are only used when we are going to travel far.

    In essence, by saving energy, every electronic item will be much more durable and last longer. We also don’t need to buy it often.

    5. Can help save fossil fuel reserves

    When all energy is used up, it is possible that the earth we live in will run out of fossil fuels. Because at this time, every level of society has used electricity and energy.

    In fact, not infrequently they use it excessively. Today’s young people, for example, when they turn on the television, they actually play with their cellphones and don’t watch television shows. Or excessive use of lights at night.

    This example is only in the household realm, not yet touching the industrial realm. We can see the industries that use electric powered machines and the energy needs they use every day. Just multiply it by the number of existing industries.

    Therefore, the earth’s energy will eventually run out quickly. Then this is the reason why we need to save energy. By saving, let alone being able to invite other people to save money, we have contributed to saving reserves from fossil fuels.

    Another way to contribute is to read sinaumedia’s book entitled Politics of Natural Resources, or get it via the link below.

     

     

    Some Alternative Energy to Prevent Waste

    In addition to making savings, we can also use alternative energy to prevent wasting natural resources. So what alternative energy can we use to support energy saving? Here’s the review:

    1. Utilizing the Sun as a power plant

    First, we can use solar energy as unlimited energy for electricity generation. Through the sun’s heat, we can turn it into electricity through the help of solar panels. The use of solar panels uses semiconductor materials, which produce electricity when given heat energy.

    Quoted from Interesting Engineering, if a photon of sunlight hits the surface of the material, the electrons will be free and become an electric current.

    Indeed, solar panels are still very rarely used, because they are expensive. However, this method will be very effective in preventing energy wastage. In Indonesia alone, this solar panel has been implemented through the 4 MW Badak Solar Power Plant located in Bontang, East Kalimantan.

    This solar panel is very effective to use because the sun’s heat has an unlimited amount, and of course it will not run out. Apart from generating electricity, it has also been applied in solar powered cars and smart phones that use solar energy.

    2. Wind Utilizers

    Gusts of wind that are also not limited can be used as a power plant. The trick is to rotate the windmill which can later produce electricity. The electrical energy from this windmill is very clean, because it does not produce pollution and emissions, in contrast to solar panels.

    However, both are equally an alternative to save energy. The use of wind is also very environmentally friendly, and will not disturb the ecosystem of the surrounding plant animals.

    3. Utilization of Nuclear Energy

    Next is nuclear energy, which can be used to generate electricity. These nuclei generate electricity from a series of physical reactions of substances that produce energy. Even so, this nuclear is quite dangerous, because it produces radioactive substances.

    However, this energy is in fact an alternative source that produces the most electricity compared to other energies. Based on a study, it is known that nuclear energy produces electricity 1.5 times more efficiently than natural gas.

    4. Utilization of Water as Electric Power

    Next is alternative energy that can be obtained from water. The water used to drive the turbine or turbine generator can produce electricity. Its utilization has been applied in hydroelectric power plants or hydropower.

    To generate electricity, this hydropower plant uses potential and kinetic energy obtained from water. Water moves from high to low places, so it is used to generate electricity.

    An example is river water, which is dammed with a large volume. If it is then released, the discharge can generate electricity. Even so, the use of this water also has risks. For example, if you build dams and turbines, it can threaten animal habitats.

    Therefore, making a dam must pay attention to two sides, animals and humans. That way, both of them benefit.

    5. Utilization of Geothermal

    Then there is still an alternative to geothermal as an eternal source of energy for electricity generation. The heat in the bowels of the earth will produce steam. From this steam, the management of the Geothermal Power Plant or PLTPB can later be carried out. Geothermal power is also commonly called hydro metal power. This energy comes out through the gap like a crater.

    So, those are the reasons why we need to save energy. Saving energy also has many benefits. Then to prevent waste, we can use alternative energy that comes from nature.

    To learn about various energies, you can read a book called Natural Resource Law or get it via the link below.

    Thus a review of why we need to save energy. Sinaumed’s can get related books at sinaumedia.com . As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia always provides the best products so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

  • Why Do We Have To Be Tolerant?

    Why Do We Have To Be Tolerant?

    Why do we have To Behave Tolerance? – In everyday social life, there is a behavior or attitude that may be familiar to Sinaumed’s. Sinaumed’s always applies this attitude or behavior and even Sinaumed’s upholds it to preserve this behavior. The attitude or behavior that we meant earlier is the attitude or behavior of tolerance. How important tolerance is for survival in a country is very important. Sinaumed’s must remember that our country, Indonesia is a country that has a lot of diversity. Diversity in an aspect must be balanced with an attitude or behavior of tolerance.

    As Sinaumed’s knows, the simple notion of self-tolerance is a form of attitude or behavior that reflects mutual respect for others. It should be remembered and underlined that tolerance itself is known as hardline anti-discrimination. In the attitude and behavior of tolerance, all things are considered equal and equal. Tolerance is naturally created for diversity which functions as a neutralizer for that diversity.

    So, maybe there are some Sinaumed’s who are not aware of or even curious about the reasons why we have to behave and be tolerant in our lives, especially in everyday life for Sinaumed’s. As we have said above, this attitude and behavior of tolerance serves as a counterweight to diversity, especially the diversity that exists in our beloved country, Indonesia. Without further ado and maybe Sinaumed’s is starting to get impatient to find out the reasons behind the importance of behaving and being tolerant.

    A. Why We Must Behave Tolerance

    1. General Definition of Tolerance

    Before knowing the reasons why we have to behave and behave that reflects an attitude of tolerance, it’s better if Sinaumed’s knows more deeply about the definition or understanding of tolerance. The definition or understanding of tolerance itself has various meanings originating from various aspects, such as religious aspects, especially in Islam, from literal or general understanding aspects, and several meanings put forward by scientists or experts.

    The general definition or definition of the attitude and behavior of tolerance is a basic word “tolerare” which comes from Latin. This Latin word means patience. For the understanding or definition of tolerance according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, it has a definition or understanding, namely behaving or being always accepting or tolerant or can also be tolerant of other opinions or views given by others. In other words, tolerance can also be said to be a partner for diversity.

    2. Definition of Tolerance According to Experts

    In addition to several understandings of tolerance from a religious and general perspective, we also have another flour of tolerance, namely the tolerance of other people outside of us, namely from Max. Michael, Friedrich, Djohan, and Purwadar Minta.

    a. According to Michael Walzer

    According to the first expert or scientist, namely Michael Walzer, the notion or definition of tolerance is a condition or situation that must exist within an individual or group to be able to fulfill its goals and functions. The purpose contained in it is the goal to be able to live a calm and peaceful life amidst the differences that exist in that situation.

    b. According to Friedrich Heiler

    According to the second expert or scientist, namely Friedrich Heiler, the notion or definition of tolerance is an idea or scope that has a focal point in one area, namely only the field of religion. in detail, Friedrich Heiler considers tolerant behavior only carried out by a Muslim who admits that there are many religions spread in the community where he lives.

    c. According to Max Isaac Dimont

    According to the third expert or scientist, namely Max Isaac Dimont, the meaning or definition of tolerance is the behavior or form of mutual respect for one another that is different. If there is an attitude and behavior of respect, it will be directly proportional to peace and it is impossible for any actions to be judged out of bounds.

    d. According to Djohan Effendi

    According to the fourth expert or scientist, namely Djohan Effendi, the meaning or definition of tolerance is a human behavior or trait where humans can control and accept differences very openly. The definition of tolerance put forward by Djohan Effendi is considered very broad.

    Why is that? Because if you study it, Djohan’s words are very easy to apply because his words have a very broad meaning. Someone is considered not racist, just by ignoring all the differences, both physical and psychological, has become a form of tolerance.

    e. According to Purwadarmin

    According to the fifth expert or scientist, namely Poerwadar Minta understanding or definition of tolerance is one of the behaviors and attitudes that must be owned by a person to be able to give permission for a difference between himself and other people. The differences in question are very broad, such as differences in viewpoints, beliefs, and opinions.

    3. Characteristics of People Who Behave Tolerance

    Attitudes and behaviors of tolerance can actually grow by themselves in every human person, these attitudes and behaviors grow because of an awareness that cultural diversity, such as religion, ethnicity, and language exists due to history or history in the past accompanied by several factors that influence the existence of this diversity. Because of this diversity, it is obligatory for every member of society to have an attitude and behave in tolerance towards other members of society.

    Even though it is obligatory to have tolerant attitudes and behaviors individually, there are still one or two individuals who choose to be indifferent and do not want to behave that reflects an attitude of tolerance. For this reason, we found several characteristics where citizens or community members do not uphold behavior that reflects an attitude of tolerance and which citizens or members of the public obey to always be tolerant.

    People or community members who already have the awareness to always apply and behave in tolerance usually have several characteristics, such as:

    • Tolerant people always respect the opinions, views and thoughts of others.
    • Tolerant people always give all freedom to others, because freedom is everyone’s right.
    • People who behave tolerantly always appreciate and value the opinions and choices of others even though they differ from their thoughts.
    • People who behave in tolerance always like and do not underestimate the differences both psychologically and physically in other people when they are socializing together.

    4. Types of Tolerance

    In life there are different aspects as well as for tolerant behavior, of course tolerance is also differentiated depending on the situation and conditions required. For this reason, tolerance also has several different types in each situation in its application. In the following, we will describe several types of tolerance that are common in aspects of everyday life.

    a. Tolerance in religion

    b. Tolerance in diverse cultures

    c. Tolerance in politics

    d. Tolerance in association with peers

    e. Tolerance in the school environment

    f. Family tolerance

    g. Tolerance in playing social media

    5. Reasons for having a tolerant attitude and behavior?

    As we all know that by frequently acting and behaving that show points of tolerance will make life more secure, harmonious and peaceful, of course. These three points are certainly one of the desires that must be realized in every member or group of people. So, in order for everyone’s dream environment to come true, of course we must be able to uphold and preserve the attitude and behavior of tolerance in our own living environment.

    In the following, we will convey some of the goals and benefits of behaving and behaving that reflect an attitude of tolerance in everyday life. These goals and benefits can be the reason why Sinaumed’s must behave and behave that reflects an attitude of tolerance. In the following, we will convey some of the main benefits and goals of tolerant behavior in everyday life.

    a. Can always maintain harmony between communities

    By preserving and upholding the attitude and behavior of tolerance in everyday life, it will automatically be able to maintain patterns of relations between communities so that they are always in a state of harmony and harmony in the midst of the diversity that occurs. The habit of always behaving and being tolerant will really help strengthen, increase comfort, peace, harmony and harmony in social relations without having to experience differences that can become conflicts within a group.

    b. Naturally can prevent any conflict

    The main goal of preserving and upholding tolerant behavior is to prevent conflicts and divisions both within and outside the community members caused by the diversity or differences that exist. If there is a division that has already occurred, it will automatically cause damage and losses to each of the parties concerned, both individually and in groups.

    c. Unite the diversity and differences that exist

    The main purpose of creating tolerance is to make differences complement each other, not compete. This can happen when two different camps have an open mind to unite and combine forces instead of fighting each other. If neither side has such a mindset, it will have the potential to create a split which can certainly be detrimental to both parties.

    d. Increase the level of harmony and peace

    The most important goal which is the foundation of why it is so necessary for every citizen to have and behave in tolerance is so that every citizen can help to reduce and even narrow down opportunities for problems to occur. On the other hand, citizens should be able to increase harmony and maintain peace that has occurred in certain areas within society and the state.

    After knowing some of the goals and benefits resulting from tolerant behavior, of course Sinaumed’s already knows very well the reasons behind why we always have to behave in ways that reflect tolerance, right? Attitudes that reflect tolerance can be applied in various types of behavior too. In the following, we will describe several manifestations of tolerant behavior in everyday life in society.

    • Always give appreciation for the achievements of others even though it is different from our way, without having to use it.
    • Always put forward to behave respectfully and respect the rights of others.
    • Stay away from discriminatory attitudes or attitudes that always discriminate against people on the basis of differences in race, religion, ethnicity, culture, gender, and so on.
    • Do not seize and interfere with the freedom of others.
    • Always offer assistance and helping other brothers and sisters without having to look at backgrounds and discriminate.
    • Always respect all opinions issued by other people even if they are different opinions from yours.
    • Always respect the beliefs and worship of others.

    So that’s some knowledge about the reasons why we must always behave tolerantly in our daily lives . Not only that, we also provide some other information regarding tolerance which might be very useful for Sinaumed’s in the future. It should be remembered that in Indonesia itself an attitude of tolerance has been instilled from an early age because our country, Indonesia, is rich in diversity. This habit will continue to be carried out so that the course of life in the state and society always goes on a different, peaceful, harmonious, harmonious and safe path.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • Why are Norms Necessary in Society? Here’s the Explanation

    Why are Norms Necessary in Society? Here’s the Explanation

    Why Norms are Necessary in Society – Humans as social beings will of course need to interact with other creatures, for example, such as interacting with friends, family and more broadly, namely interacting with other communities such as neighbors.

    However, each individual has different character, personality and traits and behavior. Because of this, norms will be needed in society. Thus, each individual can place himself properly in accordance with agreed norms and not cause conflict. However, is it only because of this that norms are needed? Check out the explanation further!

    Definition of Norm

    Before discussing the reasons why norms are needed in society, Sinaumed’s needs to know the meaning of norms first.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), norms are defined as rules and regulations that bind citizens as groups in society . Where these norms apply as an order, guide as well as controllers of behavior that is appropriate and acceptable in society.

    Understanding according to the 2015 Encyclopedia Britannica, norms or also known as social norms are standard rules regarding behavior that are shared by members of social groups.

    John J. Macionis , a professor in the field of Sociology, defines norms as all kinds of regulations and expectations that exist in society and will guide all forms of behavior that will be carried out by members of society.

    Craig Calhoun , a sociologist from America also expressed the opinion that a norm is a guideline or rule that states how a person should act in a situation in the midst of society.

    Norms are defined by E Utrecht as all sets or collections of life instructions that can be used to regulate various kinds of rules that exist in society and the nation. Where these norms must be obeyed by every individual and if they are violated, there will be consequences from the authorities in society.

    A sociologist from Germany named Bellebaum defines norms as a tool that can be used to regulate individuals in a social environment, so that each individual is able to act and behave in accordance with the beliefs and attitudes that apply to the environment in which he is located.

    Soerjono Soekanto also defines norms as a device, where the norms are made with the aim that existing relationships in a community environment are able to run according to what has been expected and desired by community groups.

    From this understanding of norms, it can be concluded that norms are rules that have been formed in such a way because there is a need from society for order that they both want to achieve in everyday life, if an individual violates the norms that have been agreed upon and apply, then there will be penalties or consequences given by the authorities. 

    Why are norms needed in society? 

    Norms or regulations are things whose existence is considered to be very much needed in various layers of people’s lives. This is because, if these norms do not exist, then each individual can do as he pleases and does not consider other people around him. So, for this reason, norms are needed to exist in society. Norms can make each individual’s behavior more orderly and continue to carry out the rights and obligations that each individual has.

    There are also several reasons why norms are needed to exist in society. Here’s an explanation.

    1. Can create public order

    Norms are present and created in society with the aim of creating order in society. For example, the act of stealing, the act of stealing is a disgraceful act and has no truth value in it.

    So, when a member of the public is caught stealing, he will get sanctions and consequences for his actions. Whether it’s social sanctions such as being avoided by other members of the community, getting ridiculed or legal sanctions, such as being tried according to the rules that apply in society. The sanction is a manifestation of the implementation of the norms that have been built before.

    If there are no norms that apply in society, then you can imagine how chaotic the community environment will be and the loss of a sense of peace and security in the environment.

    2. Norms become social controllers

    The second reason why norms must exist in society is because norms can become social controllers, this second reason is also related to the first reason. Where when there are members of the community who do arbitrary, wrong then he will get the consequences in the form of sanctions that have been mutually agreed upon.

    Because of the pending sanctions, every individual will be more careful when acting. Because members of the public will be afraid, if the actions they commit are wrong they will receive sanctions. Both legal sanctions and social sanctions.

    As social controllers, norms function like invisible watchdogs in society in an environment. Even though it is not visible that the consequences that will be received by the community are real, so that the community will be more careful when acting or making decisions.

    3. Creating security in the community environment

    When order has been running as it should, as well as the means of social control, namely the norms of running, security will then be created in society by itself.

    Security that is present in society, will create a quiet life and minimal violations. This means that life in society will also be less conflicted, although it is a bit impossible for criminal acts to stop 100 percent. However, norms serve to reduce crime.

    People who want to live in a safe environment also need to work hard together, to overcome situations that are not always predictable and the life of every member of society must go on as usual. Therefore, norms must also exist in society and be properly enforced by every level of society.

    4. As a guide for society

    Communities living in an environment will generally be confused if there are no clear and applicable rules or binding members of the community in that environment. Therefore, norms are considered very important in society which serve as a basis for socializing between one individual and another.

    Even though the rules contained in these norms are not standard, if they are conveyed properly then the community will understand these norms by themselves.

    An example is when there are no written regulations that apply to a drug addict. Drug addicts in society will generally be shunned. Regarding these social sanctions, of course the government or certain parties do not formally write down the social sanctions that a drug addict will receive.

    However, every member of society understands the social sanctions that a drug addict will receive. In accordance with this explanation, norms can also be referred to as a handbook, a guidebook for members of the public if there is an act that is deviant, wrong or arbitrary, it will also result in appropriate consequences.

    5. Norms in society facilitate the creation of balance

    Norms or regulations that exist in the community environment, will balance the interests of each individual in the community environment. This is because every layer of society, community members have different interests. For example, students, housewives, or third-party workers are members of society who have different interests.

    Even though they are different, with the existence of norms, every community that has their respective interests, must be able to create a balance between fulfilling their needs, their interests and maintaining security and peace in life in a social environment.

    6. Motivating individuals to fulfill their rights and obligations

    The norms that apply in society can make every individual motivated to fulfill his rights and obligations with full responsibility.

    This is because, every member of society who does not fulfill their rights or obligations will get a sanction. These sanctions will make them feel afraid to commit crimes, so that in any way they will try to fulfill their rights and obligations.

    7. Maintain and protect the rights of every member of society

    The reason the seven norms must exist in society is related to the previous reasons. Because the norms encourage community members to exercise their respective rights and obligations, every right owned by community members will be protected and maintained.

    8. As a barrier 

    Norms serve as a barrier between what members of society may and may not do. Thus, the norm must be present in society because it becomes an invisible barrier.

    Where, people will be more careful to decide what action they will take. Does the action have a negative impact that harms others? Or is it a positive impact, will the action have good or bad consequences.

    Those are eight reasons why norms must exist in society.

    Norm Function

    After knowing the reasons why norms must exist in society, Sinaumed’s also needs to know what are the functions of norms?

    Norms in society, of course, have several functions so that they are present and obeyed by every level of society. Here are some of its functions.

    • As a regulator of behavior, people’s attitudes are in accordance with the values ​​that apply and are mutually agreed upon.
    • Able to help achieve common goals that the community wants to achieve, such as having a safe, peaceful, peaceful environment and minimal conflict.
    • Creating order and justice in the community environment, so that every member of the community who lives in that environment will feel comfortable and safe.
    • Norms serve as a basis for imposing sanctions, consequences for members of society who violate the rules contained in norms.
    • Norms exist as a deterrent, so that there are no conflicts of interest between members of society with each other.
    • Norms serve as instructions, guidelines and guides that can be used by the community to lead a comfortable and safe life in the environment where they live.
    • Norms can be an encouragement for community members to more easily adapt to the community environment, in accordance with the values ​​that have been in effect.

    Norm Features

    Does the norm have any recognizable features? Of course, here are some of the characteristics of social norms that exist in society.

    • Norms apply in general and are not written.
    • Norms are the result of the agreement of every member of society.
    • The community becomes a supporter of the prevailing norms and is tasked with complying with these norms.
    • Members of society who violate the norms, then he will receive appropriate sanctions and punishments. Both social and legal sanctions.
    • The norms in society will adjust to the social changes that occur, so it can be said that the norms will experience some changes.
    • Norms are made consciously by every member of society.

    Levels in Norms

    Based on its level, norms can be divided into five, namely as follows.

    1. Method or Usage

    The norm of manner is a form of certain actions carried out by individuals in a community group and these actions are not carried out continuously. An example is the polite way of eating according to the norm, namely when eating silently.

    2. Habits or Folkways

    The norm of habit is a form of action that is carried out repeatedly with the same form of action and is carried out by someone consciously and has a clear purpose and is considered good and right to do.

    An example of a customary norm is giving gifts to people who have achievements in an activity or have a certain position. Or wear nice and polite clothes when attending a party.

    3. Code of conduct or Mores

    The third type of norm is mores. Norms of code of conduct are a set of actions which can be a reflection of the nature of life for a group of people which are carried out consciously, with the aim of exercising control over a group of people over the members within it. In the mores norm, there is an element that forces as well as an element that prohibits certain actions.

    The function of the mores norm is as a tool that can adjust the actions of members of the community in accordance with the rules of conduct that have been regulated and determined by the applicable norms. An example of mores is prohibiting acts of rape, murder and marrying siblings.

    4. Customs or Custom

    Custom norms are a collection of behavior rules that have the highest position. This is because customary norms have an eternal nature and are very strongly integrated with the people who have these customs.

    Koentjaraningrat even mentioned that customs are part of an abstract culture or part of a value system. Violations committed by individuals related to custom are considered more serious than violations of other norms.

    5. Law or Laws

    The last type of norm is a legal norm that can regulate the social life of the community and originates from the legal code of law in force in Indonesia. The purpose of legal norms is to create environmental conditions in a country to be safe, orderly, peaceful, prosperous, prosperous and others.

    That is an explanation of the reasons why norms must exist in society, along with their definitions and types.

  • When is the Time for the Midnight Prayer?

    When is the Time for the Midnight Prayer?

    When is the Time for the Midnight Prayer? – For Muslims, prayer is included in the pillars of Islam that must be carried out. Whether it’s fardu prayers which amount to five times and some sunnah prayers. Salat is mentioned as worship that connects between heaven and earth, and between Allah and His servants. In Islam, prayer is stated as pillars and pillars of religion.

    The midnight prayer is one of the sunnah prayers recommended by the Prophet Muhammad SAW. Most people already know that the time for the midnight prayer is one third of the night, but they do not understand exactly when it will be that third of the night.

    So when is the actual time for the midnight prayer? When exactly is it a third of the night? What is the priority of the midnight prayer?

    So, in the following, we will explain when the midnight prayer will be held along with the facts about the prayer service. Let’s look at the following reviews

    When is the Time for the Midnight Prayer?

    Most people when asked about when the midnight prayer will be held, surely some will answer “in the third of the night”. But actually, what time is it a third of the night?

    According to the Al-Quran and Hadith regarding the best time to perform the midnight prayer, one third of the night is divided into three parts. Well, here is the explanation.

    Time of the First Third of the Night

    In the first third of the night, it has a time range after the Isya prayer until ten in the evening (22.00 WIB) . However, it doesn’t mean that after the Isya prayer we immediately perform the midnight prayer just like that, because the condition for the midnight prayer is that we must sleep first.

    So, if Sinaumed’s wants to perform the midnight prayer in the first third of the night, after the Isha prayer it is recommended to sleep first. You can ask your friends or family to wake you up or even set an alarm for around ten at night. Then, only then can you perform the midnight prayer legally.

    Time of the Second Third of the Night

    The timing of the midnight prayer can also be carried out in the second third of the night, that is, from ten in the evening to one night ( 22.00 – 01.00 WIB ). In the second third of the night this is actually the best time to carry out the midnight prayer.

    Allah SWT even appreciates and greatly appreciates His servants who perform the midnight prayer at this time because it is usually difficult for people to get up from their sleep for the midnight prayer.

    Time of the Last Third of the Night

    During the last third of the night it occurs around one night (01.00 WIB) until just before dawn . At around this time, Allah SWT will always listen to the prayers of His servants who perform the midnight prayer.

    How Many Rakats Are in the Tahajud Prayer?

    Based on the hadith of Ibn Umar, the number of cycles in the midnight prayer is at least 2 cycles and the maximum number is unlimited (as long as the number is even). According to Malik’s hadith from Said bin Abu Sa’id al Maqbari, Abu Salamah bin Abdurrahman which means: “Indeed he (Abu Salamah) told AbuSaid, he asked Aisyah ra how Rasulullah Saw. do the lail prayer?” Aisyah replied, “The Prophet never prayed more than eleven cycles of lail. Either in Ramadan or in other months. He prayed four cycles, don’t ask how good and how long his prayer was, then he prayed three cycles.” (HR Bukhari and Muslim).

    However, the most important thing is to total 11 cycles or 13 with two cycles is the iftitah prayer.

    That is, the 11 cycles have a formation of 4+4+3 or 2+2+2+2+2+1.

    What are the Procedures for Performing the Midnight Prayer?

    Actually, the implementation of the midnight prayer is almost the same as the fard prayer and other sunnah prayers. However, the thing that distinguishes the implementation of this midnight prayer is that before carrying it out, it is required to sleep first. Sleep time does not have to be hours, in a short time is still allowed.

    It should be noted that if you perform the night prayer without sleeping beforehand, then it is not the midnight prayer, but the witr prayer and other sunnah prayers.

    Tahajud prayer intention

    Before carrying out the prayer, be it fardhu prayer or sunnah prayer, first read the intention. Here’s the reading:

    ???

    Ushallii sunnata-t-tahajjudi rak’ataini mustaqbilal qiblati lillahi ta’ala

    Meaning :

    “I intend to pray the sunnah tahajud prayer 2 cycles facing the Qibla because of Allah Ta’ala”

    Midnight prayer movement

    The same is true for fardhu prayers and other sunnah prayers, namely:

    1. Read intention
    2. The reading of takbiratul ihram (Allahu Akbar) is followed by an iftitah prayer
    3. Read surah Al-Fatihah
    4. Read short surahs in the Koran
    5. bow
    6. I’tidal
    7. prostrate
    8. Repeat the same movement as the first cycle
    9. Read the final tahiyat prayer in the second cycle
    10. Regards

    How to make it easy to carry out the midnight prayer?

    Many people who “fail” to carry out the midnight prayer are when they want to get up at night. For them, there are many temptations to be able to wake up at night, one of which is the constant feeling of drowsiness. Well, here are some ways that can be done so that it’s easy for us to wake up at night and carry out the midnight prayer.

    1. Strengthen Intentions

    This is the most important trick, because if we have intention from the heart, Allah SWT will surely “wake up” us from a good night’s sleep. Not only that, even if before going to sleep at night we intend to pray the midnight prayer but it turns out that we cannot wake up, this intention will still be recorded by Angel Raqib as a form of worship.

    Based on the hadith of Abu Darda RA which says that Rasulullah SAW once said: “Whoever is going to sleep and intends to wake up for the night prayer, then he has already fallen asleep until morning, then his intention is recorded as a reward, while his sleep is considered a gift from Allah given to him ” (Reported by Nasa’i and Ibn Majah with authentic sanad)

    2. Avoid Doing Immoral Things During the Day

    During the day, you should not do any immoral things. This is because people who sin, will not be given help to wake up otherwise. But on the contrary, people who do good throughout the day, will undoubtedly always be given convenience, especially to get up at night and carry out the midnight prayer.

    3. Before going to bed, it’s better to eat in small portions

    If you want it to be easy to wake up at night and perform the midnight prayer, it’s best to reduce our food portions, especially at dinner. Eating too much can cause sleep to be too deep and difficult to wake up at night.

    4. Avoid Excessive Talking and Watching Before Sleeping

    Chatting with friends and watching television shows excessively actually makes our bedtime late. This will also make our bodies feel tired and difficult to wake up at night.

    5. Avoid sleeping too late

    This method is almost the same as the previous method, i.e. sleeping more and more at night will actually make our bodies feel tired and difficult to wake up at night. If indeed there is no urgent work to be completed, it is best to sleep after carrying out the Isya prayer.

    Someone who goes to bed earlier will get enough sleep so that it will be easy to wake up at night and perform the midnight prayer, then start activities after dawn. If this is done regularly, then he will get many benefits both in world affairs and in the hereafter.

    6. Beware of Satan’s Whispers

    We all know that Satan is indeed in charge of tempting human faith. Even so, we should have strong faith so that we can resist Satan’s temptations. Satan will usually tempt people to forget their intention to pray their midnight prayer and fall asleep again.

    What is the priority in carrying out the Tahajud Prayer?

    Prophet Muhammad SAW strongly recommended his people to always perform the Tahajud prayer, because this sunnah prayer has various virtues, both in this world and in the hereafter. Narrated by Umar bin Khattab RA, that Rasulullah SAW once said: “Whoever prays at night and completes his prayer, Allah SWT will glorify him with nine gifts, five in this world and four in the hereafter.”

    Well, here is the description.

    The Excellence of Tahajud Prayers in the World

    1. His prayer will be granted by Allah SWT

    Someone who is always obedient and diligent to get up at night and perform the midnight prayer, surely his prayers will be answered by Allah SWT. This is because at one third of the night is the time when Allah SWT will hear and grant the prayers of His servants. Not only that, Allah SWT will also always forgive the sins of His servants who ask for forgiveness when carrying out the midnight prayer.

    This is based on a hadith which reads:

    “The hadith narrated by Abu Hurairah that the Prophet said: “Allah descends into the sky of the world every night in the last 1/3 of the night. Allah then said, Whoever prays to Me, I will surely grant it! Whoever asks Me, I will surely give! Whoever asks Me for forgiveness, I will certainly forgive him. This is how it is until dawn “(HR. Bukhari no. 145 and Muslim no. 758).

    In addition, there is also a hadith narrated by Muslim which reads ” Rasulullah in his words: ” At night there is a time when Allah will answer prayers every night. (HR Muslim No. 757).

    2. As a characteristic of pious / pious people and entering heaven

    Muslims who are diligent in performing the midnight prayers, have been promised to enter heaven on the Day of Resurrection. This is because when other humans are sleeping soundly, he has a sincere intention from within his heart to wake up and worship Allah SWT.

    According to the hadith narrated by Ibn Majah which reads:

    “Rosululloh shollallohu ‘alaihi wa sallam said, “O people, spread greetings, give food, continue brotherhood and pray when humans fall asleep at night, you will enter heaven safely” (HR. Ibnu Majah, authenticated by Al Albani )

    The people promised by Allah SWT to enter heaven are those who maintain their piety and continue to do good. This is supported by surah Adz-Dzariyat verses 15-18 which reads:

    “Indeed, those who fear Allah are in Gardens of Paradise and in springs of water, taking what their Lord has given them. Verily, before that (in the world) were those who did good, (ie) they slept very little at night, and at the end of the night they asked forgiveness (to Allah).” (Adz-Dzariyat: 15-18).

    3. Application granting facilities

    Almost the same as the first priority, namely Allah SWT will undoubtedly grant any prayers and requests requested by His servants when carrying out the midnight prayer sincerely. Rasulullah SAW once said in a hadith narrated by Muslim which reads:

    “From Jabir said, that the Prophet SAW said, “Indeed at night, there is one moment when a Muslim asks for the good of the world and the hereafter, surely Allah will give him, It takes place every night.” (HR. Muslim)

    The Virtue of Tahajud Prayer in the Hereafter

    1. On the Day of Judgment later, all human souls will be resurrected by Allah SWT. For people who diligently perform the midnight prayer, later their faces will be radiant and without any fear or worry about their deeds of worship.
    2. On the day of reckoning, all good and bad deeds will be counted. For those who diligently perform the midnight prayer, later Allah SWT will provide relief in the reckoning.
    3. When crossing the Shiratal Mustaqim bridge, Allah SWT will provide convenience and speed for those who diligently carry out the midnight prayers.
    4. All his deeds in the world, will be given by Allah SWT from the right hand.

    Facts About Salat Worship

    Background of Compulsory Prayer Worship

    According to a mufassir named Ismail Haqqi al-Burusywi, revealed that the obligation to pray for all Muslims was because at that time, the Prophet Muhammad SAW was doing Mi’raj (a journey up to the sky, which is better known as the Isra Mi’raj event).

    On his way, he witnessed the angels and the inhabitants of the sky worshiping solemnly and earnestly. This made the Prophet Muhammad SAW happy and amazed, who then asked his people to do this worship in the world. Then, Allah SWT collects all the worship of the angels into five daily prayers.

    Prayer Worship Can Reduce and Become a Cure for All Diseases

    Praying regularly can actually reduce various diseases found in the human body, such as lower back pain, cervical misalignments, and others. Abdul Ahad and Mehdi Hassan in their article entitled “Some Medical Aspects of Prayer” revealed that the position of prostration in prayer can actually affect the intervertebral joints, cervix, and spine. Therefore, when a person is in a prostration position, the muscles of the body will be active in various degrees which can help the circulation of blood vessels.

    Not only that, according to Abu Hurairah’s story, at that time the Prophet Muhammad SAW was walking around during the day and Abu Hurairah also accompanied him. On one occasion, Abu Hurairah performed the prayer and then sat down. Suddenly, She turned to him and said “Do you have a toothache?”.

    Then Abu Hurairah replied, “Yes”. Prophet Muhammad SAW then said: “Get up and pray, then really in prayer there is medicine.”

    The disease referred to in the hadith is heart disease, physical pain, sadness, distress, and others. Al-Manwi said, “Prayer has an astonishing effect on the heart, body, attitude, and actions, especially when the rights are fulfilled, that is, they are carried out perfectly.”

     

  • When is the Right Time to Read a Book?

    When is the Right Time to Read a Book?

    When is the Right Time to Read a Book? – Finding the right time to read can basically be done at any time. There is no specific provision that reading must be at such and such an hour, let alone reading a book. You can determine a suitable time to use reading.

    For some people, reading books can actually be used as a means to relax or the cool term now is healing. Someone who often reads books will easily get additional knowledge and knowledge. This is of course very different from the habit of reading or finding information through social media.

    When reading a book, everyone is known to have a different time to read a book. There are those who like to read books before their activities, in between activities, even the most that is after a routine or before going to bed. This is because there is no right time to read properly and correctly.

    A. The Right Time to Read a Book

    Books we know are one of the best sources for discovering a science. It’s just that, along with the rapid development of information technology or what we know as the digital era, the interest in reading for the younger generation is decreasing.

    Well, for those of you who just want to start reading books, you can try reading books at the following times. By trying some of the right times to read the following books, it is hoped that you will be more consistent and more enthusiastic about reading books or seeking knowledge.

    So, here are some times to read books that you need to know, including:

    1. At Dawn or Morning

    First, the right time to read a book is in the morning or more precisely at dawn. Reading in the morning will make someone more focused on understanding something. This is because the atmosphere of dawn or morning is very calm.

    In addition, the sound of roosters crowing and fresh air can make reading more enjoyable. Coupled with the road atmosphere which is still quiet and there are no vehicles passing by, the brain will feel more focused and very suitable for gaining knowledge.

    For some people, morning is the best time to read a book. Reading books can also be one of the best choice activities before starting activities. Not only that, morning time is the right time for the brain to receive and understand reading.

    In the morning, the state of mind and feelings is still fresh and warm, so it is perfect to start with reading books. It’s just that this time is not suitable for some people who have a habit of getting up early and immediately starting their activities. What’s more, those who wake up must immediately get ready for school or work with a predetermined morning schedule.

    2. When it Rains

    Then, the right time to read a book is when it rains. Many people like the atmosphere when it rains because it can give a warm and more serene feeling for reading activities

    Rain can be said as a medicine to calm the soul and mind. Rain can make the atmosphere cooler and calmer. This is certainly very suitable for people who like to create imagination and find inspiration on the sidelines of their daily activities. In addition, rain can also make a person more sensitive, for example, like remembering the past.

    In addition, the brain’s thinking power that is created when it rains will experience a three-fold increase due to a comfortable atmosphere. Therefore, a suitable companion on a rainy day, of course, is a book and a cup of warm drink, which is a very serene combination.

    3. After Bathing

    Furthermore, the right time to read a book is after you take a shower. When you finish bathing, you will have a fresher body and mind than before. Of course, this time is perfect for reading books.

    For example, when you wake up in the morning. If you still feel sleepy and it’s hard to do activities. Bathing can be an effective medicine to relieve drowsiness while making the mind fresher. It is common knowledge that one of the reasons why someone does not read a book is due to laziness. However, there are also some people who don’t read books because they are bored.

    Most people who don’t really like the activity of reading books have the assumption that small and lots of writing will very quickly cause drowsiness. Therefore, bathing can be used as a medicine or solution to relieve drowsiness and boredom. Some people also claim to be able to overcome various obstacles so that they focus more on starting to read books.

    4. Early in the Day

    The right time to read the next book is in the early morning or just before going to bed at night. For example, if you are going to sleep but your eyes are still awake, you can try reading a book to find peace at night. It is also believed to be more effective in improving sleep quality.

    In today’s era, many people are suffering from insomnia or difficulty sleeping because of thoughts that are raging in the early hours of the morning. When studied literally, early morning can mean a silence and sleep time for the world. Silence and silence without your own voice can really be used to create a good atmosphere for sleep.

    Therefore, if you often wake up and have trouble sleeping, reading books can be a medicine to improve the quality of your sleep. However, it could be that by reading a book, it will be more difficult for you to sleep because your mind is increasingly raging. You can choose a light book like a novel or about mindfulness.

    5. Wake Up

    Finally, different from in the morning. The best time to read this book is when you wake up from sleep. When you wake up, your brain will be more motivated to find various activities to do next.

    Therefore, the first thing you need to avoid when you wake up is not recommended to hold. Operating a cell phone when waking up from sleep is known to further increase the feeling of being lazy to get up or go to bed.

    Waking up is basically the most productive time for a person, whether waking up in the morning, afternoon, evening or night. The feeling of waking up will make it easier for you to focus. No wonder, this time is perfect for reading books.

    B. How to Take Time to Read Books

    After knowing the importance of reading books and the right time to read books. In this section, we’ll talk about the most effective ways to spend time reading books. Of course, planning reading time can be very easy, it’s just that without strong motivation, the plan can be in vain.

    Well, here are some ways to spend time reading books. By applying this method, you are guaranteed to have more strong motivation to be able to spend a little time reading books. Some of these ways include the following:

    1. Always Carry Books

    The first way to take the time to read books is to always carry books or other reading resources with you. When you want to travel anywhere, you can deliberately read the book you are reading. By getting used to being near books, it will be easier for you to be interested in reading a book.

    Also, there are many situations where you should be able to read books. For example, when you are on your way to somewhere, or when you are in a queue waiting for a call. This silent time will certainly be more useful if you use it to read certain books or reading sources, even if it’s only for a moment.

    2. Read books digitally

    The second way that you can take the time to read books is to have an electronic book or commonly called an ebook on a smartphone. If carrying books wherever you go is quite a hassle, you can maximize your smartphone to store various types of books digitally or electronically.

    In the current era of advances in information technology, reading books digitally is more in demand. Besides being practical and not taking up space, digital books are also somewhat cheaper than the price set for printed books. Digital books will be perfect for those of you who have a fairly tight time, but still want to take the time to read books. Some people also prefer digital books because they can reduce the excessive use of paper.

    3. Reading at night or in the morning

    The third way that can make you have free time to read books is at night or in the morning. Apart from being able to do it on the sidelines of your daily activities, you can try reading books at night after your activities or in the morning before your activities.

    At these two times, a person usually doesn’t do too much activity. Therefore, one of the good things that can be used to fill free time is to read books. The activity of reading books basically doesn’t need to take long, you just need to spend half an hour or fifteen minutes. The most important thing is to read books consistently.

    4. Get Rid of Distracting Things

    Fourth, the way to take the time to read books is to get rid of various things that can be distracting. Several things are known to cause distractions when reading books, namely social media, cellphones, or games. These three things are considered to be able to change your focus from reading books to enjoying time with a smartphone.

    Therefore, for those of you who want to seriously read books, you can get rid of all electronic devices that can interfere with focus in advance. This distraction itself is better known as a distraction, distraction from smartphones has the potential to take up your free time which should be used for useful activities, such as reading a few pages of a book.

    5. Setting Targets

    The way to take the time to read the next book is to set a target in reading the book. You can do this by setting a clear target regarding the time to complete the reading.

    For example, like when you want to spend two books in one month. So, you can make a book reading agenda every day for at least 30 minutes. In this way, both unconsciously and consciously, you will be more motivated to consistently spend time meeting your goals in reading books.

    6. Join a Reading Community

    Then, the way you can take time to read books is to join a book reading community. The book reading community itself is now more widely known as literacy activists. There are a lot of literacy activists in Indonesia, it’s just that this community still doesn’t really attract the interest of people in various regions.

    By having friends with the same hobby, namely reading books. Then it will be easier for you to interact regarding your reading activities. If you are fit to join a book reading community, you will become more interested and more enthusiastic about spending time reading books.

    In addition to increasing the enthusiasm for reading books, you will also have new experiences that you can get from reading stories of your friends. Fellow members of the book reading community will encourage one another. This is of course effective for increasing the desire to read books consistently.

    7. Read your favorite type of book

    The final way to take the time to read books is to read the types of books you like. Before you read, one of the most powerful factors to make someone interested in reading a book is curiosity or liking for something.

    Books are things that can provide clear and in-depth answers to something you want to know. Well, for those of you who want to start reading books, you can start based on a topic or theme that you like. This method is believed to be very effective so that you can have a reading habit that doesn’t feel burdensome, instead it’s fun.

    You can find various interesting books on Sinaumedia.com. Sinaumedia.com provides various types of books according to your wishes. Come on, collect your favorite books so that when you have free time, you can read them right away.

    Thus is the discussion about the right time to read books as well as several ways to spend time reading books. You can apply this series of explanations in your daily life so you can spend more time with quality activities.

  • What’s the difference between an island and a continent? Here’s the answer

    What’s the difference between an island and a continent? Here’s the answer

    The difference between islands and continents – In simple terms, islands and continents clearly have different meanings and concepts from one another. The most specific difference is that islands are smaller in area than continents. Usually islands are within one country, while continents can be home to several countries.

    Does Sinaumed’s still feel confused about understanding these two things? If so, let’s look at some of the following about the differences between countries and continents!

    Definition of Islands and Continents

    Definition of Island

    According to the UN Convention on The Law of The Sea (UNCLOS 1982) Article 121, states that an island is a naturally formed land mass that is surrounded by water and does not sink during high tides.

    Meanwhile, an island is usually different from small islands scattered in each country. According to Law number 27 of 2007 concerning the Management of Coastal Areas and Small Islands, an island is called small if it has an area of ​​around 2000 km² or around 200,000 hectares.

    UNCLOS 1982 provides conditions regarding the definition of an island, namely an island must be formed naturally. This means that artificial islands or islands resulting from reclamation cannot be included in the category of an island.

    Definition of Continent

    According to KBBI, the continent is a part of the earth in the form of land or land that is very broad so that the central part of the continent is not directly affected by sea breezes.

    The existence of continents in the form of land or large land masses can make continents a “home” for several countries.

    Elements of Islands and Continents

    Island Elements

    1. A land surrounded by oceans
    2. Can be inhabited by a group of humans
    3. It’s in a country
    4. The extent varies

    Continental Elements

    In general, a continent has several elements, namely,

    1. The area is very wide and bounded by the sea
    2. Each has its own geographic location
    3. Determined by geology
    4. Becoming a “home” place for several countries

    Islands and Continents

    Island shape

    Islands have various forms. Some are inhabited and some are in remote locations making it impossible for a group of humans to live in. Indonesia, which is often dubbed as an archipelagic country, has around 17,000 islands.

    The shape of the islands scattered in Indonesia has a unique shape. Like Sulawesi Island which has a shape like the letter K, and others.

    The shape of these islands occurs naturally without human intervention. However, there are artificial islands that are created by humans for certain purposes. Making the island using materials such as soil, sand, rock, concrete, and others. An example of an artificial island in Indonesia is the Reclamation Island in Jakarta.

    According to the Ministry of Marine Affairs and Fisheries, there are a total of 8,837 (53.01%) small islands whose land area is only 0 – 1 Ha, so these islands cannot be used for investment purposes. However, these small islands can be used for conservation, education, research, to the defense and security of a country.

    In Indonesia, the number of small islands is 5,594 consisting of 3,862 islands with utilization in the form of other use areas (APL) and are uninhabited. While the rest, which is around 1,732, are inhabited small islands.

    Continental Shape

    On this planet earth, continents have seven forms, each of which is home to many countries. The seven continents are Asia, Africa, North America, South America, Australia, Europe and Antarctica.

    1. Continent of Asia

    The continent of Asia is the largest continent on planet Earth, which is approximately 43,998,920 square kilometers. In addition, the continent of Asia is known as the continent that has the most population in the world.

    Viewed astronomically, the Asian continent is located at 26 degrees – 170 degrees East Longitude (BT) and 11 degrees – 80 degrees South Latitude (LS).

    Meanwhile, the continent of Asia has its own boundaries, ie

    North: Arctic Ocean

    East: Pacific Ocean, Bering Strait and Bering Sea

    South: Indian Ocean and Australia

    West: Europe, Ural Mountains, Red Sea, Coconut Sea, Bosphorus and Dardanelles. (OL-1)

    The continent of Asia is divided into six regions namely Southeast Asia, East Asia, South Asia, West Asia, Central Asia and North Asia.

    The Asian continent has deserts and lots of tropical rain forests. The desert on this continent is very wide and is located in India, China, and parts of the Middle East. While the existence of tropical rain forests is usually located in southeastern Asia, namely in the Philippines, Indonesia and Malaysia.

    In addition, on the Asian continent there are also many savannas and steppes. Savanna is a wide expanse of grassland with trees around it. Meanwhile, the steppe is a wide and dry expanse of land so that you can find lots of shrubs. Savanna and steppe are common in the Central Asian region because in this region the rainfall is quite low.

    2. Continent of Africa

    The African continent is the third largest continent in the world with an area of ​​approximately ± 30,290,000 km2. The African continent is famous for its inhabitants who are descended from negroes or black races.

    Astronomically the continent of Africa is located between 37º latitude – 34º south latitude and 17º West – 51º east longitude. Thus it can be concluded that the continent of Africa is traversed by the equator and most of its land area is in the northern hemisphere.

    The continent of Africa has its own boundaries as well as other continents, ie

    North : Mediterranean Sea (Mediterranean Sea)

    East: Indian Ocean, Red Sea

    To the south: the Atlantic Ocean

    West: Atlantic Ocean

    This continent has many major rivers. The longest river in the world, the Nile, which is about 6,400 km long, is also located on this continent. Because of its length, the Nile River passes through the countries of Sudan and Egypt.

    The types of animals that live on this continent are a combination of various types of typical Eurasian animals, which generally have the characteristic of being large and strong bodies such as lions, giraffes, zebras, hyenas, and others.

    3. Continent of North America

    The American continent was originally discovered by a European explorer named Christopher Columbus in 1492. The American continent is divided into North America and South America based on the culture contained in each.

    The area of ​​this continent is about 19,348,760 square kilometers. The North American continent has become home to several countries, namely the United States, Canada and Mexico. Astronomically, the continent of North America is located at 26 degrees LU – 80 degrees LU and 68 degrees West – 162 degrees West.

    The boundaries of the continent of North America are

    North: Arctic Ocean

    East: Atlantic Ocean

    South: Central America and the Gulf of Mexico

    West: Pacific Ocean, Bering Sea, and Bering Strait.

    4. Continent of South America

    South America has a culture that is thick with Latin culture from Spain and Portugal, so it is often called Latin America.

    The area of ​​this continent is about 17,867,308 square kilometers. Astronomically, the South American continent is located at 16 degrees LU –56 degrees LU and 34 degrees West – 118 degrees West.

    The boundaries of the South American continent are:

    North: Caribbean Sea and Atlantic Ocean

    East Atlantic Ocean

    South: Drake Strait and Atlantic Ocean

    West: Pacific Ocean.

    This continent has 4 different climates based on the location in each region, namely polar climate, subtropical climate, tropical climate, and desert climate.

    a) Polar climate. When this climate comes, it will make the winters long and the summers short. As a rule, this climate occurs in the northern regions.

    b) Subtropical climate. When this climate comes, this continent will experience four seasons in the form of winter, spring, summer and autumn. This climate usually affects the northernmost areas the most.

    c) Tropical climate. This climate has the characteristics of high rainfall and humidity, as well as hot temperatures throughout the year. This climate usually occurs in Central America and South America.

    d) Desert climate. This climate occurs with rapid temperature changes and low rainfall. This climate generally occurs in areas that are behind the mountains.

    5. Continental Australia

    The continent of Australia is the smallest continent in the world. The continent of Australia is often dubbed as a continent country because it only has one country in its territory. But apparently, this continent has 6 states. This continent is located quite close to the country of Indonesia, namely as the southern border of Indonesia.

    The continent of Australia has an area of ​​around 7,686,850 square kilometers. This continent is astronomically located on the lines: 113 degrees – 155 degrees East longitude and 10 degrees – 43 degrees South latitude.

    Australia Continental Boundaries:

    West: Indian Ocean (Indonesian Ocean)

    East: Pacific Ocean

    North: East Sea and Arafuru Sea

    South: Indian Ocean

    These animals that are spread across the Australian continent cannot usually be found in other regions. The most famous animals are kangaroos and koalas. In addition, this Australian continent has unique animals such as the platypus and pangolin.

    The people who live on this continent have high quality human resources. In fact, the life expectancy of the population shows a high category alias has good health conditions with balanced welfare.

    6. Continental Europe

    The European continent is a combination of several peninsulas, namely mainland Europe and Scandinavia, connected by the Baltic Sea.

    When viewed astronomically, this continent is located between latitude 35 degrees – 71°06 North Latitude and 9°27′ West Longitude -66°20’East Longitude.

    European Continental Boundaries

    North: Arctic Ocean

    To the East: Continent of Asia

    To the south: the Mediterranean Sea and the Black Sea

    West: Atlantic Ocean

    The continent is divided into five regions namely Northern Europe, Eastern Europe, Western Europe, Southern Europe and Central Europe.

    The development of flora and fauna on the European Continent is a type of flora and fauna that can live in temperate and cold climates. The most famous types of flora are maple, lily, olive, oak and conifer trees. This conifer plant is a needle-leaved plant and when autumn comes, this plant will drop its leaves.

    7. Continent of Antarctica

    The continent of Antarctica is a continent that is not inhabited by humans because it is cold, even the whole area is covered with snow. This continent is included in the category of the coldest places in the world and is located at the South Pole of planet Earth.

    This continent has an area of ​​about 15,540,000 square kilometers. Astronomically, it is located at 66.5 – 90 LS.

    Antarctica Continent Location: 66.5 – 90 South Latitude

    Location of the continent of Antarctica: 15,540,000 km / square

    The continent of Antarctica is bounded by the Atlantic Ocean, Indian Ocean and Pacific Ocean.

    The continent of Antarctica has a landscape in the form of land which is always covered with ice with a thickness of up to 3 km. On this continent there are giant ice mountains called the Transantarctic Mountains which are about 5,000 km long. The Transantarctic Mountains divide this continent into East Antarctica and West Antarctica.

    Because it is the coldest place in the world, it is only natural that this continent has the lowest temperature reaching -89 C and the average temperature is around -37 C. This is because the continent of Antarctica consists of high mountains with its land covered in cold snow. So that the population of flora and fauna that can live on this continent are only mosses, seals, penguins, and Albratas birds.

     

  • What is Visionary? These are the characteristics and characteristics of people who have them

    What is Visionary? These are the characteristics and characteristics of people who have them

    What is Visionary? These are the characteristics and characteristics of people who have them – Sinaumed’s, are you a visionary person? Or are you the one who runs things according to what’s going on? Many people formulate in advance what they will do. besides being more organized, it will also make it easier for you to achieve your goals. But what does visionary mean? This article will discuss the definition of visionary, visionary characteristics, and characteristics of visionaries.

    Definition of Visionary

    Visionary words usually refer to a leadership style that is applied by someone. They see a vision for the future and take the right steps to make it happen. Visionary leadership means the ability to lead by creating, communicating, formulating, socializing and implementing something. It is in the form of ideal thoughts. This thought comes from himself or is the result of social interaction between fellow members or his team.

    Someone who leads who applies a visionary way will always see what potential a company or organization might have. He will see something that no one else can see. After seeing that potential, then he will create a brilliant idea. These ideas are ideas that allow the company to compete with various competitors.

    Things like that are believed to be able to achieve the goals of the organization in the future. However, of course such ideals must be through support and a commitment from each member. So that the goals can be achieved properly.

    According to experts

    1. Danim and Suparno

    Danim and Suparno (2012:6) state that a vision is more than just an idea or picture of a better future for an organization. A true vision is a powerful idea. This power is urgent, namely the start of the future by relying on an ability and skill.

    In addition, talent and natural resources are also needed to make it happen. Personally, visionary humans will be able to give birth to ideas that have influence. Besides being influential, these ideas can also inspire creative people to turn educational ideas into something real.

    Talented and policy-making people will always want to be among leaders who have actions that show them how things are going. This is realized by providing a vision of how a better tomorrow will be.

    2. Bush and Coleman

    Bush and Coleman also expressed their opinion on what is visionary. According to Bush and Coleman (2008:36), vision is a chosen future, a desired state to be experienced. Vision is an expression of optimism towards the environment. The environment can be bureaucratic or non-bureaucratic.

    3. Sinamo and Santosa

    Sinamo and Santosa (2012:217) also gave their opinion. According to them, vision is a tool in the hands of a leader. This is useful in order to be able to forge alliances and to form alignment of goals through all of its constituents, like a vector that has the same direction to reach its target. Visionary leaders will clearly be more able or able to empower all of their constituents.

    The visions expressed by these experts are believed to be able to help a leader to focus an energy so that the organization can succeed. Based on the visionary understandings of the experts, conclusions can be drawn. Visionary is an idea and an innovation that is carried out or planned for the future. These ideas or innovations are designed to make an organization or company even better. In addition, in order to achieve its goals properly.

    Characteristics of Visionary People

    1. Be responsible

    Having a high sense of responsibility is part of someone who is visionary. Every step taken and the methods used to make it happen must be accompanied by a sense of responsibility that is embedded in him. When he gets a challenge, he will give full responsibility for what is being done.

    This is intended so that these challenges can be passed smoothly. In addition, this is also for the sake of realizing ideas or ideas that have been planned from the start. Responsibility is something that needs to be instilled in visionary people.

    2. Dare to take risks

    Every time you make a decision, there must be a risk behind it. Likewise when making an idea or ideas. Risk will always be behind the idea or ideas that will be made. A visionary person will always dare to take all the possibilities and risks that will occur.

    That’s because every change made certainly has a risk that must always be accepted and faced. If someone who is visionary does not dare to take risks, then the ideas or ideas that have been created will be in vain. It will not be carried out properly and may even fail to be carried out.

    3. Optimistic

    Optimism is a trait that is always inherent in someone who is visionary. Sometimes, someone who is visionary will assume that all the ideas and ideas that have been created will run smoothly. All problems will be passed well.

    That’s what makes him automatically optimistic. However, this feeling of optimism is not something bad. The feeling of optimism that we have can be transmitted to the surrounding environment so that we can both be optimistic.

    4. Be consistent

    If you consistently carry out what has been planned, then the goals to be achieved will go well. Consistency is an attitude that doesn’t change and stays on what is being done. Through strong consistency, all the ideas that have been created will feel much lighter. This consistent attitude is one of the attitudes possessed by visionary people.

    5. Honest and what it is

    A visionary person must have integrity. Integrity is a trait, quality or condition that shows a complete unity so that it has the potential and ability to radiate authority, one of which is honesty. Someone who is visionary will put forward an honesty. They will do what they say. And stick to what has been said.

    Telling the truth and acting as it is is a form of explanation, that we are people who are always open. Other people will see that we are not covering up the real condition because we act as it is. Such things are the attitude of a visionary.

    Characteristics of a Visionary Person

    1. Smart to have a good relationship

    Having good relationships is one of the characteristics of a visionary person. Establishing a good relationship must start from now. Establishing good relations with various parties will also be beneficial. These benefits can be felt for yourself and for the company.

    Building a trust between various parties will help make it easier to realize the vision that has been determined. When we have gained trust, it will be easier for us to explore what people really need most. Needs that make life easier.

    2. Can build a value

    Building and forming a value is also a characteristic of someone who is visionary. A visionary person must be able to give confidence to the people who will work with him or his company. Must be able to convince that working with us is not wrong.

    In addition, there must also be beliefs and evidence that make others feel that they benefit from working with us. Instilling values ​​that benefit both parties is one of the things that is needed between the company and its members.

    3. Able to overcome obstacles

    Obstacles are something that will definitely always be in business. Various obstacles will be passed on the way to a good goal. Someone who is visionary can certainly overcome the obstacles that might be passed. Obstacles can be likened to a friend for them. If you think obstacles are friends, then obstacles will be easy to overcome.

    A visionary leader will work closely with his team in solving obstacles. They will devise ways so that obstacles can be resolved properly. In fact, they will come up with ideas or other ways so that these obstacles don’t happen again in the future.

    4. Can think critically

    Critical thinking is also one of the characteristics of a visionary person. Critical thinking is an ability to think clearly and rationally. Thinking about what to do, or what to believe. Critical thinking is a process, in which a person must be able to make logical or reasonable judgments. In addition, someone who thinks critically must think carefully.

    Critical thinking will help someone become more visionary. Someone who thinks critically will be more open-minded . Will see everything from various directions and the various possibilities that exist. This will cause a wider viewing angle.

    5. Can think dynamically

    Visionary people also tend to think dynamically. Dynamic thinking is thinking confidently. Someone who thinks dynamically will pursue various goals that have been set with enthusiasm. They will really love a variety of challenges.

    Dynamic thinking makes them always accept arguments objectively. Other than that, discussions are a huge favorite. Dynamic thinking is thinking that has been embedded in the minds of visionary people.

    6. Able to perform risk management

    Someone who is visionary will be able to carry out risk management. That’s because they have thought of everything with mature thoughts. Risk management is a process that requires us to identify and analyze an event. After that, an evaluation and control of something is carried out.

    The next step is to prevent something bad from happening again. As well as minimizing the possibility of bad happening. In fact, if necessary, it will take steps to eliminate risks that are difficult to accept. This risk management will help the team and the company if they experience a problem that causes a loss.

    7. Have a systematic plan

    A visionary person must have prepared a plan and goals for the future. Before that, of course, it must be accompanied by a clear understanding of the reasons for making these goals. Making something within his means was also a more convenient thing.

    When carrying out planning , do not demand to be successful at certain times. Doing it little by little will be more effective. In addition, it will make the goal easier to achieve.

    8. Have investment savings

    Having savings is one of the things that visionary people often do, this is because they understand the possibilities of a financial crisis that could happen to anyone at any time.

    According to him, saving in large or small amounts but regularly is a good thing. This will help to avoid bad luck that could happen. Visionary people don’t just prepare something or an idea about their life path. But also financial problems that do not forget to be prepared.

    9. Help others develop

    Success is a result of efforts that are always done. However, behind that success there must be people who are also involved in it. The people who help are also definitely doing something well.

    Someone who is visionary will certainly help the people beside him to develop. This is also done to help expedite ideas or ideas. Ensuring everyone is working on their respective duties is also something that needs to be done.

    10. Focus on results

    Focus on results is a hallmark of a visionary person. How do you make what you do work well? There are many possible answers to this question. Visionary people always focus on the results they want to get. Visionary people will show that focusing on results is the most important thing.

    11. To inspire or motivate

    Motivation and inspiration is one of the keys to one’s success. Directing someone to be better is also one of the steps needed to achieve the goals that have been set. Some people usually spend time directly involved in what their team is doing.

    They share their tips and visions for creating an enthusiastic situation. So that commitment within the team will be maintained. This small step can be an inspiration and motivation for the team. In addition, positive things like this will encourage the team to be even better.

    12. Likes to experiment

    Experimenting is something that visionary people often do. For them, experimentation is the thing that needs to be done. Experimenting will make them know how strong the idea or ideas that will be formulated.

    In addition, experimenting will also make them know how far ideas or ideas can be implemented. Also through experimentation, visionary people can recreate new ideas or ideas. These new ideas or ideas can be used for the future.

    Of course the experiments carried out must be in accordance with the objectives to be applied. Even though they like to experiment, what they do is still considered how the results will be. A visionary person will not immediately experiment without careful planning.

    Those are some information about visionaries. Being a visionary person does require all preparations. However, people who have a vision will find it easier to achieve their goals.

     

  • What is Tipsy? and How to Get Rid of Tipsy

    What is Tipsy? and How to Get Rid of Tipsy

    Tipsy Is –  The habit of consuming alcoholic beverages is a health problem in Indonesia. In fact, the 2018 Basic Health Research (Riskesdas) published by the Ministry of Health stated that 3.3% of Indonesia’s population aged >10 years consumed alcohol.

    Meanwhile, the proportion of excessive alcohol consumption occurs in the age range > 10 years, namely 0.8% of the entire population in Indonesia. In fact, when someone consumes alcoholic beverages, it will enter the bloodstream which can then have an impact on brain and body functions.

    During the drunken phase of alcohol, there is a phase known as tipsy. On this occasion, we will discuss more about tipsy. To find out more about tipsy and how to get rid of them, then you can read this article to the end. However, before discussing this, we will first discuss the characteristics of drunkenness.

    Characteristics of a Drunk Person

    To find out if someone who drinks alcohol is drunk or not, then you need to know the following characteristics.

    1. Difficulty in making decisions or digesting information
    2. Decreased coordination
    3. Heart rate and breathing slow down
    4. Impaired vision
    5. Feeling very sleepy
    6. Lose balance
    7. But the speed of people who start getting drunk is certainly different.

    In addition, there are several factors that can influence a person to get drunk easily when drinking alcohol, including:

    1. Age
    2. Body shape
    3. alcohol tolerance
    4. Gender

    Things You Feel When Tipsy

    Being drunk or tipsy then becomes the first sign that the alcohol you drink is having an effect on the body. In general, a person then begins to feel drunk after consuming 2 to 3 alcoholic drinks within an hour.

    This hangover also begins when alcohol then enters the body’s bloodstream and begins to affect the functioning of the brain and body. Blood alcohol content (Blood Alcohol Content/BAC) is a unit used to measure the amount of alcohol in a person’s bloodstream.

    When someone is tipsy, they will usually feel a number of things, including:

    1. Look more talkative and become more confident.
    2. Tend to be more daring in taking risks
    3. His motor responses began to slow down
    4. Has a shorter attention span and poor short term memory
    5. Have a greater risk of injury due to being less focused.

    Phases of Alcohol Intoxication Levels

    If you consume excessive alcohol, your body’s functions will then run more slowly. Tipsy itself can be regarded as an early sign of alcohol starting to affect the body.

    Generally, someone who will then start to feel tipsy after he consumes 2-3 types of liquor within an hour. However, everyone’s alcohol tolerance level is certainly different. The more alcohol you drink, the stronger the impact on the body will be.

    A very severe level of alcohol intoxication is also very dangerous because it can cause seizures, vomiting, dehydration, acute kidney failure, injury, coma, which can result in death.

    This level is then assessed from the blood alcohol content (BAC), which is the unit used to measure the amount of alcohol in a person’s bloodstream. For more details, here are the levels of alcohol intoxication.

    1. Conscious (Sobriety)

    A person who is in a state of sober or very lightly affected by alcohol consumes only one alcoholic drink in a period of one hour. The blood alcohol level is only around 0.01-0.05%. At this level, a person then still feels like himself.

    2. Euphoria/Tipsy

    Tipsy is an early sign when alcohol is starting to have an effect on the body. Women and men have different tolerances for alcohol, including when they start to feel tipsy. For example, men start to feel tipsy after consuming 2-3 types of alcoholic drinks in one hour, women will feel tipsy after consuming only 1-2 types.

    The BAC level in this phase is 0.03-0.12%. When someone is tipsy, they feel more confident and talk to them more. In addition, tipsy people also become more willing to take risks even though their motor responses are slower. Furthermore, tipsy people then have a shorter focus span and memory.

    3. Excitement

    The next level of alcohol intoxication is excitement when they have consumed 3-5 drinks (for men) and 2-4 drinks (for women) within one hour. Class B drinks with 5% -20% alcohol will then trigger someone to get drunk. The BAC level in this stage is around 0.09-0.25%. This is the phase when someone is said to be drunk. Characteristics of a drunk person include:

    Usually, you will be fully sober more than 18 hours after people feel drunk. Drinking alcohol will also increase a neurotransmitter called gamma-aminobutyric acid or GABA. Then, GABA will then suppress the central nervous system, so you can get drunk. This is also explained in research published in Pharmacology Biochemistry and Behavior.

    4. Confusion

    Consuming more than 5 drinks (for men) and 4 drinks (for women) within one hour will then cause someone to enter the confusion stage or heavy drunkenness due to confusion. BAC levels in this stage itself is 0.18-0.30%. Characteristics at this level of intoxication include:

    1. Difficulty standing and walking
    2. Overflowing emotions
    3. Feeling very confused about what happened
    4. Vulnerable to loss of consciousness
    5. Cannot feel pain so the risk of injury is high

    5. Stupor

    The next phase is to make a person no longer able to respond to what is happening around him. It is impossible for a person in the stupor stage to stand or even walk. At this stage someone who is drunk can then pass out, have seizures, or even have pale and bluish skin.

    Furthermore, in this phase with a BAC level of 0.25-0.40%, a person can no longer breathe normally. Not only that, the gag reflex or gag reflex also won’t work optimally, so it’s very dangerous if you suddenly choke on your own vomit. At this stage you can say it is the level of intoxication where a person needs emergency medical treatment.

    6. Coma

    A more severe degree of alcohol intoxication is coma, which occurs when the body’s functions are too slow. A person is then at risk of death at this stage. It is very important to provide emergency medical attention when the blood alcohol level reaches 0.35-0.45%.

    7. Death

    When blood alcohol levels are higher than 0.45%, a person can die. If you have penetrated this stage, then the consumption of alcohol will then be too much, so that the body can no longer be able to tolerate it. The side effects of excessive drunkenness can also have a negative impact on the body. In people who are drunk and under the influence of alcohol, their bodies experience the following conditions:

    1. Dehydration
    2. Becoming too frequent urination
    3. Diarrhea, and sweating
    4. Indigestion
    5. Blood sugar drops
    6. Disturbed sleep time

    Groups of People Prohibited from Drinking Alcohol

    In order not to be tipsy or cause dangerous health conditions, there are some people who cannot drink alcohol, including:

    1. Younger than 21 years old.
    2. Pregnant or may be pregnant.
    3. Driving, or planning to drive, or participating in other activities that then require skill, coordination, and alertness.
    4. Taking certain prescription or over-the-counter medications which can then interact with alcohol.
    5. Suffer from certain medical conditions.
    6. Recovering from alcohol addiction or unable to control the amount they drink.

    How to get rid of Tipsy

    There are several ways to get rid of tipsy, including:

    1. Drink Coconut Water

    By drinking coconut water, the tipsy that is being felt can be reduced. This can happen because coconut water contains electrolytes and potassium.

    2. Chew Ginger

    By chewing ginger, you can reduce nausea caused by alcoholic beverages.

    3. Taking Aspirin Drugs

    The second way that can be done to get rid of tipsy is to take aspirin. However, you also need to remember that this drug should not be consumed in excess.

    3. Drink Mineral Water

    The third way that can be done to get rid of tipsy is to drink mineral water. By drinking mineral water, body fluids can be replaced, so that the feeling of dizziness is reduced.

    4. Don’t forget to eat

    The next step that can be taken to get rid of tipsy is to always try to eat snacks or small snacks to help improve blood flow.

    Health Risks Due to Tipsy

    There are several health risks caused by tipsy, including:

    1. Heart Damage

    Excessive alcohol consumption weakens the heart muscle. As a result, blood flow throughout the body also becomes disrupted. Alcohol will also cause cardiomyopathy which is characterized by shortness of breath, irregular heartbeat (arrhythmia), fatigue, and persistent coughing. Not only that, alcohol will also increase the risk of heart attack, stroke, and hypertension.

    2. Inflammation of the Pancreas (Pancreatitis)

    Too much alcohol in the body will then make the pancreas experience a buildup of enzymes. This excessive buildup of enzymes in the pancreas will eventually cause inflammation or what is called pancreatitis.

    Acute pancreatitis is generally characterized by various symptoms such as abdominal pain, nausea, vomiting, increased heart rate, diarrhea, and fever. If left unchecked and the habit of drinking alcohol is not stopped, it is not impossible that someone’s life will be threatened.

    3. Liver Damage

    The liver functions to filter out toxins and unused waste so they don’t accumulate in the body. However, excessive consumption of liquor will slow down the work of the liver, causing liver disorders.

    About one in three cases of liver transplantation in the United States originates from liver disease caused by excessive alcohol consumption. In addition, cirrhosis of the liver due to excessive alcohol consumption is also the 12th leading cause of death in America in 2009.

    4. Kidney Damage

    The diuretic effect of alcohol can also increase the amount of urine produced by the body. As a result, it becomes difficult for the kidneys to regulate the flow of urine and body fluids, including the distribution of sodium, potassium and chloride ions throughout the body. This condition will then disrupt the electrolyte balance in the body which will cause the body to become dehydrated.

    5. Anxiety Disorders

    Drinking alcoholic beverages can also be an escape to help a person feel more comfortable. Unfortunately this effect then only lasts a moment. As already mentioned, the relaxing effect that comes after drinking alcohol wears off quickly.

    Because of this, he will continue to rely on alcohol to help cover up his anxiety and then make his alcohol tolerance increase and he will need to drink even more to feel the same effects. However, without realizing it, the effect of a hangover will actually make these anxiety symptoms worse.

    Closing

    From all the explanations above, it can be said that tipsy is one of the levels of the drunken phase. Therefore, when you are experiencing tipsy, you should stop drinking alcohol. Thus the discussion about tipsy, hopefully all the discussion above adds to Sinaumed’s’ insight.

  • What is the Relationship between Spices and Colonization in Indonesia?

    What is the Relationship between Spices and Colonization in Indonesia?

    What is the relationship between spices and colonialism in Indonesia? Maybe that is the right question to delve into the history of the arrival of the invaders to our country. Indonesia has always been known as a country blessed with natural resources. Not only that, this country is rich in biodiversity, and one of the natural resources it produces is spices. Spices are some plants that can be used as seasonings for cooking.

    There is no doubt that Indonesia is rich in spices and was once visited by Europeans to colonize it. Then what is the relationship between spices and colonialism in Indonesia? To answer this question, let’s examine the relationship between spices and colonialism in Indonesia through the discussion of the following article, starting from the history of spice hunting in Indonesia, to the reasons Europeans came to Indonesia:

    History of Spice Hunt in Indonesia

    The discovery and development of spice plants discovered by ancient people is unstoppable. After trying to study the various types of plants and natural resources available, it turns out that herbal ingredients that can cure illnesses and reduce physical conditions (a type of doping, but made from natural ingredients) can be consumed if mixed with several types of food.

    Since 3500 BC the Ancient Egyptians have been using various spices to flavor food and cosmetics and treat the dead. The use of spices extends from the Middle East to the eastern Mediterranean and Europe. Spices from China, Indonesia, India and Ceylon (now Sri Lanka) were originally transported overland by donkey and camel caravans.

    Arab middlemen managed the spice trade for nearly 5,000 years before European explorers discovered routes to India and other spice-producing countries in the east. Before learning the seasoning technique, ancient people ate their food simply by burning it, without going through any additional processing stages.

    Of course, the resulting taste is the simple and pure taste of the ingredients they burn, often the trigger for disease caused by the food they consume. Not only that, the food they hunt is also very easy to prepare and you have to go looking for food every day, so you can’t store it for too long. From hunting to the day after returning, they wrapped the game in spice leaves.

    This inadvertently changes the taste and smell of the prey. Since the discovery of this technology, ancient people have researched new plants that would help enhance the delicious taste of their food. In addition, they are looking for ways to increase food resistance and resistance to pathogens by using certain spices. Today, spices are still an important addition to the delicious taste of food.

    Finding cheaper ways to get spices from the East ushered in a glorious New World era of exploration and discovery. European explorers such as Ferdinand Magellan, Vasco da Gama and Bartolomeu Dias have traveled long distances to find routes to the sources of spices. Christopher Columbus traveled west from Europe in 1492, finding the route to the spice lands, but discovered the United States of America.

    In 1497, the Portuguese navigator Vasco da Gama found a route around the southern tip of Africa and arrived in Calicut on the southwestern coast of India in 1498. Dagama returned from the journey with lots of nutmeg, cloves, cinnamon, ginger and pepper. It started thousands of years before Christ. The world’s greatest spice hunt didn’t occur until the 15th century. The trip was initiated by Europeans such as Spain, Portugal, Great Britain and the Netherlands who fought for spice production centers.

    Competition is fierce to spend years fighting for spices more valuable than gold. Its efficacy is sought not only as a perfume, but also for preservatives, drugs, and air freshener. European spice exploration was first pioneered by Christopher Columbus, but only the Portuguese Vasco da Gama, who became a successful sailor, recorded gold ink in the 15th century.

    This spice route passes through various parts of the world and ports, especially Asia, Africa and Europe. Indonesia is also known as a paradise for various kinds of spices because of its strategic location. Like cloves which grow in Ternate and Tidore, nutmeg which grows naturally in Banda and Sumatra is known as a producer of frankincense, cinnamon and pepper. It used to be a pioneer in the spice trade, and various tribes were involved in forming the archipelago.

    Spices have long been a valuable ingredient. Not all regions can produce the spices that meet their needs, so that groups of people and even countries that can explore remote areas often travel to conserve the natural resources they need. Historically, it is not uncommon for wars to arise from power struggles over an area to preserve natural resources wherever someone wants to control them. The reason for the war here is how they want to take control of this spice trading market.

    The Relationship of Spices and Colonization in Indonesia

    Based on the history of the spice hunt above, it shows how valuable spices were to the world at that time, even today. Based on the history of its development, this hunt can provide answers to the question of what is the relationship between spices and colonialism in Indonesia, which occurred in the following eras:

    Pre-colonial Age

    Jack Turner stated in his book “History of Temptation” that Indonesian spices which were traded in ancient times in the Mediterranean region were originally moored in Malabar (India). The results of the spice trade were then distributed by Indian traders to the cities of Rome and Venice as well as other parts of Europe. Not only that, the Arab merchants who were able to obtain these spices also brought them to the Red Sea and the Persian Gulf.

    Until the 14th century, Europeans had never seen or imagined herbs firsthand. The European spice imagination is in full swing. Imagine, for example, that peppers are harvested like vines and grown on trees rather than real vines. After all, Europe was bewildered in the 15th century, when it was hard to find spices as the Ottoman Turks occupied the fall of Constantinople, the gateway to trade between Asia and Europe.

    Europe needed spices from the whims of royal rulers, traders and adventurers. They also decided to carry out a spice expedition in the archipelago. The era of colonialism After Constantinople fell, the Europeans finally started their expedition to the archipelago. Before, rumors were widespread about the archipelago (Indonesia), which was known as a paradise for spices.

    This edition is included in Marco Polo’s book. And that explains how abundant spices are in this country. According to Fadly Rahman Negeri Spices magazine, expeditions to the archipelago began in the 15th century. Until 1511, the leader of the Portuguese expedition, Alfonso de Albuquerque, finally succeeded in conquering Malacca (North Maluku). Initially, the Portuguese only wanted to trade spices. However, because Indonesia had many high-quality spices such as cloves, sandalwood and nutmeg, the Portuguese wanted to rule over Indonesia.

    Later, the Portuguese succeeded in confiscating the archipelago’s spices and managed to monopolize the spice trade in Europe. Disliked by the Portuguese, who controlled European trade through a monopoly, the Dutch took steps to circumvent the Portuguese monopoly. The Dutch introduced the Vereenigde Oostindische Compagnie (Association of the East India Company) (VOC), which was founded on 20 March 1602.

    VOC is a Dutch company that monopolizes trading activities. Here, Dutch origin colonized Indonesia for centuries. From the explanation above, we can conclude that spices are related to colonialism, because Indonesia is rich in spices which became a magnet that attracted Europeans and controlled Indonesia.

    Reasons for Europeans Coming to Indonesia

    By 1390 cloves reaching Europe would be around 6 tonnes annually, and nutmeg would be around 1.5 tonnes. The first Europeans to enter the archipelago, the Portuguese. Then the Spanish and Dutch came to Indonesia as traders. Later, even the Netherlands established the Vereenigde Oost Indische Compagnie (VOC) or the Dutch Trade Alliance. After that, the VOC dominated Indonesia for a long time. It started when the Portuguese headed for the spice production center of the Maluku Islands under the guidance of Francisco Serrau after the conquest of the city of Malacca in 1511.

    The arrival of the Portuguese seems to have attracted the attention of Abu Beras, sultan of the Kingdom of Ternate. He then offered to build a fort on Ternate Island in exchange for selling all the carnation products to the Portuguese. With this offer, the Portuguese cooperated. This was the beginning of the Indonesian colonial era. Based on the ambition to dominate the archipelago’s rich spice trade through European countries. The kingdoms of Ternate and Tidore, quoted from the official website of the Ministry of Education and Culture (Kemendikbud), developed rapidly thanks to spices, especially cloves.

    Initially, Ternate and Tidore lived peacefully side by side. Their arrival had the ambition to hunt and control spices by colonizing the archipelago. Indonesia is rich in spices so it has different regions. At times, it even becomes an item that has high selling value or is expensive. Spices also have medicinal and health benefits. Around 1390, cloves reached Europe reaching about 6 tons annually, and nutmeg up to about 1.5 tons.

    The first Europeans to enter the archipelago, the Portuguese. Then the Spanish and Dutch came to Indonesia as traders. The Netherlands also later established the Vereenigde Oost Indische Compagnie (VOC) or Dutch trade association. After that, the VOC dominated Indonesia for a long time. The initial entry of the mainland into Indonesia Quoting from the website www.indonesia.go.id, it began after the city of Malacca was conquered in 1511. Under the guidance of Francisco Serau, the Portuguese headed for the spice-producing center of the Marc archipelago.

    The arrival of the Portuguese seems to have attracted the attention of Abu Beras, sultan of the Kingdom of Ternate. He then offered to build a fort on the island of Ternate in exchange for selling all the carnation products to the Portuguese. With this offer, the Portuguese agreed to cooperate. This was the beginning of the Indonesian colonial era. Then, after the defeat of the Portuguese in 1641, Dutch merchants came and founded the VOC. During this time, a monopoly on nutmeg was established in 1621, and clove was also monopolized in 1650.

    Based on the ambition to dominate the archipelago’s rich spice trade by European countries. The kingdoms of Ternate and Tidore, quoted from the official website of the Ministry of Education and Culture (Kemendikbud), thrived thanks to spices, especially cloves. Initially, Ternate and Tidore lived peacefully side by side. But peace did not last long, especially after the arrival of the Portuguese and Spanish. They started playing against each other, and as a result, the two empires disbanded and competed against each other.

    The Portuguese came to Marc by making Ternate an ally. Meanwhile the Spanish came to Marc in 1521 by making Tidore their ally. Their arrival not only imposed a trade monopoly, but also disrupted domestic governance. The competition between Portugal and Spain for control of the Maluku Islands ultimately led the two countries to resolve the conflict. Then in 1529 they signed the Treaty of Zaragoza.

    As a result of the Agreement, Spain had to leave the Maluku Islands and finally control the Philippines. Meanwhile, the Portuguese continued to trade in the Maluku Islands. In implementing monopoly policies, the VOC has become the richest private company in history. Even forced planting that changed the color of world trade.

    Types of Spices in Indonesia

    There are seven types of spices that make Indonesia rich: pepper, cinnamon, nutmeg, vanilla, cloves, turmeric and ginger.

    1. Pepper

    In Indonesia, pepper plants are spread in Aceh, Jambi, West Kalimantan, East Kalimantan, Lamphun, West Nusa Tenggara and South Sulawesi. Furthermore, Southeast Sulawesi, South Sumatra, North Sumatra, Yogyakarta Special Region. In 2016, pepper became Indonesia’s most important spice.

    2. Cloves

    Carnation cloves originate from the Maluku Islands in Indonesia. Cloves were a popular and expensive spice in the early days of Portugal’s expansion. At the time, people corresponded to the price of gold bars. In Indonesia, cloves are found in areas such as Jambi, West Java, Central Java, East Java, Central Kalimantan, East Kalimantan and Marc. Furthermore, NTT, Papua, Riau, South Sulawesi, Southeast Sulawesi, North Sulawesi, South Sumatra and DIY.

    3. Cinnamon 

    Cinnamon is a spice with a musty aroma and unique taste. Therefore, cinnamon is often used as an additive in cakes and drinks. Cinnamon is found in many areas, including Jambi, West Sumatra and Yogyakarta. As of 2016, cinnamon is the second most important ingredient after pepper.

    4. Nutmeg 

    Nutmeg is a typical plant of Banda and Marc. However, its distribution can be found in various regions such as Bengkulu, Marc, Papua, South Sulawesi, Southeast Sulawesi and North Sulawesi. Nutmeg is not only a spice, but also a raw material for producing essential oils. In 2016 it became the third largest raw material.

    5. Vanilla

    Vanilla is actually a Mexican spice, not Indonesian. However, in Indonesia it is widely cultivated in various regions such as East Java, Lampung, NTT, Central Java, Central Java and DIY.

    6. Ginger

    Ginger is one of Indonesia’s main seasoning ingredients. Ginger has health benefits, especially as an ingredient in Chinese herbs.

    7. Turmeric 

    Turmeric is a plant that is used for treatment. In Southeast Asia, turmeric is not only used as the main spice, but also as part of religious ceremonies.

    So, that’s an explanation of the relationship between spices and colonialism in Indonesia.

  • What is the Purpose of ASEAN Formation? Accompanied by Benefits and Obstacles

    What is the Purpose of ASEAN Formation? Accompanied by Benefits and Obstacles

    The purpose of ASEAN – ASEAN is a forum for realizing world peace, as was the real goal when the agency was formed. This peace starts from the Southeast Asia region, to other countries that can collaborate or establish good relations together. However, do you know what are the complete goals that underlie the establishment of ASEAN?

    Main Pillars Underlying ASEAN Goals

    The beginning of the formation of ASEAN was started by a conflict, where in the 1960s, the struggle for ideological influence had to be resolved immediately. Because of this, ASEAN was successfully formed on August 8, 1967 and its goals were contained in the Bangkok declaration.

    There are three main pillars that underlie the purpose of establishing ASEAN, namely the ASEAN Economic Community or ASEAN Economic Community , the ASEAN security community or the ASEAN Political Community , and the ASEAN cultural community which is referred to as the ASEAN Socio Cultural Community . The formation of a series of ASEAN communities requires the community to implement a regional mechanism, which means that each country must have a will.

    The ASEAN goals were successfully signed during the Bangkok declaration which was attended by representatives from each country such as Tun Abdul Razak from Malaysia, Adam Malik from Indonesia, Narsisco Ramos from the Philippines, S. Rajaratnam from Singapore, and Thanat Khoman from Thailand.

    ASEAN Goals Based on the Bangkok Declaration

    There are ten countries that are still actively contributing to this organization, namely Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore, the Philippines, Thailand, Brunei Darussalam, Myanmar, Laos, Vietnam and Cambodia. The following are objectives that have been approved according to the declaration.

    1. The purpose of forming the organization is to support economic growth, cultural development, and social progress in areas that can be approached. Thus, every party will come together and unite to make it happen through effort and enthusiasm that all women are equal. Friendship is in fact needed to strengthen the foundation of a society in a more prosperous and peaceful Southeast Asian nations.
    2. Regional peace and stability can be enhanced through the agency. The way to achieve this is by respecting justice and law and order in relations between countries in the designated area. The principles of the United Nations or UN are the main guidelines.
    3. Increasing cooperation between countries so that they become more active and can help each other on issues that are classified as a common interest such as in the economic, technical, social, scientific, and administrative fields.
    4. Cooperation will become more effective by increasing the utilization of industry and agriculture, trade which goes through a process of studying problems in international era commodities. Means of transportation and communication can go through a process of improvement, so that people’s living standards will increase and people’s lives will develop.

    Countries can often provide assistance in the form of suggestions on training and research activities for education. Fields that run in engineering, administrative, and professional positions will further develop if they obtain cooperation based on other principles.

    1. Another objective of this body is to promote studies in the region of Southeast Asia that are as broad and comprehensive as the opportunity allows.
    2. Close and well-maintained cooperation became one of the ideals when the agency was formed for a long time. Various organizations in international and regional scope have similar goals. All possibilities can be properly received and heard if they hold each other tightly.
    3. Responses that are more effective, meaningful, and can be positive or negative to prove that users must be even more careful about transnational crimes, cross-border challenges, and all forms of threats.
    4. Sustainable development must advance to ensure environmental protection in the region. Long-lasting resources, preservation of cultural heritage, and people’s lives can be developed to achieve high quality.
    5. Human resource development is carried out through closer cooperation, both in the fields of education and lifelong learning, science and technology, empowering people and strengthening the ASEAN community.
    6. Increasing the welfare of a decent life for all people throughout the ASEAN region. The trick is to create equitable access to opportunities for human development, justice, and social well-being.
    7. ASEAN was formed to build a safer environment, so that its people are guaranteed to be free from all kinds of illegal drugs and narcotics.
    8. ASEAN is promoted to be people-oriented, so that within it a layer of society will be formed from positive encouragement and motivation, benefiting from all opportunities, integration processes, and community building for ASEAN.
    9. ASEAN identity can be recognized by all people with a higher awareness of cultural diversity and regional heritage. For example, Indonesia, which is rich in its own culture and customs, is better recognized by residents.
    10. Defense of centrality and a proactive role as the main driving force in relations and cooperation through external partners for a regional architecture that is transparent, inclusive and open.

    Benefit from the ASEAN Goals

    Through a number of cooperation carried out by countries in ASEAN, there are a number of benefits to be obtained properly. These benefits include the following points.

    1. Stability, peace and order in the ASEAN region to continue development in all fields. From these benefits, Indonesia has the urge to be more advanced and compete with other countries.
    2. The creation of broad cooperation in the economic field, expansion of trade, investment, tourism, technology, education, and science. Development and acceleration in these fields can develop.
    3. ASEAN is a forum for Indonesia to fight for the country’s interests in the Southeast Asian region and the interests of all parties in the international region.

    ASEAN now has its own charter, dubbed the ASEAN Charter. This matter is stated on the website of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs or KEMLU, so that the body in question can transform its form as a political association with flexibility, becoming a strong legal basis or legal personality.

    The regulations that are brought in become stronger because of the existence of legal personality, so that the purpose is clear. In essence, ASEAN was formed to create an atmosphere of peace, friendship and prosperity. More importantly in the world of politics, ASEAN declares itself as an organization that highly respects and upholds human rights (Human Rights).

    This turned out to be in accordance with the Bangkok declaration which said that the formation of an Association for Regional Cooperation between regions in Asia was known as the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN).

    1. Economic growth will accelerate and social progress and cultural development will be affected. This success comes from joint efforts in the spirit of equality and partnership. The point is that the foundation of society becomes stronger, so that prosperity and peace can be felt by them.
    2. The promotion of regional peace and stability is carried out to respect the rule of law and justice in relations between countries in the region in question and adherence to the principles of the UN charter.
    3. Its aim is to promote active cooperation and mutual assistance in the economic, cultural, technical, scientific, social and cultural worlds. Administrative and sectional are also characteristics that make associations easy to distinguish.
    4. Assistance to one another is channeled or provided in the form of training or research facilities, be it in the fields of professional, administrative, and technical education.
    5. Collaboration is actively carried out to meet the great needs in agriculture and industry. The expansion of their trade involves the study of trade issues on an international scope, improvement of transportation and communication facilities to increase the standard of living of the people living in the area.
    6. Promote Southeast Asia, attach great importance to the close cooperation and benefit of international organizations. Exploring all avenues leading to closer cooperation with one another.

    Activities That Must Be Implemented To Realize Asean’s Goals

    If you want to carry out the aims and objectives that have been written, the members of the ASEAN group must implement a number of the following activities.

    First, the annual meeting is held by the Minister of Foreign Affairs although it has to be on a rotation basis. The meeting will be held at the ASEAN ministerial level, the meetings that can be held will be adjusted according to needs.

    Such a meeting can be explained in the description of the AMM or Asean Ministerial Meeting, which is a meeting between foreign ministers of countries and ASEAN members that discuss developments in community development.

    The establishment of a committee under the foreign leadership of the host country and its representatives to serve as members. The detected data will be used to create association works between meetings organized by the foreign minister.

    An ad-hoc committee or specialist standing committee will be tasked with working on existing responsibilities. They serve in each particular field, according to their ability to work.

    Furthermore, participation in all regions in Southeast Asia to carry out the principles and goals of the organization. This association is tasked with representing the various collective wills of the region in Southeast Asia to bind themselves together in sacrifice and cooperation.

    This goal is safe for the people, children and grandchildren thanks to peace, and freedom and prosperity that makes all parts of the region or areas in the country integrated. Acting as an umbrella for cooperation between countries in Southeast Asia, ASEAN is given great responsibility for the development and life of diplomatic relations between peoples.

    In its development, conflicts and disputes can occur in members in ASEAN. It is hoped that this world peace organization can become a bridge for these countries to resolve existing disputes.

    If there is an inharmonious relationship between its members, the goals of ASEAN can also be hampered. Well, for examples of problems and cases themselves, you can see them through the details below.

    Problems That Can Hamper the Realization of ASEAN Goals

    In fact, there are indeed a lot of problems that occur between ASEAN members or countries. One of the issues that often creates controversy, which has not even been resolved until now, is the issue between Indonesia and Malaysia related to the Ambalat block claim.

    What is the Ambalat block? The basic block that exists on the sea or continental shelf with an area of ​​15,235 square km, is precisely located 80 miles off the sea of ​​East Kalimantan, a depth of 2.5 Sulawesi waters. This block is actually still located in Indonesia’s EEZ or area, to be precise if there are Indonesia’s sovereign rights to manage natural resources.

    According to The United Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS) 1982, the maritime zone is divided into several areas according to different rules and rights. As we already know, the territorial zone is a maritime zone that is drawn 12 miles from the base line or baseline.

    In the case of Indonesia, the line used is usually the straight archipelagic baseline as the right over our archipelagic state. The zone also enforces a limited number of laws that extend beyond the coastline, such as health, immigration, customs, and fiscal.

    However, you should also know that outside the Territorial Zone there is also a separate regulation called sovereign rights , whereby the coastal state can manage natural resources in the region. Land and sea transportation are still allowed to pass over the EEZ, in contrast to the underwater area which has its own regulations.

    From this decision, Malaysia made a claim that the area belonged to it based on the 1979 marine area map. The map was issued unilaterally by the Malaysian state, so it can no longer be called illegal. However, the regulation still has political implications.

    This claim naturally invites many objections, including from Indonesia itself. It doesn’t stop there because Malaysia also claims itself as an archipelagic country after winning a dispute with Indonesia, regarding Ligitan and Sipadan Islands from the International Court of Justice.

    According to Malaysia, the islands of Ligitan and Sipadan must also have a territorial sea, which, when measured by the baselines of the islands, their territorial waters will enter Malaysian territory. This action provoked a reaction from Indonesia and many other neighboring countries.

    Some of the reasons that can provoke conflict between countries are divided into several points, namely as follows.

    1. Ambalat is a Natural Continuation of the Kalimantan Region

    From a geographical perspective, Indonesia does have a stronger position because the western and eastern Ambalat blocks are a form of natural continuity in the Kalimantan region. Regulations regarding the continental margin are governed by the natural continuation of the landmass of the coastal states that comprise the seabed area.

    2. Decision of the Constitutional Court

    A decision coming from a constitutional court could win Malaysia over the issue of island ownership, even if only for the mainland. Meanwhile, Indonesia has always guarded the Ambalat area to remain part of our Sovereignty State.

    The judges themselves said that the decisions they made had no effect on the delimitation of the continental shelf. Simply put, Malaysia cannot take the waters or continental shelf around Ligitan Island with the Ambatan Sea.

    3. Indonesia as an archipelagic country

    The characteristics of Indonesia as an archipelago or Archipelagic State have made it claim the Ambalat region since the Dutch colonial era. Malaysia is not an archipelagic country, but only a country that has normal beaches to use regular or straight baselines.

    With various reasons and opinions, the approval of this case is even more heated. The two countries also began to guarantee relations and cooperation with international companies that carry out oil or resource concessions in the region.

    To solve this problem, all ASEAN members submitted their opinions or opinions in a forum. The main goal is that the dialogue that occurs will be more constructive, so that a series of problems, from security and politics, make them able to carry out tasks immediately.

    Contributions are made to be more significant, regarding developments with public confidence regarding the residence of members. The application of preventive diplomacy for stops in the Asia Pacific area can also help.

    Those are some of ASEAN’s goals and various applications that you can understand. ASEAN in fact has good goals to develop, so that we as a community in the Southeast Asian region can always support and always work together.

  • What is the Nebula Theory in the Formation of the Solar System

    What is the Nebula Theory in the Formation of the Solar System

    Nebula Theory – Studying the solar system and everything in it is endless. The presence of the solar system itself is an interesting phenomenon that makes many people wonder how it was formed. Discussing the ranks of the solar system is inseparable from all the theories including the nebula theory.

    Have you ever seen clusters of stars in the sky that at first glance look like colorful clouds? If you go to a place with low light, such as in a field, on a wide savanna and use a telescope, you may have seen clouds like this.

    The clouds between these star clusters remind us of the nebula theory, which in Latin means cloud. So what exactly is meant by this nebula theory?

    Before going into details about the nebula theory, you need to get acquainted with the theory of the formation of the universe.

    Theory of the Formation of the Universe

    Astronomy explains the theories of the formation of the universe which also include the nebula theory. So how did the universe form based on the science of astronomy?

    Without us realizing it, we, who have been busy with our daily activities and learning everything, are all limited to knowledge on the earth we live in. In fact, if you want to take a wider view of our vast earth, this is only a small part of the solar system and even the universe.

    Have you ever thought about what the history of our solar system really was like long ago? What’s in one solar system, and what’s in another?

    When discussing outer space and the solar system, maybe at a glance what is in the shadows is scenes from science-fiction films such as Star Wars, Guardian of the Galaxy, ET and the like. Of course, these stories also appeared not because of the inspiration of natural phenomena and also theories of the formation of the universe which have been a secret since ancient times.

    Scientists and astronomers have been observing everything in outer space since time immemorial. Because of this, various theories have emerged to clarify and provide a common thread for all of our current questions.

    In astronomy, there are a number of theories regarding the process by which the universe and its contents were formed. These theories can be interrelated and some are contradictory, but all of them are believed to be used as a reference for future learning.

    Steady-State Theory

    Steady-state or steady-state theory believes that the universe exists without beginning and also without end. This means that nature has just been formed without any phenomenon and this theory also assumes that the universe will never end.

    This thinking is also based on monitoring celestial bodies which have not changed in the past thousands of years.

    This may be inversely proportional to what most people believe about the end of the world. However, that’s how a theory put forward may not always be in line with other sciences.

    Today, since the 20th century this steady state theory is no longer used, given the advanced technological developments so that scientists have found evidence that is considered much more concrete.

    At this time scientists believed that the universe was formed through the processes that exist in the latest theory, and not suddenly exist without a beginning or an end.

    The Big Bang Theory

    Ever heard of the big bang theory? Or often called the big bang theory. Based on the big bang theory, this explains the beginning of the formation of the universe as it is today because of a big explosion that came from an atom that was so dense that it was even too dense.

    Due to the high heat energy and atomic density, it eventually created a very large explosion which scattered the pieces into all the material in this solar system.

    This theory is also supported by the existence of Hubble research evidence, a scientist who discusses this theory. In his research it was proven that there is a red shift of galaxies in the microwave cosmos.

    Some of the light elements in galaxies are getting bigger and bigger so that it is called galactic evolution. Predictably, this can happen because of the growth of gravity from the standard theory. This further emphasizes that there is a possibility that the universe was formed through a big bang.

    Nebula Theory

    For observers of the solar system, or for those of you who are interested in discussions about astronomy, you may be familiar with hearing the term nebular theory in your ears, because this theory is the most widely accepted by scientists and scientists .

    The term nebula itself also means cloud or also means fog which was also coined by a scientist in 1755, which explained that the solar system was formed starting from a large amount of gas such as a cloud or fog.

    Most of these clouds or fog come from hydrogen gas which has very hot temperatures. A rotating cloud or nebula that forms the sun and other planets in the solar system.

    The Formation of the Solar System Based on the Nebula Theory

    The nebula theory itself has many versions according to the research and conclusions of previous scientists. The following is the theory of the formation of the solar system presented by scientists based on the nebula theory.

    Nebula Theory According to Kant

    Kant revealed that the formation of the early solar system came from a nebula or cloud that rotated slowly and was attracted by gravitational forces. It is this gravity that eventually forms, bit by bit, to agglomerate and harden into the composition of our solar system.

    Nebula Theory According to Laplace

    Kant’s theory is further strengthened by the income from Simon Laplace, a mathematician and astronomer. Laplace explained in more detail about the role of the nebula theory in the process of forming the solar system.

    Based on Laplace’s discovery, the nebula theory is a creation of the universe starting from the sun. The sun starts from a ball of hot gas that rotates centrifugally or spins outwards quickly.

    Matter and gas that were on the outside of the ball were thrown away and cooled to form a planet. Meanwhile, the core hot ball was getting hotter and forming the sun.

    Nebula Theory According to C. Von Weizsäcker

    When Kant and Laplace had explained this nebular theory, in the 20th century a German scientist also voiced his own version of the nebular theory. According to him, in ancient times a large layer of gas in the form of hydrogen and helium was found.

    Some of the gas is outside the sun’s equator and the rest just disappears. The pressure from the sun’s heat energy then makes this gas leave the heavier elements and collect in one mass line.

    A series of mass collections originating from gas also attracts solid material in outer space until it collects and condenses into a planet.

    Nebula Theory Based on NASA

    The nebula theory, also known as the fog theory, was explained by NASA. Quoting from NASA’s Solar System Exploration states that around 4.5 billion years ago the solar system only started from clusters of clouds and dense gas in the form of dust and stars.

    These clouds rotate slowly to form a larger clump in the form of a solar nebula. The existence of gravity makes dust and gas particles in this solar nebula rotate slowly and consistently to form a disk.

    After forming a disk, the nebula gets denser and denser and forms a solar core. The gas and other materials that cool around the sun’s core form the ranks of the planets in the solar system that we know as the Milky Way.

    In the ranks of the planets of the solar system, there is the earth where the planet where we have stopped and lived all this time.

    The Process of Forming the Solar System Viewed from the Nebula Theory

    Starting from the Collection of Mist

    When drawing conclusions from the exposure of previous scientists, it can be concluded that this universe was formed starting from a cluster of clouds or fog. This fog cluster is actually gaseous particles that mostly contain hydrogen and helium.

    This gas is also the most frequently found on other planets, including Earth in ancient times. This large and hot cloud mass is the beginning of the formation of the sun as the center of the solar system.

    Rotating Nebula

    The fog clusters in the form of gas rotate and rotate quickly so that they have a strong enough gravitational pressure. The rotating nebula is getting stronger and stronger, the gas content inside also causes high heat, this is what will form the sun.

    During rotation, some of the gas is in the path and some is outside the path of the sun’s rotation and forms a ring around it.

    Spread of Gas Beyond the Lines of the Sun

    The nebula or fog that is outside the trajectory of this solar nebula eventually revolves around the sun like a ring. The gas around the sun’s ring also makes its own rotation while circling the sun.

    Gas Condensed Into Planets

    This nebula, which rotates in the trajectory of the sun’s rings, still has the sun’s gravitational pressure. The existence of this gravity makes gas, dust and objects in outer space around it attracted by the force of gravity and unite.

    The nebula that comes from hot gas also cools and solidifies over time, so that at that time gas, dust, and other solid matter merges into a rotating round planet.

    Like a nebula ring that is on the path of the sun to form the planets in the solar system from Mercury to Pluto before finally disappearing.

    The planets that are on the outer path of the sun have the coldest temperatures, while those that are closest to the sun still have hot gases belonging to the sun.

    When viewed from the process and correlation, this nebula theory is the most widely trusted because it is closest to reality. But any theory certainly has advantages and disadvantages, as well as in nebulae.

    Advantages of the Nebula Theory

    Through this theory it is proven successful to state that our solar system is in a flat straight line with an oval trajectory around the sun. Therefore, it is not surprising that many scientists believe in the truth of this nebula theory.

    Disadvantages of the Nebula Theory

    However, there are also those who disagree and think that this theory has weaknesses. James Clerk and Sir Jeans also stated that the bracelet or ring trajectory around the sun has less gravitational pressure.

    In addition, based on the nebula theory, the largest size should be a planet and not the sun. While in fact the sun has the greatest mass weight.

    Already Know the Nebula Theory?

    Talking about astronomy with all its theories is always an interesting discussion, especially if you are really interested in that field. So terms like big bang theory and nebula also sound familiar.

    The nebula itself, as a theory that is believed by most scientists and astronomers, is the theory that feels the closest to reality. Although the explanation also varies from each scientist, we can see similarities between them.

    The nebula theory still has many flaws that feel ‘odd’, but this is something that makes sense considering that the emergence of a theory is only based on research and data. No one really knows what the outer universe is like, nor does anyone know how this universe was actually created.

    One thing is certain, humans continue to study the earth and its solar system throughout the year in order to get the closest data accuracy and knowledge. Therefore many of us cannot be separated from books about astronomy to study the sky and everything in it

  • What is the Major Diatonic Scale? Definition and Examples

    What is the Major Diatonic Scale? Definition and Examples

    What is the Major Diatonic Scale – In every musical instrument, of course, there will be a basic tone that makes it sound more harmonious. The scale itself is one of the most important elements in a piece of music that is useful for producing beautiful and pleasant tones to listen to. In a sense, scales are the result of a combination of tones that have certain intervals.

    One of the scales most often used in a song is the major diatonic scale. As a music lover, of course you have to understand what a major diatonic scale is and its characteristics, as well as examples of songs that use these scales. In this article, we will discuss it in more detail.

    What is the Major Diatonic Scale?

    According to a book entitled Tone and Rhythm by M. Noor Said (2020), the meaning of the major diatonic scale is a scale that is arranged with pitch spacing or intervals in the form of 1-1-½-2-2-2-2/2. In music, pitch or interval is the distance between one note and another. An example of a major scale is C major which consists of do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, si, and do.

    Difference between Major and Minor Diatonic Scales

    To be able to distinguish between the two types of diatonic scales, you must first understand the meaning of each of these terms. If explained using the genre of the song, then usually the major diatonic scale will be used for songs that are cheerful and fun. This is certainly different from the minor diatonic scale which usually gives a more melancholic impression to songs or music that uses this type of scale. Not only that, the distance between the notes of the two types of scales is also different.

    Where the major diatonic scales have intervals between notes, namely 1-1-½-1-1-1-½, while minor diatonic scales have intervals between notes, namely 1-½-1-1-½-1-1. . Actually, we can see the difference from the impression and the interval directly. So, you will not feel confused and have difficulty in distinguishing which songs or music use major scale types and which songs or music use minor scale types. Here, you only need to know and pay attention to the impressions and intervals to be able to recognize them.

    Characteristics of the Major Diatonic Scale

    Actually, from the explanation regarding the meaning of the major diatonic scale above, of course you already know some of the characteristics that exist in this scale, namely the properties it has and also the interval it applies. However, only by knowing the characteristics above, you will certainly feel less able to understand this type of scale clearly. Therefore, let’s take a good look at some of the characteristics possessed by the major diatonic scales below.

    1. Cheerful and Fun

    Every type of scale that exists in the world of music will certainly have an impression or characteristic that is different from one another. As for the major scale itself, it will show a more cheerful and pleasant nature. So when you listen to a song or music that uses this scale, it is very likely that the song will have a cheerful and fun impression. With its pleasant impression, this song will make you feel more excited after listening to songs that use major diatonic scales.

    2. Make a Valuable Impression

    Besides being able to give a cheerful and fun impression, songs or music that use major diatonic scales can usually also give a valuable impression. Therefore, the major diatonic scale is a scale that is often used in songs with the theme of struggle. There are several patriotic songs or national songs that use major diatonic scales, because these scales are full of enthusiasm. Surely this will fit perfectly with the criteria for a struggle song that really requires an impression like that.

    3. Prefix and Suffix of the Major Diatonic Scale

    Basically, this major diatonic scale will start with the root note “do” in the first note. Then, this type of scale will end with the do key which is an octave higher than the previous do key. So, even though the prefix and suffix of the basic tone of this type of major diatonic scale have the same name, the octaves themselves will be different from one another. This further indicates that this type of scale will be different from other types of scales.

    For more details, the order of the notes in this type of major diatonic scale is do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, si, and do. The order of these tones is among the most common. So that we can conclude that this type of scale is included in the type of scale that is most often used in a particular song or music.

    4. Interval Patterns on the Major Diatonic Scale

    The interval pattern in the major diatonic scale is 1-1-½-1-1-1-½. Where this interval pattern will also be a differentiator between the types of major diatonic scales and other types of scales. Every type of scale in the world of music will certainly have its own interval pattern. Which will later become its own characteristic for this type of scale. Therefore, to understand the characteristics of the major diatonic scale, you must first know what kind of interval pattern is used.

    Features of the Minor Diatonic Scale

    Almost the same as the major diatonic scale which has its own characteristics. The minor diatonic scale is the same way. This type of scale has its own characteristics, which you must understand clearly. Following are some of the characteristics possessed by minor diatonic scales, including:

    1. Is Melancholic and Gentle

    Songs that use this type of ladder will produce a soft and melancholy impression. Generally, songs that are in the ballad genre will use a minor diatonic scale type, so that the song can give a melancholy impression. Songs or music that have a melancholy and gentle impression are quite liked by many young people to adults. When you’re listening to a song or music that has a melancholy impression, it’s likely that the song uses a minor diatonic scale.

    2. Prefix and End of Minor Diatonic Scale

    These next characteristics are also one of the differences between the major and minor diatonic scales. If the sequence on the major diatonic scale is do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, si, do, then the sequence for the minor diatonic scale is la, si, do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, which in that case would equal A minor. When the tone sequence is understood more deeply, then you will know more and more about the reasons why this type of scale will produce a song or music that has a soft and melancholy nature.

    3. Interval Patterns on the Minor Diatonic Scale

    Not only are the properties and impressions different from the major diatonic scales, the interval patterns in the minor diatonic scales are also different from other types of scales. For the interval pattern in the minor diatonic scale, namely 1-½-1-1-½-1-1. With the difference between the interval patterns in it, it is not surprising that the nuances produced from the two types of scales are different. So, it can be said that the characteristics of the two types of diatonic ladders include the basic knowledge that exists in the world of music.

    To further clarify information about the two types of diatonic scales, you need to know some examples of songs that use diatonic scales. By paying attention to the tone in the example, you will understand more about the definition of this type of scale. Therefore, let’s take a good look at some examples of the songs below.

    Examples of Songs Using Major Diatonic Scales

    As we discussed earlier, for songs that use the major diatonic scale type, it will produce a cheerful and fun impression and be more enthusiastic. With such a character, this makes many patriotic songs or national songs use this type of scale. The following are some examples of children’s songs as well as national songs that use major diatonic scales, including:

    – Delman ride
    – My balloon
    – From Sabang to Merauke
    – See my garden
    – Halo-Halo Bandung
    – Garuda Pancasila
    – Manuk Dadali
    – Ampar-Ampar Bananas
    – Wake Up Youth Youth
    – Forward Undaunted

    Examples of Songs Using the Minor Scale

    In contrast to songs or music that use major diatonic scales, songs or music that use minor diatonic scales will produce a sadder, gentler, and melancholic impression. This is a very basic difference between songs or music that use major diatonic scales, and songs that use minor diatonic scales. Below are some examples of songs that use the minor diatonic scale type, including:

    – A moment of silence
    – Gratitude
    – Indonesian Heritage
    – Take the Moon
    – Morning Star

    By understanding some examples of songs in these two types of diatonic scales, you can judge for yourself the differences between these types of songs.

    Why Scales Are Included in Basic Knowledge in the World of Music?

    Scales are often referred to as one of the basic knowledge in the world of music that must be learned and understood if you want to work in the world of music. This statement appears not without reason, because the scale is very important in the world of music, so it should not be missed. Not only that, learning and also understanding scales can also help you to do various things in the world of music. So that it will also benefit you. The following are the benefits that you will get when you learn scales well.

    1. Makes It Easy To Play Musical Instruments

    When playing a musical instrument, of course we are required to be able to read notes which are usually in a songbook. The notes are closely related to the scales discussed earlier. So, by learning and understanding scales well, it will be easier for you to play the instrument you like. Thus, you can also create beautiful harmony in the same music.

    2. Increase Concentration

    For the next benefit, this is actually included in the benefits of learning the art of music. But because basically scales are part of the art of music, the benefits of this one can also be referred to as the benefits of learning the scales in music. When you want to play a musical instrument, of course you have to understand the notes. Where usually this will happen for beginners who want to learn certain musical instruments. By learning about these scales, you will be better able to concentrate on playing your favorite musical instrument.

    3. Add Knowledge About the World of Music

    Music is also one of the interesting things to learn. In addition, music can also include a song, musical instruments, and various other musical arts that many people often don’t understand. When you want to enter the world of music, especially for musical instruments such as the violin, piano, and also the guitar, then you must know about the scales in them.’

    Because, each tone can give a different impression from one another. So that it will become one of the basic sciences that must be understood. For example, between the major diatonic and minor diatonic tones. If a song or music using a major diatonic scale will give a cheerful impression, then it is different from a song using a minor diatonic scale which gives a more melancholy impression.

    4. Can Create Various Kinds of Songs

    Not a few people think that someone who can create a song with various genres is a genius. Therefore, if you want to get this title, then you can start by understanding the various scales first. As previously discussed, that each scale will give a different impression. Therefore, we can conclude that when you can recognize the scales in the world of music, then this will make you have great abilities in creating various types of songs with different genres.

    For someone who has been involved in the world of music for a long time, information about the characteristics and also the interval pattern in the major diatonic scale may include basic knowledge that has been memorized by rote. However, this is different from some people or beginners who have just entered the world of music. Of course, they still have questions about this knowledge. So, with this article, we hope that the various explanations discussed above can be a learning reference for those of you who want to get involved in the world of music.

    This is an explanation of what the major diatonic scale is and how it differs from the minor diatonic scale. How, are you interested in learning more about music?

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • What is the Main Thought? Functions, characteristics, and how to determine them

    What is the Main Thought? Functions, characteristics, and how to determine them

    What is the Main Thought? – Do you know if in a reading there is a main idea. This has also been taught when you were in elementary school. But so that it is easier for you to remember and understand related to the explanation of the main idea. This article can help you remember information about the main idea.

    Understanding Main Thoughts

    When we are all learning Indonesian, of course, material for finding the main ideas in articles or in one paragraph is often found. It turns out that if we flash back the main ideas in a paragraph it is true and this can become a core or main topic which will later be explained in several supporting paragraphs in an article.

    The main idea is a core of a reading or a topic which will be discussed more deeply through supporting explanations. A paragraph will usually consist of two main elements.

    The first element is the topic to be discussed or it could also be the main idea. Then for the second element is a supporting sentence. Where later this supporting sentence can be an explanation or reinforcement of the main idea.

     

    You can learn about the PUEBI Book, General Guidelines for Indonesian Spelling

    by Eko Sugiarto

    The Functions Of The Main Idea

    If you already understand the meaning of the main idea through the previous point. Next you can understand about the function of the main idea at this point. Simply put, the function of the subject matter itself is for readers to more quickly identify what the creator of the article or paragraph really wants to convey.

    However, as previously explained, if the main idea is stronger and easier to understand, the meaning requires several supporting sentences.

    Main Thoughts Based on Paragraphs

    After knowing the function of the main ideas in the previous explanation, it turns out that the main ideas are also divided into several types based on the paragraphs you know. Among them are deductive paragraphs, inductive paragraphs, descriptive paragraphs, and mixed paragraphs.

    Of course, the four paragraphs have their own characteristics. So that you better understand the four paragraphs. Come on, see the full explanation below.

    1. Deductive Paragraph

    The first type of paragraph is deductive, where in this paragraph the main idea will be placed at the front. You could say this type of paragraph has a pattern from general to specific.

    The structure of a deductive paragraph starts with the main idea and is supported by several supporting sentences behind it. Because it has an easy structure and is so detailed. So do not be surprised if paragraphs are used more often.

    2. Inductive Paragraph

    In contrast to deductive paragraphs where the main idea or sentence is at the beginning of the paragraph. This type of inductive paragraph uses the placement of the main idea at the end of the paragraph.

    The structure of this type of paragraph is usually from general to specific. Starting from a general explanation that will refer to the main ideas at the end of the paragraph.

    Not only that, it turns out that inductive paragraphs are also divided into three types, namely generalization, analogy, and the last is causality.

    3. Descriptive Paragraph

    This descriptive paragraph is slightly different from the previous two types. Where the main idea of ​​the descriptive paragraph is spread out. This means that each explanatory or supporting sentence has an implied main idea.

    4. Mixed Paragraphs

    Finally there is a mixed paragraph. Just as the name suggests, mixed paragraphs have the main ideas placed at the beginning and end of the paragraph. If you look at the pattern, from the general special then it is strengthened to the special again.

    Of all the types of paragraphs described above, of course, they can be found in every article. Of course, understanding the explanation of the main ideas based on the type of paragraph can make it easier for you to understand what the author of the article will convey.

     

    You can learn about the Skilled Writing Indonesian Series: Sentences

    by PROF. Dr. DJOKO SARYONO, M.PD. DKK

     

    Characteristics of Thoughts

    In a paragraph the existence of the main idea also has several characteristics. The characteristics of this main idea will of course also make it easier for you to determine whether a sentence is a main idea or just an explanatory sentence.

    Quoted from a journal entitled “The Ability to Determine Main Ideas by Using an Inquiry Learning Model for Class VIII Students of SMP Negeri 1 Bone-Bone, North Luwu Regency” by Marchella Praserda Katika with the year of manufacture in 2018.

    It turns out that there are several characteristics that exist in a main idea or main idea. So what are these characteristics? The following is a full explanation.

    1. The Main Idea Is Not Too Complicated

    A main idea should not be convoluted or too wordy. This means that each content of the main idea should not be narrowed or too broadened. The purpose of this is to make it easier for the reader to find the main idea or more easily understand what the author really wants to convey in a paragraph.

    2. Main Thoughts Must Be Clearly Conveyed

    In addition to not being too convoluted in making a main idea, it must also be conveyed clearly. Even the placement of the main idea must also be clearly seen, whether at the beginning of the paragraph, at the end, or at the beginning and end, or in all sentences there will be an implied main idea.

    3. Is General

    A main idea must have a general nature. This means that the main idea can be translated back in the next few sentences. This explanatory sentence can also be called a supporting sentence.

    4. There are Supporting Sentences

    Finally, a main idea must have several supporting sentences. This means that a main idea can not stand. Must have several supporting sentences so that the main idea is stronger and easier for the reader to understand.

    You can learn about Creative Journalistic Writing Features, Accompanied by Rules in Journalistic Writing

    by Fanny Lesmana

    How to Determine Main Thoughts

    Some of the characteristics described earlier can indeed be used as an alternative way when you are looking for a topic. However, not everything can go easily, sometimes it has been read over and over again, there is often a feeling of confusion about what exactly you want to say or what is the main idea of ​​a paragraph.

    Of course, we need a tip or a way that can be done to make it easier to determine the main ideas in a paragraph. You can read an explanation of how to find a main idea in a paragraph below.

    1. Read Entire Content In Paragraphs

    The first thing you can do in looking for a main idea can be by reading the entire contents of the paragraph. But in reading the entire contents of the paragraph must be done with full concentration and thoroughness.

    Understand each content in the paragraph, then distinguish which is the main idea and which is an explanatory sentence. That way you can more easily determine a main idea.

    2. Read Every Sentence

    Next, you can look for a main idea by reading each sentence in the paragraph. Understand each sentence in the paragraph. Because a main idea can have the possibility of being in the beginning, ending, or mixture.

    Of course, by reading every sentence in a paragraph it looks very effective to do. Find out which is the main idea or supporting sentence.

    3. Separating Main Sentences With Explanatory Sentences

    Third, you can try to separate the main sentence from the explanatory sentence. Of course, you also have to understand what is meant by the main sentence and the explanatory sentence.

    Most main sentences will be followed by explanatory sentences. But if you are still too difficult to distinguish between the two sentences. Then observing the main sentence and the explanatory sentence can be seen by looking at their characteristics.

    The character of the explanatory sentence will usually have a proof. An example is a sentence that describes a plan. When you can understand between the two sentences. Of course, to determine a subject matter is not so difficult anymore.

    4. Mark Important Information

    Of course, in every paragraph there is always information that is considered so important. Therefore, one way to make it easier to find main ideas is to mark some information that is considered important and interesting.

    However, accuracy and precision are needed in finding this important information. If you find an important piece of information in a few sentences in a paragraph.

    So the next step is to try to select the important information. Look for what really matters. That way the process of finding the main idea will be easier.

    5. Recognize Explanatory Sentences

    Next is to recognize the explanatory sentence as a support for a main idea in one paragraph. Even though it sounds so simple, some people still find it difficult to determine a supporting sentence.

    One way to recognize a supporting sentence is to pay attention to its characteristics. Usually supporting sentences will always be repeated.

    This means if there are several words that are repeated in several sentences. It could be that some of these sentences are supporting sentences that have the aim of strengthening the main idea.

    6. Provide a Paragraph Conclusion

    The sixth step can be by making a conclusion from a paragraph. When you have read the entire contents in a paragraph. Do the next method by trying to make a conclusion from the contents of the paragraph.

    This can also make it easier to find the main idea in a paragraph.

    7. Mark Each Found Idea

    The last method you can use is to mark every time you find a main idea. This may make it easier for you to find mixed paragraphs.

    Where mixed paragraphs have the main idea placed at the beginning and also at the end of the paragraph. Of course, you also have to read the contents of the paragraph so you can find a sentence that you feel is a main idea.

    Examples of Main Thoughts in Paragraphs

    When you understand what the main idea is, function, and easy ways to determine the main idea in a paragraph. Quoted from the official website www.sinaumedia.com, the following are some examples of questions related to the subject matter.

    1. First Example

    The mud flood disaster caused by the collapse of the Situ Gintung embankment, located in South Tangerang, has caused various kinds of diseases to the people around there. Some of the diseases caused by the mud flood disaster are diarrhea, dengue fever, typhus, and leptospirosis.

    Discussion:

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is the flood disaster that can cause various kinds of diseases. If seen from the paragraph above, it can be concluded if the main sentence or main idea is at the beginning. Meanwhile, other sentences have the task of explaining and reinforcing the main idea.

    2. Second Example

    When someone thinks too much about the problem, it will make that person sadder. In addition, rather than dragging on in sadness, it’s better to focus on solving the problem. There is no need to think about and exaggerate the problem, but keep your spirits up and ask for help from people you can trust. That’s how to overcome sadness if you are experiencing problems.

    Discussion:

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is a way to overcome justice. Then the main idea in the paragraph is at the end. The pattern used in the paragraph is from general to specific. This can be seen from the beginning to a few sentences before the end becomes explanatory and ends with the main idea.

    3. Third Example

    Trees provide various benefits for humans and other living things. Trees are useful as a source of food, medicine and industrial materials. One of the most important roles of trees for humans and all living things is that trees are a producer of fresh air in the world.

    Discussion:

    The main idea in the paragraph is the benefits of trees that are useful for the health of living things. Judging from the paragraph above, the main idea is at the beginning of the paragraph. The pattern that is owned by the sentence is from specific to general.

    Where if you look back at the first sentence served to show the topic to be discussed. Then the second sentence to the end is in charge of explaining the main part of the sentence.

    4. Fourth Example

    Insomnia can be caused by various factors. Insomnia or what is meant by sleep disturbances is generally caused by anxiety or a burden on one’s mind, other things that cause insomnia are working late into the night, uncomfortable bed conditions, and other habits.

    Discussion:

    The main idea in the paragraph in the paragraph above is about the causes of the condition of insomnia. Then the main idea is placed at the beginning of the paragraph and followed by explanatory sentences. The pattern that is owned by the paragraph above is from specific to general.

    5. Fifth Example

    Addiction to pornography can damage the brain. The brain of pornography addicts will be continuously stimulated which causes excessive production of dopamine and endorphins. Under normal conditions, these substances can be useful for people on the move. However, it is different from the case of pornography addicts. Where the brain will experience excessive stimulation, which in the long term can make the brain smaller and eventually damaged.

    Discussion:

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is that pornography addiction can damage the state of the human brain. Then to put the main idea of ​​the paragraph above is at the beginning. The first sentence already explains a topic to be discussed and is followed by various explanatory sentences as reinforcement for the first sentence.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    Conclusion

    The main idea is a topic that will be discussed in a paragraph or article. The placement of the main idea can be found at the beginning, end, or the beginning and end of one paragraph.

    The placement of the main points can also be distinguished based on the type of paragraph, such as inductive, deductive, descriptive or mixed. In addition, there are several features that you can use to find the main idea in a paragraph.

    If it is seen from several characteristics, it has not been able to find a main idea in a paragraph. So using several methods of searching for main ideas as explained above can more easily help you.

    If Sinaumed’s wants to make it easier and more understandable about the subject matter in a paragraph. So there’s nothing wrong with using a variety of readings. Starting from books, essays, novels, and others that can be found at www.sinaumedia.com.

    Authors: Djoko Saryono and Soedjito

    Book title: Indonesian Writing Skilled Series: Paragraph

    You can use the book entitled “Indonesian Writing Skills Series: Paragraphs” published by Bumi Aksara as a training medium so you can master a paragraph. Contains 220 pages in easy-to-understand language that will make learning easier for you.

  • What is the Main Idea in a Paragraph? Here’s How to Determine It

    What is the Main Idea in a Paragraph? Here’s How to Determine It

    What is the Main Idea in a Paragraph – Reading in the form of books, novels, articles, and news always has the main idea of ​​a paragraph. When reading a book or analyzing a book, readers can see the important content of each paragraph.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), extensive reading is needed to reach reading. Extensive reading is a person’s ability to be able to capture the contents of each paragraph. This reading process helps improve the skills of reading aspects.

    These readings contain the main idea of ​​each paragraph, a summary of the contents of the reading, to finding facts and opinions. This reading process is necessary so that the reader can understand the essence and intent of a piece of writing.

     

    What is Main Idea? Definition of Main Idea

    The main idea of ​​a paragraph is the core of the conversation or the main problem in a reading. The main idea is a general sentence, then it can be explained through a more specific explanatory sentence, so that the reading is more coherent.

    The main idea is the main sentence that contains the basic thoughts and ideas explained in other sentences. The main idea is also called the main idea, topic sentence, theme, subject matter, and main idea. In one paragraph, there is at least one main sentence which is the main idea. The main idea becomes the main core of a reading, then the next sentence provides information development.

    Nurhaena (2010: 123) in Introduction to Indonesian argues that the main idea is the idea that underlies the preparation of a paragraph in the reading. The main idea is then developed again with more detailed sentences which are called supporting ideas or explanatory ideas. With the main ideas and explanatory ideas, the paragraphs in the reading can be arranged as a whole.

    Furthermore, he clarifies that the main idea of ​​a paragraph is the soul of each paragraph or the core of friends discussed in a reading paragraph. Another term used to refer to the main idea is the main idea or main idea that underlies a reading paragraph.

    In a paragraph there will only be one main idea, which is in the main sentence in the paragraph. The main idea is usually located at the beginning or end of the paragraph, but some are located in the middle of the paragraph.

    Learning Indonesian recognizes terms, such as main thoughts, main ideas, and main sentences. The term contains the same meaning, which refers to the topic sentence. Hayon (2003: 64) in Main Reading Material I states that the main idea is in the main sentence, sometimes the main idea is clearly visible or explicit, but it is also implied, either in whole or in part.

    The main idea of ​​a paragraph according to Nurhadi (2004:73) in Contextual Learning and Its Application in Competency-Based Curriculum (CBC) is the main idea that forms the basis of essay development. Characteristics of sentences that contain the main idea can be seen from the keywords that accompany it.

    Nurhadi (2004: 144) also stated that the main idea (main idea) is a statement made by the author as a general expression (formulation) of the topic. This element plays a significant role in a paragraph. Every other sentence in the paragraph must refer, either directly or indirectly, to the statement. This is because this statement formulates a topic, sometimes this element is also known as a topic sentence .

    Djago (2008:14) further states that the topic sentence is the embodiment of the main idea sentence of the paragraph in a general or abstract form. Opinions about the main idea can be concluded that the main idea can be interpreted or defined as a main idea or thought that forms the basis or foundation in the development of a reading paragraph.

    How to Determine the Main Idea of ​​a Paragraph

    How to determine the main idea in a paragraph is determined from the supporting ideas of a passage. If someone reads carefully, there are ways to determine the main idea, namely:

    • Read the title and the entire reading paragraph quickly and thoroughly. Pay attention to the title and reading, then formulate the main ideas;
    • Pay close attention to the first sentence to the end;
    • Read sentence by sentence, until you finally find the main idea of ​​the paragraph;
    • After finding the main idea, then quickly read the next paragraph. Read the subtitles section, then connect with the main idea;
    • Make a formula according to the main idea;
    • Attention to the main idea in the form of a general statement that covers a wide range. The supporting ideas are narrower in scope, namely in the form of special statements;
    • Make notes for the main idea of ​​each paragraph. These notes will make it easier to understand paragraphs coherently and logically. Usually, the main idea of ​​the statement is general-specific (deductive) and specific-general (inductive).

     

    The difference between Main Sentences and Explanatory Sentences

    The main sentence contains the main idea, main thought, or topic sentence. This sentence has characteristics that can be distinguished from the explanatory sentence.

    Main Sentence Features

    • Complete sentences that can stand alone;
    • Contains potential problems that can be detailed and described;
    • Has a meaning that is quite clear without being connected with other sentences;
    • Can be formed without conjunctions;
    • The main sentence contains the main idea of ​​a topic or event.

    Characteristics of Explanatory Sentences

    • Explanatory sentences of more than one sentence;
    • Fill in the explanatory ideas in the form of brief descriptions, examples, illustrations, and quotations;
    • The explanatory sentence is a special statement and narrow in scope;
    • This sentence clarifies the main idea of ​​the paragraph.

    Marchella Praserda Katika in her research entitled The Ability to Determine Main Ideas Using Inquiry Learning Models for Class VIII Students of SMP Negeri 1 Bone-Bone, North Luwu Regency explained that the main idea has several characteristics.

    The following are the characteristics of the main idea:

    1. The existence of main ideas is not complicated

    The existence of the main idea in a paragraph should not be convoluted. That is, the meaning of the main idea should not be narrow, but also not too broad. This is so that the reader can easily catch the main idea. In addition, this main idea will also help readers to easily understand it.

    2. Main Idea Stated Clearly

    Apart from being simple, a main idea must also be clearly written or described by the author. This is related to the location. In addition, the theme to be conveyed or the essence of the idea must also be stated clearly.

    3. Is General

    A main idea must contain something that is general in nature. This will later be pursed again. That is, a main idea can then be explained and elaborated again. The description will be more specific in the following sentences.

    4. Have Supporting Sentences

    A main idea does not necessarily stand alone in a paragraph. The main idea must have a supporting sentence or a clear idea. These supporting sentences are useful for providing further explanation regarding the previous main idea, so that the paragraph will be coherent and easy to understand.

    5. Main Idea function

    The existence of a main idea in a paragraph also has a function, for example to make it easier for the reader to find out the main idea or subject matter in a paragraph that is read. This is useful so that the essence of something conveyed in the paragraph can be conveyed. Through identifying the main idea, the reader can find out the main idea of ​​a paragraph that is read.

     

    Example of the main idea of ​​a paragraph

    Quoted from a book entitled Definitely Top Success in the 2016 SD/MI Exams , the following is an example of questions about the main ideas of paragraphs.

    Turning Used Goods into Works

    Recycling is the activity of reprocessing unused items into new works. Used items that can be recycled include drink bottles, newspapers, and rags. Recycling is done to prevent many items from being wasted.

    There are many benefits of recycling used goods, one of which can increase income. We can sell recycled handicrafts. In addition, recycling used goods can be a useful activity for children. Used items that children can recycle, such as old newspapers. The way to recycle used newspapers is quite easy, namely by soaking the torn newsprint in a bucket filled with water for a day and a night. Then, the newspaper is blended and mixed with glue. The results of recycled newspapers can be formed into various creations.

    Leftover fabrics or patchwork can be made into dolls in a multi-purpose storage area. Various ways of making dolls from patchwork can be found on the internet. You won’t have any trouble making items out of the patchwork.

    Sentence Analysis

    • The main sentence in the first paragraph: Recycling is the activity of reprocessing unused items into new works;
    • The main sentence in the second paragraph: There are many benefits from recycling used goods, one of which can increase income;
    • Main sentence in third paragraph: Leftover fabrics or rags can be made into dolls or multipurpose storage containers.

    After you can understand an example of analyzing the main idea in a paragraph, in the following, another example of questions regarding the main idea that you can use to practice will be given.

    Problem 1

    The focus of the driver in a moving vehicle is to look ahead through the windshield, not the rearview mirror. Focusing on the rearview mirror will affect the vehicle’s speed and it is not impossible to result in an accident. The use of the rearview mirror is only occasional and each time it is only used for an instant, not for a long time.

    Source: Kompas, 9 July 2007

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph above is…..

    A. The driver’s main task is to look at the windshield
    B. The use of rearview mirrors is sufficient from time to time
    C. The effect of mirrors on vehicle speed and accidents
    D. The driver must look ahead

    Answer key: A

    Problem 2

    The Jakarta – Merak Toll Road Section is Uncomfortable

    As a user of the Jakarta – Merak, Banten toll road, especially the Cikupa-Cilegon section, I really feel uncomfortable. Every day there are sections of the road that are repaired, then half of the roads are closed. As a result, traffic jams and long lines. For those who go with high punctuality, don’t expect to be on time.

    For the Cilegon-Cikupa direction, there are currently seven location points where the road sections are being repaired. The repair length varies between 1 and 2 kilometers, namely at Kilometer 74, Kilometer 65, Kilometer 56, Kilometer 51, Kilometer 49, Kilometer 44 and Kilometer 31.

    Toll roads really need to be repaired so that toll users can be comfortable, safe, without obstacles. However, the problem seems to be that the repair never ends. In the last two years there have been toll roads that have been repaired. Sometimes those that were repaired were about 100 meters, but roads that were closed were more than 0.5 kilometers. The funny thing is, the road that had been repaired a few months later cracked again.

    Is it possible for toll road repairs to be arranged in such a way so that traffic jams do not occur at multiple points at the same time? As a toll road user who has paid a high price, of course we hope that by using the toll road, the trip will be smooth.

    Source: Definitely Top Success in 2014 SD/MI Exams

    The main idea of ​​the second paragraph in the text is…..

    A. Number of damaged roads
    B. Direction of repaired roads
    C. Location of damaged roads
    D. Length of roads repaired

    Answer key: C

    Problem 4

    Fuel oil has a variety of uses. Motorcycles use pertalite fuel. Diesel-engined vehicles use diesel fuel. Airplanes use avtur as fuel. Housewives use kerosene as fuel for oil stoves.

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph is…..

    A. Use of fuel oil
    B. Various types of vehicles
    C. Household fuel
    D. Benefits of pertalite and kerosene

    Answer key: A

    Problem 5

    Traffic accidents on the highway are caused by various things. Many road users do not obey traffic rules. For example speeding, violating traffic signs, and wanting to win alone. In addition, many vehicles are not equipped with mirrors. If all road users obey the rules, traffic accidents can be reduced.

    The main idea of ​​the paragraph is…..

    A. Road traffic compliance
    B. Road traffic awareness
    C. Causes of road accidents
    D. Reducing road accidents

    Answer key: C

    That is a brief explanation of the meaning and how to determine the main idea in a paragraph. Sinaumed’s can also visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to obtain additional references on Indonesian writing skills. The following are recommendations for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to study them in full. Happy reading.

    Find other interesting things in www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    • What is the Main Thought? Functions, characteristics, and how to determine them
    • How to determine main ideas accompanied by examples of questions and answers
    • Examples of main ideas in paragraphs and how to define them
    • Main Idea: Definition, Characteristics, Functions, and How to Find Them
    • Understanding Main Thoughts: Functions, Types, and Examples

     

  • What is the intention of the male corpse prayer?

    The intention of praying for the body of a man – In Islam, prayer is a worship that must be carried out for Muslims. Whether it’s fard prayer or sunnah prayer, both of them will get a great reward from Allah SWT. Not infrequently, a Muslim will continue to remain silent in the mosque so as not to miss the prayer time and accompany it with dhikr. This prayer service is even still carried out until a Muslim dies. Yep, when a Muslim or Muslim woman dies, she will be prayed for as the last form of worship in her life.

    However, when it comes to reading the intentions and procedures, of course it is different between the bodies of men and women. So, what is the intention of the funeral prayer for men? What is the sequence of procedures for the male funeral prayer? What things should Muslims know about funeral prayers? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

    What is the intention of the male corpse prayer?

    Basically, this funeral prayer will be performed for Muslims who have died, both men and women. While those who pray are Muslims who are still alive with the legal status of fardhu kifayah. At the time of the Prophet Muhammad, he never wanted to pray for the bodies of those who died in debt or due to suicide, so that those who prayed would be his people or the general public.

    As with fardhu and obligatory prayers, this funeral prayer also requires intention which of course will have a difference between the bodies of men and women. So, here are the intentions of the male funeral prayer:

    (Ushollii ‘alaa haadzal mayyiti arba’a takbirootin fardhol kifaayati ma’muuman lillaahi ta’aalaa)

    Meaning: I intend to pray over this deceased four times takbir fardhu kifayah, as a makmum because of Allah Ta’ala.

    So, what if the body is an immature boy? Of course it has the intention of praying its own body. Almost the same as the intention for the male funeral prayer, it’s just that there are slightly different readings. So, here’s a reading of his intentions.

    (Ushollii ‘alaa haadzal mayyiti tafli arba’a takbirootin fardhol kifaayati ma’muuman lillaahi ta’aalaa)

    Meaning: I intend to pray over the body of this boy four times takbir fardhu kifayah, as a makmum because of Allah Ta’ala.

    Has Sinaumed’s ever thought why we have to perform the funeral prayer when the person being prayed for has already passed away? Yep, the main purpose of carrying out the funeral prayer there are 2 things, namely praying that the corpse will be forgiven for its sins so that the burden of tormenting the grave will also be reduced and praying for the corpse so that its dignity will be elevated in the afterlife. Even though he has died physically, his spirit will live in the afterlife which will happen to everyone who lives in this world.

    Sequence of Procedures for Men’s Bodily Prayer

    In carrying out the funeral prayer, there are several pillars that must be carried out so that the prayer becomes valid before Allah SWT. In the fiqh book by Sheikh Muhammad Nawawi al-Bantani, he briefly explains the pillars that must be carried out in the funeral prayer, namely there are 7 pillars.

    1. Intentions

    This intention will be pronounced depending on the identity of the corpse. If the corpse is of an adult male who has reached puberty, then the intention to read is the reading of the intention previously explained. This intention will be recited in the heart only and must be carried out simultaneously with the implementation of takbiratul ihram. It’s the same when we are doing fardhu prayers in congregation.

    2. Stand up for those who are able

    Yep, in the funeral prayer there are pillars in the form of having to do it standing up, especially for those who can afford it. This is because this funeral prayer is fardhu prayer, namely fardhu kifayah, so it must be done standing up. However, for those who are unable to stand due to certain circumstances, it may still be done by sitting. The provisions are the same as performing the five daily obligatory prayers in general.

    3. Takbiratul Ihram 4 Times

    During the funeral prayer, if takbiratul ihram is not performed 4 times, then the prayer becomes invalid. It is sunnah when reading this takbiratul ihram, our hands are raised at the level of the shoulders. Exactly the same when carrying out the five daily prayers.

    4. Reading Al-Fatihah After the First Takbir

    After pronouncing the first takbiratul ihram, then immediately read surah Al-Fatihah. It’s good when reading Al-Fatihah, just lower his voice. That is, the sound of his reading was still heard by himself, even though at that time the funeral prayer was held at night.

    It is also recommended that before reading surah Al-Fatihah, read ta’awwudz first (according to qaul ashah/strongest opinion). However, it is not sunnah to read the iftitah prayer, right… because the funeral prayer should be done in a nutshell.

    5. Reading the Prophet’s Salawat After the Second Takbir

    So, after the second takbiratul ihram, immediately recite the shalawat. The recitation of salawat which is sufficient for the validity of the funeral prayer is as follows:

    Meaning: O Allah, bestow mercy on the Prophet Muhammad.

    6. Reading the prayer for the body after the third Takbir

    There are many prayers for the corpse that can be recited after the third takbiratul ihram. If you want to be brief, it is enough in the form of: “Allahummagh firlahu warhamhu wa’aafihi wa’fu anhu ..”

    However, if you want a specific prayer for a corpse, then it can be,

    It means: “O Allah! Forgive him (the corpse) give mercy to him, save him (from some things that are not liked), forgive him and place him in a glorious place (Heaven), widen his grave, bathe him in snow and ice water. Cleanse him from all mistakes, as You clean a white shirt from dirt, give a better house than his house (in the world), give a better family (or wife in Heaven) than his family (in the world), wife (or husband) who is better than his wife (or husband), and put him in Heaven, protect him from the torments of the grave and Hell.”

    5. Read the Prayer Again After the Fourth Takbir

    The prayer in this order is for the body and those who pray for it, recited after the fourth takbiratul ihram. The prayer can be:

    It means:

    “O Allah, do not forbid our request for its virtue and do not allow us to be overwritten by slander after its absence and forgive us and him as well as our partners who were formerly believers and do not instill feelings of jealousy into our hearts towards those who believe. Our Lord, verily, You are gracious and merciful.”

    6. Greetings

    This greeting is done by turning to the right and left with the reading:

    Meaning: “May the safety, mercy, and blessings of Allah remain upon you all.”

    Things You Should Know About the Funeral Prayer

    All worship in Islam should not be done haphazardly. There are so many things that must be understood especially in this funeral prayer, starting from the pillars, the law of implementation, the virtues, to the position of the priest who leads the implementation.

    Law of the Corpse Prayer

    The law of carrying out the funeral prayer is basically Fardhu Kifayah. That is, if some Muslims do it, then other Muslims will be released from that responsibility. However, if there is no one to carry it out, then all Muslims in the region will bear the sin. This has been said by Allah to what is contained in QS. At-Tauba verse 84,

    Meaning: “… And do not you (Muhammad) pray for someone who dies among them (hypocrites), forever and do not you stand (pray) over his grave. Verily, they disbelieved in Allah and His Messenger and they died in a state of wickedness.”

    In this verse, it is clear that Allah SWT forbids Muslims to pray over the bodies of infidels. This shows that praying for believers is a law that has been prescribed. In addition, the implementation of the funeral prayer can also be done at any time and can be done by women. Even if there are several corpses that died simultaneously, it is also permissible to pray together.

    The Virtue of Performing the Funeral Prayer

    Carrying out the funeral prayer, of course, has its virtues, in accordance with the words of the Prophet Muhammad, who promised a great reward for those who pray for the body. In a hadith from Abu Hurairah ra, Rasulullah SAW once said,

    Meaning: “Who prays for the corpse, then returns home before being buried, he returns with the reward of one qirath.” (Narrated by Bukhari 47)

    The main objective of the funeral prayer is to pray for good and ask for forgiveness for the sins that the corpse has committed during its lifetime. That is why, it is recommended to increase the number of people participating in the funeral prayer. The more people who participate in the funeral prayer, the greater the chance that the prayer will be answered by Allah SWT. This was also expressed by Rasulullah SAW, he said that,

    Meaning: “If there is a dead person who is prayed for by 100 Muslims, and all of them intercede (pray for good) for the body, then their prayer will be granted.” (Narrated by Muslim 947)

    Moreover, if the people who participate in the funeral prayer are good believers, who always believe in the monotheism of Allah SWT in all their worship, then of course their prayers will have a better chance of being accepted. This was disclosed from Ibn Abbas ra that the Prophet Muhammad SAW once said,

    Meaning: “If a Muslim dies and is then prayed over by 40 people, for whom they do not associate anything with Allah, then Allah will grant their intercession.” (Narrated by Muslim 948).

    The pillars of the funeral prayer

    Basically, the pillars of the funeral prayer are the same as the procedures for carrying out the funeral prayer, yes… namely in the form of,

    1. Intention
    2. Stand up for those who can
    3. Read takbiratul ihram four times
    4. Read Al-Fatihah after the first takbiratul ihram
    5. Read blessings on the Prophet Muhammad SAW after the second takbiratul ihram
    6. Read a prayer for the corpse after the third takbiratul ihram
    7. Read prayers for the bodies and those who pray for them after the fourth takbiratul ihram
    8. Read greetings to the right and to the left

    The position of the Imam in carrying out the funeral prayer

    Actually, there are 2 opinions regarding the position of the priest in carrying out this funeral prayer.

    1. Al-Hanafiyah: Chest of the Corpse

    In this opinion, it is revealed that the position of the priest must be right at the chest of the corpse, without distinguishing between male and female corpses. This is because the chest is the place of the priest. This intercession has been narrated by Ibn Masud ra.

    2. Al-Malikiyah

    Meanwhile, this opinion differentiates the position of the priest based on the gender of the corpse to be prayed over. On a male corpse, the position of the priest will be standing in the middle of the corpse. Meanwhile, if it is a woman’s corpse, then the position of the priest will be standing at the shoulder area of ​​the corpse.’=

    Source:

    Sarwat, Ahmad. (2018). Fiqh of the Body Prayer . South Jakarta: Fiqh Publishing House.

    Also Read!

    • Procedure for the Implementation of the Funeral Prayer
    • Definition of the Book of Safinatun Najah and its contents
    • Reading the Verse of the Chair and 12 of its Virtues in Life
    • The Best Hours For Midnight Prayers
    • The Virtue of Surah Al-Ikhlas for Life
    • Prayer List For People Who Have Died
    • The Meaning and Benefits of Grave Pilgrimage
    • Translations, Virtue and Acts of Surah Al-Lahab
    • 6 Legal Requirements for the Implementation of Friday Prayers
    • 5 Prayers For Mothers Who Have Passed Away
  • What is the function of the intercooler in a car, how it works, and how to treat it!

    What is the function of the intercooler in a car, how it works, and how to treat it!

    Intercooler Function – After we previously provided information about the function of a turbocharger engine in a four-wheeled diesel engine, the information that we will provide further in this discussion is to discuss other components, namely, the intercooler .

    In general, the turbo intercooler is known as a car component whose function is to cool the air released by the turbo engine. The air at the turbo inlet is maximally cooled in the form of a radiator which is equipped with a cooling grid. Therefore, this component is usually placed on the front of the car which is exposed to the wind directly from the front.

    An intercooler is a tool or component that is similar to a car radiator but has a different function. If the radiator must cool the water, the inter-radiator itself is responsible for cooling the air produced by the turbo engine before entering the combustion chamber.

    For those of you, especially Sinaumed’s friends, who want to know more about the meaning of an intercooler and want to know its functions and how it works on a machine, in this discussion we have summarized information related to the intercooler here.

    Furthermore, we have summarized the discussion and can be listened to below!

    What is an Intercooler?

    An intercooler is a mechanical device used to cool fluids, including liquids and gases, between stages of a multi-phase heating process, usually a heat exchanger that removes waste heat in a gas compressor. Used in a wide range of applications including air compressors, air conditioners, refrigerators, gas turbines, passenger car engines, trucks, buses, etc.

    Widely recognized in the automotive world as an air-to-air or air-to-liquid (turbocharger or supercharger) induced intercooler in internal combustion engines to increase their volumetric efficiency by increasing the charge density of the incoming air to close to isobaric cooling density.

    The intercooler increases the efficiency of the intake system by reducing the intake heat generated by the supercharger or turbocharger and promotes more thorough combustion. This removes the heat of compression (i.e. increase in temperature) that occurs when increasing pressure or increasing unit mass (density) in any gas.

    Turbochargers and superchargers are designed to push more air mass into the intake manifold and engine combustion chamber. Intercooling is a method used to compensate for heating due to compression, which is a natural by-product of the semi-adiabatic compression process. An increase in barometric pressure can cause the intake port to overheat, which greatly reduces compression efficiency due to reduced density. An increase in intake temperature can also increase the temperature of the combustion cylinders, causing explosions or thermal damage to the engine block.

    Turbocharger (turbo) is an additional component that increases engine power without increasing the engine cylinder capacity (cc). The turbo uses the torque generated by the exhaust gases to add air into the cylinder.

    There, when the turbo kicks in, the air pressure rises, and so does the temperature. This heating of the intake air is bad for the engine. First, raise the temperature of the combustion chamber. Second, heat causes the air to expand, so that the density of air decreases. Coolant is needed here as a counterweight. The intercooler is a heat exchanger, like a radiator, but not for cooling the engine coolant, but for cooling the air that passes through it. Lowering the intake temperature has two advantages: a lower combustion chamber temperature and a higher air density, which allows more air to enter the cylinder.

    Intercooler function

    The Turbo Intercooler is actually placed in front of the engine, not just for display or to make it look cool, but actually has quite an important function.

    As is known, the air drawn in and pushed out by the turbo turbine produces a higher air temperature.

    The intercooler plays an important role in boosting the turbo system’s combustion process, which increases engine power. The turbo-intercooler’s job is to reduce the temperature of hot air before it reaches the engine’s combustion chamber. Intercoolers usually have aluminum material where this material can conduct heat faster than ordinary iron.

    In colder weather, it definitely has a positive effect on the engine. The more air molecules that enter the engine, the better the car’s performance. One of the Hyundai cars, NEW SANTA FE, is equipped with variable geometry turbo (VGT) technology. In VGT, the turbine has a shape that can change depending on the amount of air passing through it. In this way, turbo lag is reduced and turbo power is also maintained.

    Thanks to these components, you can feel wild engine power, but still optimal in turbocharged cars. With combined intercooler Intercooler cools the air leaving the turbo to operate. The intercooler cools the hot air coming from the turbo so that cooler air can enter the engine room.

    Without the air intercooler it gets hot so it’s not perfect, performance doesn’t increase much either. This intercooler works according to the principles of thermodynamics. Convection and induction occur inside the intercooler, transferring heat from the movement of the fluid. The intercooler structure itself consists of tubes with fins between them for cooling.

    How Do Intercoolers Work?

    The intercooler works as a function that cools the air released by the car’s turbo. The air released by the hot turbo is cooled by this radiator so that the air entering the engine room is cooled by passing through this radiator. This way of working itself works by applying the principles of thermodynamics. Convection and induction exist in heat transfer caused by a moving fluid. The shape of the radiator itself is made of tubes and has fins to cool the car faster.

    Like a car radiator, the location of the intercooler is in front of and under the car. The cooling arrangement in this section is designed so that the cabin air is cooled by air when the car is moving. Not all or all repair shops can service this radiator for this intercooler service.

    Turbo intercoolers work by compressing and increasing the density of air before it reaches the engine cylinders. By pushing more air into each cylinder, the engine can burn proportionately more fuel.

    This compression process generates heat and increases the temperature of the air entering the engine. Unfortunately, as the air heats up, its density also changes, reducing the amount of oxygen available to each cylinder and affecting performance. The intercooler prevents this process by cooling the air so that the engine gets more oxygen.

    According to the operation of the diesel engine, the turbo-intercooler also follows the principle of thermodynamics. Convection and induction occur inside the intercooler, transferring heat from the movement of the fluid. The intercooler structure itself consists of tubes with fins between them for cooling. The position of the intercooler is in front of the base, like the radiator. The intercooler is cooled by air while the vehicle is running.

    Because the role of the turbo intercooler is very important in the car, it is very important for you to carry out routine maintenance yourself at home. All you need to do is check the connecting pipe between the turbo pipe and the intercooler. Because high air pressure can cause leaks at the intercooler joints.

    Actually, the operation of the intercooler is very simple, namely to cool the compressed air produced by the turbo engine, which is initially hot (high) and then directs it to the intercooler network. In addition, the air flowing inside the grill is cooled by the wind passing through the intercooler grill.

    So that the initially hot air becomes cold, causing the cooled air particles to condense, so that when the air is fed into the combustion chamber, the resulting compression is much greater than the air from a turbo engine which is not cooled by an intercooler.

    High engine compression increases the power produced, so fuel economy also increases and car engines produce less polluting gases, because high compression makes the combustion process more complete, namely. no fuel left. burning because the oxygen needs of the engine combustion process are met.

    Intercooler Location

    The location of the intercooler in the car must be in a place where free air can easily pass and usually in two different places. First, the intercooler is placed behind the front bumper of the vehicle, parallel to the grille or air conditioner. capacitors, radiator grille and right in front of the intercooler grille.

    The second place is located directly behind the hood or above the car engine, for example in the Toyota Fortuner or Toyota Hilux Double cab. In these two positions, the top of the machine is easier to clean.

    Maintenance of this intercooler is quite simple because you only need to clean the intercooler grid from any adhering dirt such as dust, leaves or plastic debris that may be attached to maximize performance.

    How to Clean the Intercooler

    There are several reasons why a turbo intercooler needs to be cleaned. Over time, the vehicle’s mileage also increases, passing through various types of dirt that is dusty, highly polluted, and others.

    Extreme weather and climate conditions also affect the condition and performance of this turbo intercooler. Turbo intercoolers on vehicles that are not good can affect engine performance because they can get clogged with dirt which then causes the engine to heat up quickly. The combustion system becomes imperfect. Fuel consumption is not proportional to the power generated.

    If this continues, the spare parts for portable engine parts will wear out, or we as the vehicle owner will bear the cost of repairing the machine, as well as damage to the truck, of course, this will affect your income, which will decrease.

    One way to fix this is to clean the turbo intercooler. But the problem is that many of us don’t know how to deal with a dirty turbo intercooler. Usually you take the car to a repair shop, which of course costs money.

    To clean the intercooler, you don’t need to use strange steps, you just need to use the wind pressure that is put into the intercooler so that all dirt and dust can be cleaned. What’s more important is that you have to pay attention to when it’s time to carry out periodic servicing of your four-wheeled vehicle so that it is maintained and the engine performance is maintained.

    Another way to clean the intercooler is to remove the intercooler in its place, especially if there are other problems with the turbo engine. This intercooler can be placed in the highest place (above the engine) or behind the front bumper. Actually, anywhere where the position of the intercooler will not affect the performance of the car’s engine, only when it is installed on the front bumper, it will get dirty faster because it is exposed to road dirt and flying dust. If this happens and the intercooler becomes dirty, it will interfere with engine performance and the engine will not work optimally.

    How to clean the intercooler that is installed on the front of the front bumper will be more difficult because it requires extra effort. But it can be overcome by using wind pressure and using soap to make it cleaner. If you see rocks or insects getting into the interior of the intercooler, you can fix this by manually picking it up using a puncture or anything that can reach where the dirt is.

    If it still can’t be cleaned manually the only way is to remove the front bumper and clean the intercooler afterwards. However, this method will take a long time and be inconvenient, so you need to take it to a repair shop to ask for help from a more professional person.

    How to clean the intercooler that is mounted above the engine hood will usually be easier because its position is easier to reach. The only thing that needs to be done is to clean the intercooler cover only and then clean it with the help of a damp cloth. And, don’t forget to also clean the scoop part which becomes the water cavity or can be cleaned by removing the engine cover by opening the clip holder.

    In this method, you don’t need water to clean the intercooler, you only need enough wind pressure to clean the remaining dirt, rocks, dust, and other debris that is in your car’s engine intercooler. And, it should be noted that do not use high water pressure so that the wing intercooler is not damaged.

    Another Way to Clean the Intercooler Using Cleaning Liquid

    • Place the suction tube in the cleaning bottle.
    • Place the insert button
    • Choose the appropriate tube size so that we can reach the gaps or parts around the turbo intercooler for maximum reach.
    • When the cleaning liquid has run out, let stand for half an hour then wash.

    After cleaning the turbo intercooler, heat circulation inside the vehicle becomes optimal and the engine operating temperature is normal, thereby saving time and effort. This is one way to thoroughly clean the turbo intercooler using a special cleaning fluid. Using such liquids saves time and effort in cleaning and can reach those hard to reach places.

    Conclusion

    That’s all for a brief discussion of what an intercooler is, its functions, benefits, and how it works. Not only knowing what an intercooler is, but also discussing functions, benefits, how it works and how to properly maintain it so that the engine is maintained.

    Knowing what an intercooler is for automotive enthusiasts is very useful to find out how the intercooler works on their four-wheeled vehicles, whether it is necessary to install it and benefit from installing the intercooler. Installing an intercooler in your car’s engine has a positive impact so that your car’s engine does not heat up quickly and can work optimally.

  • What is the definition of an SUV? Characteristics, Types, and Advantages!

    What is the definition of an SUV? Characteristics, Types, and Advantages!

    Understanding SUV Cars – For automotive enthusiasts, of course they have their own assessment of whether or not an automotive product is good, be it a two-wheeled vehicle or a four-wheeled vehicle, and so on. They are automotive enthusiasts who certainly demand the automotive industry to increasingly provide the best quality of their products.

    In this case, four-wheeled vehicles are increasingly needed considering that people’s daily activities require good and durable private vehicles to be used in their various daily activities.

    The presence of an SUV type car is a solution for consumers who want to have a family car that has a cool design but also has good quality for traveling to remote places and poor road access.

    The SUV type itself is a combination of passenger and off-road types. Therefore, an SUV is not only suitable for driving on urban roads, but also durable on rough terrain, such as rocky roads. The features of an SUV include the presence of a spare tire at the rear of the car and the use of a four WD (Four Wheels Drive) system.

    The WD drive system is equipped with all of the SUV’s wheels that can operate autonomously so the SUV can tackle even the most difficult terrain. This is what distinguishes an SUV from an MPV in terms of strength.

    Jeeps are a type of SUV type car designed to traverse all terrain, jeeps have a higher ground clearance and larger tires than MPV cars and usually only have 2 rows of seats or seat only 5 passengers, although currently there are cars with 7 seats.

    In terms of engine capacity, the engine capacity of this car is more than 1500 cc which allows this car to pass through some quite heavy roads.

    However, do you know what is meant by the SUV itself? If you want to find out more about SUVs, in this discussion, we have reviewed information about SUVs, complete with their functions, types, and advantages and disadvantages.

    Furthermore, the discussion has been presented and can be listened to below!

    What is an SUV Car?

    Sport Utility Vehicle (Indonesian: Sport utility vehicle), abbreviated SUV or nicknamed Bemo, is a classification of passenger cars, but built on a light truck body. In Indonesia, this type of car is often called a “jeep car”. In fact, Jeep is the first American SUV brand in the world, namely “Jeep”.

    In general, cars classified as SUVs are equipped with wheel drive (4×4), so they can be used for off-roading. However, many SUVs in Indonesia are not equipped with four-wheel drive (4×4). SUV brands equipped with all-moving tires (4×4) include the Toyota Land Cruiser, Jeep Wrangler, several versions of the Toyota Fortuner and Mitsubishi Pajero Sport, etc.

    A distinctive feature of an SUV is that it usually has a spare tire at the rear and has a high ground clearance. The term SUV, by definition, is synonymous with multi-car, a vehicle characterized by large bodies and very powerful engines.

    The design of this SUV itself is also generally sportier, with solid body curves that give the impression of hardiness and durability when driving on off-road and urban streets.

    Meanwhile, the engine capacity is more than 1500 cc with medium displacement, wide trunk, more complete comfort features than MPV and sturdy suspension that dampens vibrations to the maximum when driving on steep and bumpy roads.

    Of course, fully supported by fierce specifications, the price of this SUV is considered much higher than the MPV. It can even reach billions of rupiah.

    SUV Car Characteristics

    1. Strong Chassis Based on the SUV concept

    As a durable vehicle, the chassis used by this SUV is of course also very strong.

    Integrated into the ladder chassis and monocoque combination, allowing it to withstand maximum loads while maintaining the taller hull appearance. SUVs usually have a one-size-fits-all chassis and suspension. Also, some types, such as those that support off-road driving, tend to have stiffer axles that improve off-road capability.

    2.Ground clearance

    Conversely, the ground clearance or the lowest distance of an SUV is also on average higher than that of an MPV, which usually reaches 210 mm in height. This is of course a support so that the bottom of this car is safer when driving in mountainous or rural terrain that is steep and rocky.

    3. Large Diameter Tires

    Also, SUVs usually have tire diameters of 15-17 inches or more. In addition, the wheels of SUVs are usually covered with high-profile tires, which makes them durable and have a stronger grip. Ideal for target terrain when traveling on rough terrain or off-road.

    4. Relatively large body dimensions

    As a car that gives an agile impression, the body dimensions of this jeep are naturally designed with long, thick, large and masculine.

    This is certainly the hallmark of an SUV as a sports vehicle that gives the impression that it is ready to hit various road surfaces that it drives.

    In fact, the size of the body provides a much more optimal balance, which is not easy to balance when driving at high speeds.

    5. Big Fender

    The next SUV has a face with a large and dignified fender.

    The use of such a large fender certainly makes the visual image of this SUV even taller and more striking.

    6. Spacious Cabin and Tough Suspension

    Tough cars, including SUVs, are said to have a spacious and flexible passenger space to ensure comfort for their passengers.

    In fact, don’t forget that the suspension it uses is also very hard, and the relatively high shock absorption ensures maximum stability.

    Types of SUVs

    1. Compact SUVs

    Compact SUVs are commonly known as low SUVs or mini SUVs. In general, the dimensions and power are relatively smaller than other types of SUVs.

    Cars equipped with this type of compact SUV are usually designed for everyday use on city streets. Some of the cars included in this type are Daihatsu Terios, Nissan Juke, Toyota Rush, Ford Ecosport and Honda HV-R.

    2. Medium SUVs

    Medium SUV engine dimensions and power are usually larger than compact SUVs. Its rather large dimensions make the car’s interior much more comfortable and seem lighter. Several medium-size SUVs include the Nissan X-Trail, Mitsubishi Pajero, Mazda CX-5 and Toyota Fortuner.

    3. Luxury SUVs

    Enter the third type of SUV, namely the luxury SUV. This type prioritizes the beauty of car design, the latest technology and passenger comfort. Brands in the luxury SUV category include Range Rover Sport, Land Rover Discovery, Porsche Cayenne and Audi Q7.

    4. Full-size SUV

    The last type is the full-size SUV, or what is commonly called the “true SUV”. This type of full size SUV has high power and a very economical engine that requires a lot of fuel consumption. Some of the cars that fall into the full-size SUV category include the Toyota Sequoia, Nissan Armada, GMC Yukon, and Chevrolet Suburban.

    Main Functions of SUV Cars

    The main task of this type of car is to transport various types of terrain. From the smooth streets of the capital to steep and difficult roads. So do not be surprised if this car is usually used for various purposes. Or as a family car or SUV.

    Another interesting function of this car is as a tow truck. So if you have a friend whose car is damaged, you can bring him along with the Daihatsu SUV.

    If you want to use your SUV as a crane, you have to be a little careful. Especially if you want corners. Take extra care when driving. If you rush, you will cause the towed car to overturn and crash.

    Advantages of SUVs

    SUV type car has many advantages beyond its kind. Some of them are as follows:

    1. Can move in various types of terrain

    This is the main advantage of an SUV. From the start, SUVs were designed to drive on various types of terrain. From smooth roads, potholes, inclines, steep and rocky. Suitable for road conditions in Indonesia which are not completely flat.

    2. Able to transport passengers comfortably

    Apart from being difficult on different terrains, SUVs also make passengers comfortable when the car is moving. It is indistinguishable from a car seat designed in this way. So do not be surprised if this car is usually used as a family car.

    3. Holds a lot of stuff

    The advantage of this SUV also lies in its large trunk. This allows friends to transport goods in large quantities. However, you still need to be careful when storing goods in the SUV.

    It is advisable to store things right in the SUV garage. If necessary, tie the objects with string. This is done so that the object does not jump when the car brakes suddenly.

    One type of car that is currently popular is the Sport Utility Vehicle. This car is like an off-roader, but with a sporty accent. This car can be an option for friends who want to buy a special family car or a car that drives on difficult roads.

    Lack of SUVs

    Every car is designed for different needs and driving styles, so no car is perfect, including SUVs. However, there are some drawbacks that need to be considered even if you want to recommend an SUV. Here are some of the disadvantages of SUVs that you should know about.

    1. Adjusting Car Dimensions

    The large dimensions of an SUV can indeed be an advantage, but it can also be a disadvantage for those who are not used to driving it. You will need some adjustments when driving the Jeep to get used to riding the larger frame.

    Big cars can also be a problem for city drivers. This is because cars cannot move freely on the streets of the capital, for example, during traffic jams. For those who are used to driving a compact car, it will definitely take longer to get used to it.

    2. No Fuel Efficient

    SUVs usually have high-powered engines that support the car’s efficiency when facing various road challenges. However, the large engine capacity makes fuel consumption more extravagant.

    Fuel consumption is an important aspect when choosing a car, so that refueling the vehicle does not become a burden in the future, so that the car remains little used and neglected.

    Tips for Buying an SUV

    If you are confused and want to know more about what to pay attention to when buying the latest SUV, here are some tips for choosing the best SUV so you don’t lose out.

    1. Find out the intended use

    In fact, when choosing a car, the most important thing is knowing the needs or purpose of using the car purchased. Not only limited to the type of car you need, but more on the SUV you will buy, what you will use it for later. These needs will later become the basis when you choose the size of the SUV, what features it has, how much power and at what price.

    The SUV you want to use every day is different from the SUV you want to use for mountains and rough terrain. Buying a large-powered and not fuel-efficient SUV for rough terrain is very counterproductive if it is used for daily mobility needs in the city.

    2. Find the Right SUV Size

    SUVs generally come in three categories: compact, mid-size, and full-size. True to their size, each serves its own purpose for the best possible use. If the size does not meet your usage needs, it is obviously not comfortable to wear.

    For example, a compact SUV is suitable for everyday transportation. The operating system and available features are generally not too complicated, one might even say simple. Many call it a compact SUV because of its sporty nature, but it is more suitable for city driving, asphalt or less extreme terrain. If you want a passenger car, you can choose a 7-seater SUV. It’s different with mid-size and full-size SUVs. These two categories are usually large and strong to support heavy off-road terrain.

    3. Pay attention to the characteristics

    When choosing the best SUV, you must also pay attention to the characteristics of the SUV. Generally, the items offered are comparable to the variants and prices. However, each version has standard feature benchmarks.

    When choosing the best SUV, you can easily look for one with the most complete features. Notable features include ride comfort and safety features. Driving comfort features make you feel at home in the middle of a trip, while safety features help minimize the possibility of an accident.

    4. Choose the right machine

    When choosing an SUV, the most powerful engine is not always synonymous with the best SUV. Engine capacity is closely related to fuel and maintenance costs. High-powered engines require a lot of fuel, maintenance costs are even higher. Again, you have to adapt to your needs.

    If your needs are limited to daily city traffic and the occasional out-of-town escape, a mid-size or compact SUV will likely suffice. In general, these two versions only use the engine or 6 cylinders. Full-size SUVs usually have 8 cylinders. Cylinder engines are slightly less expensive to maintain than engines with large cylinders.

    5. Compare car prices based on all aspects

    The most expensive is not necessarily the best. The high price of a car could be due to the quality, features or popularity of the brand. Therefore, choosing an SUV that fits your budget is the best way. You don’t have to force yourself to buy an expensive car just because it’s a well-known brand. Many well-known brands have the same qualities as less well-known brands or even new brands.

    First, pay close attention to the four points above, then compare the type of SUV that you are interested in. Check one by one whether the price offered is good enough or too expensive. Remember that cheaper doesn’t always mean lower quality.

    Conclusion

    That’s all for a brief discussion of what an SUV is: Characteristics, types, and their advantages and disadvantages. Not only knowing what an SUV is, but also discussing the advantages, disadvantages, tips for buying it and knowing the types of cars on the market.

    Knowing what an SUV is for automotive lovers is very useful in knowing the right type of four-wheeled vehicle to become a family car at a low price and suitable for use on rough terrain when you want to travel far.

  • What is the definition of an NGO? Check out the Functions, Characteristics, and Purpose

    What is the definition of an NGO? Check out the Functions, Characteristics, and Purpose

    Understanding NGOs – In a community that wants to help the economy of the middle to lower class or become a forum for anyone who wants to channel their activities to creative ideas that are family-friendly, we will know what an NGO is, namely a Non-Governmental Organization.

    The existence of NGOs also helps when a disaster occurs, whether it befalls their members or the general public who need help. NGO itself is a non-governmental organization established with the intention of obtaining benefits from the activities they carry out together.

    NGOs also participated in voicing a number of social issues or their criticism of the government or any institution. For this reason, it is very important for Sinaumed’s friends to know what an NGO is and its functions, characteristics, types and purposes which can be additional insight for Sinaumed’s friends at home.

    You can see further discussion about the meaning of NGOs below!

    Definition of NGO

    Non-Governmental Organizations can be interpreted as organizations/institutions established by members of the public who are citizens of the Republic of Indonesia, voluntarily on their own accord and with full interest, and participate in certain activities determined by the organization/institution as a form of community participation to increase standard of living and social welfare, with an emphasis on self-help.

    It should be noted that NGOs are also organizations founded by individuals or groups of people who provide services to the community voluntarily and without profit. Therefore, the formation of this NGO is based on voluntary work without the hope of getting big profits.

    NGOs work not only voluntarily, but also based on Pancasila principles. This is of course because Indonesia is the home and development of NGOs that support Pancasila. Of course, the Pancasila precepts are always applied in all activities of non-governmental organizations in the life of society, nation and state.

    In society, non-governmental organizations/organizations have grown and developed as a gathering place for Indonesian citizens who become volunteers or are declared non-governmental organizations. The term non-governmental organizations was first recognized in Law Number 4 of 1982 concerning

    Main Provisions for Environmental Management and related to environmental issues.

    After that, NGOs have areas of action in their development that are not limited to the environment but include other areas of interest to improve living standards and social welfare both mentally and physically.

    On the one hand, the existence and freedom of participation and development for the benefit of society and the state requires a conducive climate that encourages enthusiasm, creativity and community dynamics in all fields, so that non-governmental organizations can develop independently and voluntarily. Therefore, NGOs should be promoted as government partners who provide guidance, protection and encouragement.

    Non-governmental organizations which are commonly abbreviated as non-governmental organizations are also referred to as non-governmental organizations (NGOs) in Indonesia. Internationally, this institution is referred to as a non-governmental organization (NGO). According to a 1998 UN report, there are 29,000 international non-governmental organizations, most of which were founded in the last 30 years. The existence of non-governmental organizations has its own history and background, depending on the form of the institution.

    NGO function

    Based on Regional Regulation no. 13 of 2006 concerning Communities and Community Institutions states that “The definition of Community Empowerment Institutions, hereinafter abbreviated as (LPM) is an institution, organization or forum formed on the initiative of the community as a partner of the district government in fulfilling and realizing community aspirations and needs in the field of development.

    Before it was called the Community Empowerment Institute, it used to be called the Village Community Rehabilitation Institute (LKMD). The main objective of the establishment of this organization is to strengthen community initiatives and self-help in implementing participatory development programs. In this case, community participation developed through LPPM includes planning and monitoring of development implementation at the sub-district level.

    1. Duties and functions of community empowerment institutions

    According to the Regulation of the Minister of Home Affairs Number 5 of 2007 concerning Guidelines for the Arrangement of Social Institutions, it is clearly stated that the function of village community empowerment institutions as referred to in Article 2 paragraph (1) is their responsibility. to assist the Lurah in community and community development and empowerment work. The Community Empowerment Agency to carry out the functions referred to in Article 3 paragraph (1) and paragraph (2) has the following duties and functions:

    • MISSION OF NON-governmental Organizations
    • Develop participatory development plans.
    • Mobilize community support.
    • Development implementation and management

    Next, Bastian summarizes Ismail Haddad’s comments on the role of NGOs according to their functions, namely:

    2. Provide motivation

    The function of NGOs is to motivate, explore potential, develop and expand people’s awareness of the problems they face and their environment;

    3. As a Communicator

    The function of NGOs is also to act as a communicator, observing, recording and channeling the aspirations and needs of the community to be used as a reference in the process of formulating policies and planning development programs as well as monitoring the development process.

    Carry out community development policies and programs, and explain to the community about development programs in a language that the community can understand, and establish partnerships between NGOs that have the same interests and goals;

    4. Strategy and Innovation Developer

    As a developer of various strategies and innovations, as well as managing an organization that is not well known in the community;

    5. As a Facilitator

    Acting as a facilitator, namely providing various technical assistance in program implementation, such as funding, working capital, equipment, etc., according to the needs of the community.

    NGO Characteristics

    In order to get to know these NGOs well, it is first necessary to know the characteristics of these NGOs. So, here are the characteristics of an NGO that you need to know.

    • NGOs are not government, bureaucratic or state organizations.
    • Not all activities organized by NGOs are aimed at achieving certain benefits.
    • All activities and activities organized by NGOs are solely for the benefit of the community and not for the personal interests of NGO members.
    • The legal basis is in Law no. 16 of 2001 on the basis.

    Objectives NGO Established

    NGOs promote their cause by carrying out activities such as advocacy and voicing issues. For example, they lobby and persuade the public to pay more attention to the issues they are trying to address, such as gender inequality and wildlife protection. On the other hand, they also try to persuade, request or pressure the government to act on the issues they raise.

    As well as advocacy and awareness raising, they can also provide services such as legal aid and counseling to assist those in legal, economic or social difficulties. They can also provide microfinance or help lift households out of poverty by encouraging them to become small entrepreneurs.

    Although independent from the government, some NGO work can also support government efforts, for example related to development, education, health and humanitarian programs. In addition, they help the government successfully implement these programs, at least by providing constructive criticism.

    John Clark describes the characteristics of NGOs in terms of realizing their goals as follows:

    • Serving the needy and poor groups
    • Encouraging open public participation in the policy implementation process
    • Develop useful initiatives and solve problems. Sometimes these innovations raise objections to government policies.
    • Implementation programs are small in scale to make it easier to track and measure precise results and objectives.
    • There is high employee engagement when they carry broad values ​​and beliefs about the social change mission.

    Kinds of NGOs

    NGOs cover a wide range of activities. So there are several types. But, what is certain is that they are independent from the government.

    1. Blood donation organization

    Non-governmental blood donation organizations are non-governmental organizations whose aim is to provide financial and proportionate support related to donating blood to others. Examples of these NGOs are: PMI

    2. Professional organization

    An NGO in the form of a professional organization is a non-governmental organization that carries out activities based on skills and expertise in certain fields, such as the health sector, the press and legal aid.

    3. Opposition organizations

    Opposition NGOs are NGOs that carry out activities by choosing to balance government policies, for example by providing criticism, suggestions, and involvement related to monitoring the continuity of the government.

    Types of NGOs can be classified according to their directions:

    • Charity – for example, helping or meeting the needs of the less fortunate with little or no active involvement.
    • Empowerment – ​​for example, helping the poor by actively pulling them out of poverty through designed programs, such as developing home businesses.
    • Services – providing essential public services such as health care and education.

    Another classification based on the field of activity, can be based on:

    • Community – serves a specific population within a narrow geographic area of ​​a country.
    • National – operate and provide services with national coverage.
    • International – operate internationally, cover more than one country, usually based in developed countries.

    Then, depending on the objective, the NGO can:

    • NGO Advocacy – aims to influence policy or practice to defend or promote a particular cause.
    • Active non-governmental organization – aims to design and implement projects to provide services.

    What is an international NGO?

    International Non-Governmental Organizations (INGOs) are non-governmental organizations that have an international scope.

    They are not formed by agreements between governments like other international bodies such as the International Labor Organization (ILO). The following are examples of international NGOs:

    • Junior Achievement – ​​focuses on education by equipping students with academic programs related to financial literacy, entrepreneurship and work readiness.
    • Human Rights Watch – conducts human rights research and advocacy, and urges all parties to respect human rights by pressuring governments, businesses and policy makers to condemn human rights abuses.
    • Amnesty International – an international human rights NGO and advocate for the rights of women, children, minorities and indigenous peoples; End torture, abolish death penalty and refugee rights. The main target is the government.
    • Greenpeace – an international NGO specializing in environmental issues. It advocates for environmental issues and develops solutions for Earth’s sustainability, including voices on climate change, biodiversity, eco-friendly economic activities, and quantity of renewable energy.

    NGO example

    To perfect your knowledge of NGOs, it’s a good idea to listen to some examples of NGOs, including the following.

    1. YLBHI

    The first example of an NGO is YLBHI which stands for Legal Aid Indonesia which is an NGO that provides legal assistance to people in need.

    2. Contrast

    Kontras or the Commission for Disappearances and Victims of Violence is a non-governmental organization that helps victims of violence and those who are considered missing.

    3. Elsam

    Elsam or the Community Research and Advocacy Institute is a non-governmental organization that provides advocacy and related research support to people in need.

    4. PBHI

    PBHI or the Indonesian Association of Legal Aid and Human Rights is one example of an NGO in Indonesia that focuses on providing legal assistance to people who have experienced violence or have been victims of violence, some crimes.

    Information about NGOs or non-governmental organizations can provide insight and knowledge for those of you, especially those who are looking for all information about NGOs

    NGO Funding Sources

    Donations are generally the main source of funding for NGOs. Other sources are membership fees or sales of goods and services. Donors can come from charities, private non-profit organizations, local organizations, international organizations and private donations. The latter usually represent a significant portion of NGO funding.

    However, although they are called NGOs, i.e. independent from the government, some NGOs also depend on government grants, such as Oxfam, an NGO that works to reduce equality of grievances to end poverty and injustice.

    As not-for-profit organizations, NGOs rely on a variety of funding sources, including:

    • Membership fee
    • Personal Contribution
    • selling goods and services
    • allowance

    Although independent from the government, some NGOs rely heavily on public funding. Some large NGOs may have multi-million or billion-dollar budgets. On the other hand, start-up NGOs will have very little funding.

    How Important is the Role of NGOs?

    Why are there so many NGOs? As the world becomes more global and technology makes communication easier, more and more people are becoming aware of issues affecting others.

    At the same time, people are losing faith in government institutions and their ability to meet people’s needs, both at home and around the world. More NGOs is a natural result. There are tens of thousands of NGOs operating today, but are they really helping? A number of NGOs have certainly received negative press in recent years, challenging the idea that these organizations have better aims.

    But overall, it appears that NGOs are making a big positive difference. While not perfect, NGOs are very important and vehicles for positive change.

    Conclusion

    This is a brief discussion of the definition of an NGO. The discussion this time does not only discuss the definition of an NGO, but also discusses further how the functions, characteristics, types, and examples of these NGOs can be studied carefully.

    Understanding the meaning of NGOs gives us additional knowledge about the various social institutions that exist in society in Indonesia as well as on an international scale which have a positive purpose and can help people without discrimination or looking at the existing social strata.

  • What is the Definition and Duties of Business Development in the Company?

    What is the Definition and Duties of Business Development in the Company?

    Definition of Business Development – Business or commerce is the activity of trading goods or services with the aim of making a profit. In economics, a business is an organization that sells goods or services to consumers or other businesses, for a profit. Historically the word business came from English business, from the word busy which means “busy” in the context of individuals, communities or society. In a sense, busy doing activities and work that brings profit.

    In a capitalist economy, where most businesses are privately owned, businesses are formed to earn profits and increase the wealth of their owners. The owners and operators of a business are rewarded according to the time, effort or capital they provide. However, not all businesses pursue profits like this, for example cooperative businesses that aim to improve the welfare of all its members or government institutions that aim to improve people’s welfare. This business model contrasts with socialistic systems, where large businesses are mostly owned by the government, the general public, or unions.

    Etymologically, business means a situation where a person or group of people are busy doing work that generates profits. The word “business” itself has three usages, depending on the scope — the singular use of the word business can refer to a business entity, namely a juridical (legal), technical, and economic entity that aims to make a profit or profit. Broader usage could refer to a specific market sector, for example the “television business”. The broadest use refers to all the activities carried out by the community providing goods and services. But the exact definition of “business” is still a matter of debate today.

    Basic Forms of Business Ownership

    While the forms of business ownership vary from country to country, there are several forms that are considered common:

    1. Sole Proprietorship

    A sole proprietorship is a business owned by one person. Owners of sole proprietorships have unlimited liability for company assets. This company is managed individually and has full responsibility for the continuity of the company and its capital comes from its own. Usually individual companies have advantages and disadvantages.

    2. Fellowship

    A partnership is a form of business in which two or more people work together to operate a company for profit. Just like a sole proprietorship, each partner (partnership member) has unlimited responsibility for the company’s assets. Guild can be grouped into a limited partnership and the firm.

    3. Company

    A corporation is a business whose ownership is held by several people and is supervised by a board of directors. Each owner has limited liability for company property.

    4. Cooperative

    Cooperatives are businesses whose members are cooperative people or legal entities with the basis of their activities based on cooperative principles as well as a people’s economic movement based on the principle of kinship. Cooperative aims to improve the life of its members. The main characteristic of cooperatives that differentiates them from other business entities is that cooperative members have multiple identities. Dual identity means that cooperative members are owners and users of cooperative services.

    Do you have good communication skills? Interested in the world of business? Like interacting with new people? Maybe business development (BD) is the right job for you.

    What, really, is the job of a business development? Come on, see the explanation below.

    What is Business Development?

    Some people still think that BD is the job of a salesperson. In fact, the reality is not so. According to Forbes, BD is a process of creating long-term value for a company through customers, markets and business relationships.

    I mean this, BD is the person responsible for finding ways so that the interaction of the three channels (customers, markets, and business relations) can create opportunities for the company to continue to grow.

    Long-term value or what is commonly called long-term value itself is simply money, profit, image, or whatever is the main goal of a developing company. However, the person in charge of business development is not just trying to make as much profit as possible in a short time.

    They also have to think about strategies and tactics in the long term for the development of the company. In other words, a BD must rotate money continuously so that the company is always profitable.

    The Role of Business Development in the Company

    The position of business development is very important for the company’s long-term business continuity. A company must be able to adapt to market demands by conducting business development.

    Business development includes market research, improving and maintaining relationships with new potential customers, identifying and creating potential business opportunities. Therefore, a BD must be able to make a business strategy.

    Business Development Factors in Making Strategy

    1. Customers

    Without customers, there will be no growing business. A BD must be able to read what problems are being experienced by customers, what they need, what value they are looking for.

    It could be that customers really consider packaging when buying, or are more concerned with the quality of goods. This must be identified by a BD to then be able to respond to changing customer needs.

    2. Market

    A product definitely has its own target market, but this target is dynamic. A BD has a duty to find new target markets and adapt their products to be accepted in that market.

    Consumer behavior can be formed based on geographical location, demographics and psychographics. For example, the Javanese people, especially Yogyakarta and Solo, like sweet-tasting food because of the large supply of sugar in Java during the colonial era. BD can see this as an opportunity to develop sweet-tasting food products to target customers in Central Java, Yogyakarta and East Java.

    3. Relationships

    Companies must be able to build good relationships between customers, clients, business partners, and investors. Without a relationship a business will not be able to develop and tend not to last long. BD is here to help build trust, image and mutually beneficial relationships. The goal is that the company’s relationship can run in the long term and sustainably.

    Tasks Performed A Business Development

    How? Are you familiar with Business Development? Now it’s time to discuss the tasks that a BD performs within a company.

    1. Monitoring Market Developments

    A BD is in charge of monitoring developments and existing market competition. So that he can see prospects for making product development strategies, new customers and partnerships.

    2. Research to Determine the Target Market

    BD is also responsible for clearly defining new target markets before adapting them to the product you want to develop. It is intended that the products made can be right on target and become a solution to customer problems.

    3. Understand the Company’s Products

    BD is also required to understand all of the company’s products/product knowledge complete with its advantages, features, raw materials to the processes carried out.

    4. Coordinate with other divisions to develop products

    Of course a BD also needs other divisions to support its performance. Starting from Sales, Marketing to Account Manager.

    5. Developing and Presenting Business Development Strategies

    BD is also in charge of designing various strategies related to business development. Such as strategies to increase customer loyalty, find new customers, partnership strategies, sales to monitor performance indicators. Because of that BD must have the ability in presentation, sales, and making agreements related to the strategy that has been prepared.

    The difference between Business Development and Sales

    Many consider BD’s work the same as sales. In fact these two jobs are different. People in business development are tasked with advancing a company with its business development strategy. For example by developing new markets, selling subsidiaries to other companies, and the like.

    The job of a sales development also aims to increase profits for the company. However, sales development is more responsible for cooperation or purchasing contracts, handling prospects, and providing demonstrations of the products being sold.

    Sales development is more focused on the products being sold and profit from these sales. Even though these jobs are different, the two are related, you know! Sales could have entered into the business development section.

    With the same goal of making a profit, they can work together to exchange strategies in order to achieve the targets expected by the company. Imagine if the BD task was done alone without sales, maybe the development achieved by the company would not be maximized.

    Business Development Responsibilities

    Have you got a little enlightenment about the work of BD? Well, now is the time to find out what BD’s work and responsibilities are:

    • Do market research.
    • Look for new customer opportunities and maintain relationships between customers or clients.
    • Collaborate with other divisions to meet market or client needs.
    • Develop and present the company’s business development plan.
    • Conduct research on the company’s business development on a regular basis.
    • Understand the company’s products, competitors, and business position in the market.
    • Work closely with the sales department to get promising new prospective clients or customers.

    Skills Required A Business Development

    Interested in becoming a BD or even want to swerve to become a BD? Check out the skills needed by a BD below:

    1. High Motivation

    Becoming a BD requires high motivation and discipline at work. A BD should not give up easily and be able to meet targets within limitations and deadlines.

    2. Management

    With a very diverse task focus, the ability to manage time and priorities must also be owned by a BD. A BD must also be smart in managing the resources available to the team and the company so that they can support business growth.

    3. Communication

    Not only working behind the scenes, a BD must also have good communication skills. The reason is, they have to communicate with potential customers, clients, teams, and also present in front of colleagues or clients.

    4. Marketing

    Not only with sales, BD also works a lot with the marketing division to promote the brand. Therefore, a BD should also have basic skills in marketing.

    5. Negotiation

    In his work, a BD will be faced with negotiating with existing clients or potential clients who have the potential to work with the company. Well, in this case a BD must hone skills in negotiating so that all projects are successful.

    6. Data Analysis

    There will be a lot of data that must be analyzed by a BD. From monthly sales growth data, investor data, client data, to also data from competitors that need to be analyzed and studied. This is where accuracy and data analysis skills are needed. Data is not just writing, you know! A lot of data contains image patterns, numbers, number patterns, and even mathematical operations.

    A BD must also be able to compile data and present it to superiors in language that is easy to understand. If you are confident in your data analysis skills, you may be a great fit to work in business development.

    7. Project Management

    Working to develop a business is indeed a complex and high-risk thing. Becoming a BD requires high responsibility because the company depends on your fate.

    In becoming a BD, you must be prepared to face all the best and worst possibilities. You have to handle not only projects, but teamwork, team support, and problem solving. In this case, leadership needs to be instilled in your mind so that all the projects you lead can run smoothly and be in harmony with the team.

    How to Become a Business Development Associate

    If you are interested in becoming a bizdev, here’s how to become a business development:

    1. Look for Internship Experience

    In order to make it easier to get a job as a business development person, internship experience is needed. With an internship, you can learn earlier from previous companies about their business models and learn from seniors.

    Nowadays, many companies are opening internship vacancies for business development. You can search on job vacancy sites with the keyword business development internship. One of the job vacancy sites that you can use is LinkedIn.

    2. Keep Up-to-Date with New Developments

    To become a reliable business developer, extensive knowledge of all aspects of the business industry is required. Always update your knowledge by reading economic news, technological developments and also industry. Develop knowledge of marketing, accounting, or management so that it can help you in your future work.

    3. Prepare CV

    To get the first job, of course, you need a Curriculum Vitae (CV) to apply for a job. A good business development CV should be written in a way that highlights your abilities and accomplishments. If this is the first time you have made a CV to apply for a business development job, you can see an example CV below for reference.

    Business Development Manager Career Path

    The senior level of the Business Development Manager position is to become VP Business Development or Director of Business Development – EKRUT. However, the career journey to become a Business Development Manager is not easy to achieve. To get to this point you can start a career as Customer Service, Sales or Marketing. Only after having a lot of experience, you can become a Business Development Representative. From Business Development Representative then the next career path is Business Development Manager.

    At the senior level, there are several positions that you can get, including being the Vice President of Business Development or becoming the Director of Business Development. By knowing some of the qualifications above, now you have a clear picture of the role and duties of a Business Development Manager, right?

    Business Development Manager Career Projection 2022

    Quoted from Forbes, currently, many businesses are looking for ways to recover from financial losses suffered in the past year and successfully transition to “The Next Normal” – a term that refers to the emerging post-pandemic era created by McKinsey.

    This begs the question: How can organizations strategize for growth and prepare their Business Development teams to better understand and align with their goals.

    Therefore, career projections for 2022 for Business Development Managers are still a crucial point to maintain the company. The most sought-after candidates are candidates with the ability to innovate and adapt in the new normal era.

    The position of Business Development Manager must understand the changing situation, so that the company will be better prepared in articulating issues for future plans and preparing business plans while still thinking ahead.

  • What is the Code? Understanding and Its Application in a Story

    What is the Code? Understanding and Its Application in a Story

    Koda – Do you like reading fiction books or novels with beautiful stories, deep moral messages, and unexpected endings ? It turns out that there are indeed many novels and fictional stories that have all of these criteria. For example, stories written by top writers such as Tere Liye, Dee Lestari, Andrea Hirata, which have so many moral messages contained in each of their works.

    Or other works by foreign writers such as Matt Haig, Stephanie Meyer, Cho Nam Joo, and Keigo Higashino who write a lot of dramatic to dystopia stories that always make the reader feel a roller coaster. Of all types and genres of writing, all of them have a moral message and stories that end beautifully.

    So that makes us realize that there are so many interesting elements contained in it. In fact, if we pay attention to these talented writers, they really need a number of intrinsic elements that should be in a story. So that it can give birth to a beautiful story and leave an impression on the hearts of its readers.

    Know the Code and Its Functions

    When we are reading a story, whether it is a short story or a novel, we are aware that there are a number of intrinsic elements contained in it. Of the many elements that exist in a story, such as plot, characters, background and setting, there are also elements that we often forget.

    Coda is an important part of the intrinsic elements of a story, which not many people are aware of its presence. The role of the coda itself is almost always present and can help us conclude a story.

    You may have heard the term coda, but you still don’t understand what the definition of coda is and its application in a story. Let’s check out the following reviews!

    Definition of the Code

    Coda is an element contained in the story, which contains the message or message to be conveyed by the story. The coda is generally placed at the end of a story or novel.

    The existence of this coda is also able to help the reader have a clear conclusion from the whole story. However, not all stories automatically have a coda with a clear ending. Some stories often deliberately end with plots that hang or still leave new questions. Where the reader must conclude for himself how the conclusion and the end.

    But that doesn’t mean that this type of story doesn’t have a coda at the end, usually the coda remains to be the conclusion of the story as a whole, regardless of how it ends . Therefore, the role of this coda is important to give more value to the story, so that it can attract more readers.

    Writers will also usually give a mandate or message about an issue that they raise in a story that is spread throughout the story. However, the essence and final conclusion of the message is contained in the coda.

    The coda is also usually the answer to all of the readers’ questions that arise throughout the story. Especially in stories with the horror or detective genre that have a lot of suspense throughout the story, the answer will be given at the end of the story as well as the moral message that the writer wants to convey.

    Code function

    As with the definition of the coda itself, the function of the coda is to convey the moral message or message of the whole story. So that when reading the story, the reader is able to understand what the author wants to convey through his work.

    The message contained in this coda is also the hope of the author who is expected to make the reader understand, so that he can take the positive side. So, it’s not surprising that many writers don’t hesitate to raise social issues, problems that have recently occurred, to satirize the political system, just to voice their ideas through writing.

    It is this idea that the author brings up later that is expected to reach every reader so that other people understand it better.

    We can take a simple example of the coda function from the fable that we used to read when we were little. As in the story of Si Kancil who likes to steal cucumbers belonging to the farmer, but in the end he gets rewarded for his actions.

    We can understand one thing from the author of this deer story, namely about the meaning that stealing is not a commendable act. So what we do always has its own consequences, including when we steal.

    From this simple story, the moral message about not stealing something that doesn’t belong to us has succeeded in getting into our minds until we grow up. So it means that the function of the coda as conveying morals and morals through the story of the deer is very successful.

    So that this coda is also commonly found in short stories for children as a form of teaching morals and educating children from an early age. This has proven to be effective in shaping our mindset and character in the future.

    Instead of having to dictate a child to act positively, telling stories with coda full of moral messages like this can actually be a more effective medium for shaping their character.

     

     

    Position of Koda in Story Structure

    The role of the coda is actually quite large considering that the coda is able to bind the reader’s feelings to a story or novel after reading it. Because, coda is able to leave a final impression that holds the hearts of its readers. Making these readers will always remember the story in that story because it is so deep and beautiful as a work.

    However, in a story, the coda does not stand alone. There’s a lot of structure that needs to be in place in a story for coda to work well when applied to stories. Here are some important structures in the story that we need to know in order to understand the position of the coda in the story.

    1. Abstraction

    Abstraction or abstract in general is a brief description of a theme, event or idea in a story. This becomes the main structure that influences the course of the plot of a story.

    Abstract can also be said as a premise that is taken to become the main idea of ​​the story. For example, in a romantic comedy novel, the writer wants to raise the premise of a poor girl who is independent meets a rich man who is arrogant.

    This is a brief abstract, which can then be developed more broadly, for example by the situation that brought the two together, the character’s background and so on.

    2. Orientation

    The next very important structure is orientation, which is the introduction of situations, characters in the story. Generally, every story written in fiction will have various types of orientation.

    This introduction includes the introduction of characters, setting of place and time, situations, issues raised to the relationship between the characters in the story. The way of introduction also varies according to the theme of the story taken.

    Usually the introduction of characters and their characterization will be described slowly and little by little. As the story progresses, several new characters will appear that have not been mentioned, or have been mentioned but have not appeared.

    In contrast to the introduction of the background which is most often introduced from the start, because for setting the time and place there is always the possibility of changing according to the flow. Generally for certain genres such as detective, criminal, thriller there will be an introduction of characterizations that are scattered throughout the story.

    So it is very likely that there is another side of the characters in the story that is only known after heading to the end of the story. This is often done in order to support the storyline and process the emotions of the readers.

    3. Complications

    The next structure is complication, where the conflict arises when entering the middle of the story to the climax. This conflict is important to exist and be made maturely so that it can bring a story to life.

    A story that has no complications will feel very flat and boring. Therefore, the existence of various conflicts is able to present varied and complex colors, so that the story will always be interesting to follow.

    The type of conflict that is embedded in a story is also very diverse and it all depends on the main idea or ideas that the author wants to raise. Conflicts can be in the form of conflict either between fellow characters or with oneself, a number of problems that seem to be starting to make it difficult for the main character in the story.

    For example, in the famous novel Little Women, the four main characters begin to experience various internal and external conflicts. Where they have to struggle to become women who follow the wishes of society or against the stereotypes that are given to them as women.

    So seeing the possibility of complications arising is what triggers character development, which in the end there will be a change in attitude. For example, from evil to a good person.

    4. Rising action

    The rising action or conflict achievement is all the piles of problems, events, and emotional turmoil that pile up into one. It is at this point that achieving conflict will feel so heavy and tiring for the main character.

    This ultimately triggers the main character to bring the storyline to the highest level. Usually a story that has reached the conflict milestone will feel as if there is no way out.

    Taking the example of the film Avengers: Endgame, the point of reaching the conflict is in the scene where all the Avengers and other superheroes have been repeatedly resisted by Thanos’ minions. The scenes that were shown many times also showed that they were all too tired, and almost wanted to give up.

    This is what then prompted Captain America to take Thor’s hammer and not long after the storyline headed for the climax of the conflict or climax.

    5. Climax

    This section becomes the climax of the conflict or often referred to as the climax, which is the culmination of a story. After the story develops from what was originally only character introduction and conflicts begin to emerge, then a story will have its peak.

    The climax of this story is the culmination of various problems that continue to arise, the inner conflicts of the main characters to all the circumstances and plots that support it. A story that has a climax like this makes readers increasingly unable to escape from the story they are reading.

    A good conflict setting and choosing a climax in the right situation will be able to make the story in the story so memorable . Like when you watch the movie Avengers: Endgame, the climax in that story is when the Avengers ensemble scene.

    At that point the audience is able to feel the power of a sentence that becomes so strong and meaningful, coupled with the continuous attacks that satisfy the audience’s thirst. This feels so right because of the correct choice of climax, and the well-plotted and successive conflict arrangements.

    So that when the peak of the conflict comes, everyone who follows the story will feel that all the previous feelings and emotions have paid off well. This climax is also referred to as a turning point, which in some stories can change the entire plot.

    6. Evaluation

    In this evaluation section, the story has reached its final part which is the bright point of every conflict and problem experienced by the characters in the story. So that it can be said in this evaluation section, the main character in the story has found a solution or a way to solve their problem.

    For example the part Thanos is finally able to defeat, with Iron Man again snapping his fingers to bring back the people who were hit by the blip .

    7. Resolution

    This resolution section can be said to be the end point of a storyline. In this last section is a number of explanations about the problem that has been completed. If it tells about a detective or criminal story, this part shows who the perpetrator is and the reasons why he committed the crime.

    Therefore, this resolution becomes an explanation and explanation that clarifies and straightens out every question that has ever occurred to readers before. This section also explains what happened to the characters and what situations changed after the events happened.

    8. Code

    As previously explained, the coda is at the very end which contains conclusions and moral messages from the journey of the main characters after experiencing a number of events.

    How does the writer want to convey a message so that we can take the best lessons from the experiences of the characters.

    Application of the Coda in Stories

    Actually the application of the coda in each type of story is fairly simple, but not all of the coda written in written stories are real. But there are several coda which are implicitly included at the end of the story.

    For example, in a novel like Harry Potter, you may not find a message of moral mandate written firmly at the end of the novel. But by following the whole storyline, and reading it to the end, you can be sure that the story contains a very clear coda about the sincerity of parents’ love for their children.

    Where in the story, true love is described as being able to defeat any evil power of magic because love itself is the most natural, magical, and powerful magic.

    But if we look at some short stories such as in legends, fables, and others, we can easily find the coda of the story in question at the end of the story. Most coda are found prominently in fables because of their purpose for children’s learning.

    For example, in the story of the mouse deer stealing the cucumber, it will be written at the end of the story that stealing is not a commendable act, so we should not be like the mouse deer who likes to steal things that don’t belong to him.

     

     

    Conclusion about the Code

    If reading a story with a plot full of tension is able to make us cry and laugh, plus a moral message that is so deep, it is indeed an interesting experience.

    This is because the coda is a place for writers to convey the message they want to convey to readers. So reading the story is not a waste.

    Through interesting media such as stories, it is hoped that the ideas and messages that the author wants to convey can be more easily understood by all readers from various different backgrounds.

    So, do you have a favorite story with the best coda? If not, then find epic fictional stories and the best moral messages at sinaumedia, okay!

  • What is the Abiogenesis Theory: Its Advantages and Disadvantages

    What is the Abiogenesis Theory: Its Advantages and Disadvantages

    Has Sinaumed’s ever asked about how this world was formed or about how humans can be born? If so, then surely you will find varied answers. If you’ve ever heard of the Big Bang theory as the beginning of the formation of the Earth, in Biology there is also a theory called the theory of abiogenesis as the theory of the beginning of the formation of living things on Earth.

    Science is always developing every day. It is not surprising that at any time there will be the possibility of discovering theories or even theories that can disprove pre-existing theories. This is due to the development of technology which also affects the development of science.

    As we understand that humans are living beings who have high curiosity. Long before there was a theory that discussed the origin of the universe, namely based on the big bang theory, humans themselves had thought about how living things appeared on this Earth. No wonder there are many opinions about the origin of living things. One of them is the theory of abiogenesis. But, what exactly is the theory of abiogenesis? Let’s discuss in full below.

    What is the Abiogenesis Theory?

    The theory of abiogenesis or biopoiesis is a study that discusses how biological life can arise from organic matter through natural processes. Specifically, this one term refers to the process by which life on Earth arose. Abiogenesis is thought to have occurred in the early Archean period or about 3 to 4 billion years ago.

    Most of the amino acids, which are often referred to as “the building blocks of life”, were successfully synthesized in the Miller-Urey experiment and in other experiments simulating the conditions of early Earth. As for other important biochemical materials such as nucleotides and also saccharides can appear in a similar way. In all organisms, these biochemicals are organized into even more complex molecules such as proteins, nucleic acids, as well as polysaccharides. The three molecules are essential for the functioning of life and are also present in all organisms.

    The formation of these macromolecules is mediated by nucleic acids as well as enzymes, which are synthesized through biochemical pathways catalyzed by proteins. Which organic molecules first appeared and how they might have helped the first organisms is still being debated.

    The first life to appear on Earth is thought to have been a single-celled prokaryotic that may have evolved from protobionts or organic molecules surrounded by a membrane-like structure. The oldest recorded micro fossils date from 3.5 billion years ago, the ratio of isotopes of carbon, iron, and sulfur shows the influence of life on minerals and inorganic sediments and also as a molecular marker indicates the occurrence of photosynthesis.

    Modern abiogenesis, which was first coined by Oparin and Haldane in the 1920s, is different from classical abiogenesis or spontaneous generation. One of the most fundamental differences is that modern abiogenesis is an explanation of the origins of life phenomena while classical abiogenesis coined by Aristotle explains how certain animals or plants routinely appear without going through reproduction. For other differences, namely in terms of mechanism, where modern abiogenesis is based on modern biochemical knowledge, while classical abiogenesis is based on classical concepts such as material principles, movement principles, and also spirit principles. The absence of proof of classical abiogenesis is now even more controversial among professional biologists,

    History of the Theory of Abiogenesis

    The theory of abiogenesis is a science that studies how biological life arises from naturally occurring inorganic materials. Where this one theory refers to the process when the formation of Planet Earth. It is thought that this abiogenesis theory occurred early in the Eoarchean or 4 billion years long on a relative time scale. This theory is classified as the oldest theory that discusses the origin of living things. It can be said that the theory of abiogenesis is a theory that explains if living things come from inanimate matter. This opinion arose based on a simple thought when he saw frogs or worms emerging from the mud or soil.

    The theory of abiogenesis was first coined by Aristotle in 384 to 322 BC which was a scientist from Greece. Abiogenesis or also known as spontaneous generation theory is made based on the observation made by Aristotle that the fish in the river come from mud. Not only that, he also conducted an experiment on soil that was soaked in water and the result was that worms emerged from the soil. Based on these experiments, the theory of abiogenesis became the basis, that living things came from non-living things. Generatio Spontanea or what is called the classical theory of abiogenesis has been recorded in Aristotle’s book entitled Historia Animalium.

    This theory was still believed until the end of the 17th century and one of its supporters was a British scientist named Nedham. Nedham conducted an experiment by boiling the broth in a container for a few minutes. Then, He covered it with a cork. Within a few days, in the broth that was stored there were bacteria. So Nedham concluded that the bacteria that appeared in the broth came from the broth itself.

    The proof of the abiogenesis theory does not end here. Another supporter also came from Antonie Van Leeuwenhoek, when he found microorganisms in the straw soaking water using a microscope, this discovery strengthened the theory of abiogenesis and also his supporters said that microorganisms came from decomposed straw. However, Leeuwenhoek denied this and argued that these microorganisms came from the air.

    The development of the theory of abiogenesis continued to grow until the emergence of the modern theory of abiogenesis which was coined by Oparin and also Haldani in the 1920s. There is a difference between spontaneous generation or classical abiogenesis. We can see this difference when modern abiogenesis explains the origin of life phenomena. While classical abiogenesis emphasizes more on how certain animals or plants can appear routinely without going through the process of reproduction. We can also see the difference between the two theories in terms of mechanism, where modern abiogenesis is based on modern biochemical knowledge, while classical abiogenesis is based on classical concepts in the form of material principles, movement principles, and also spirit principles, as we have discussed above.

    Abiogenesis Theory Broken

    Not a few who want to break and do not believe in the basis of this theory of abiogenesis since this theory was coined. Francesco Redi has started efforts to disprove the theory of abiogenesis by conducting experiments using meat. The meat was put into two jars, one of which was left open, while the other was closed. After a few days, larvae appeared in the meat that was in the open jar.

    From this, Redi concluded that the larvae in the meat came from flies that entered the jar. Apart from that, he also did the same experiment, only modifying the lid of the jar by using gauze. This is so that air can get into the jar, while the other jars are closed tightly. The result is that the meat still rots but no larvae are found in the meat.

    In 1768, Lazzaro Spallanzani repeated John Needham’s experiment. He heated the broth then placed it into 2 containers. One of the containers used is left open, while the other container is closed tightly. After a few days, the broth in the open vessel turned cloudy and gave off an unpleasant odor. Meanwhile, the broth in a closed container remains clear. This experiment proved that organisms did not come from inanimate objects but came from other living things.

    Even so, the theory of abiogenesis persisted, until finally Louis Pasteur, a biochemist from France, attempted to perfect the experiments conducted by Spallanzani. Pasteur modified the container used by using a long-necked flask. He did this to find out other indicators related to the flask tube with the air outside. After waiting a few days, the result was that the broth remained clear, but at the end of the neck of the tube a lot of dust and dirt had gathered. Then in the open tube, the broth contains lots of microorganisms.

    From the results of trials conducted by Louis Pasteur, this theory of abiogenesis was broken which resulted in a new theory, namely:

    1. Omne vivum ex ovo which means all living things come from eggs.
    2. Omne ovum ex vivo which means all eggs come from living things.
    3. Omne vivum ex vivo which means that all living things come from other living things.

    Advantages and Weaknesses of the Abiogenesis Theory

    Each theory that emerges will certainly have its own advantages and disadvantages. Likewise with this theory of abiogenesis. Based on several experiments conducted by previous experts, many thought that this theory was too naive, even though it was supported by previous experiments. The following are some of the advantages and disadvantages of the abiogenesis theory, including:

    1. Advantages of the Abiogenesis Theory

    Based on the research that has been done, the theory of abiogenesis actually has several advantages, because it provides the basic idea for the emergence of the aparin theory or naturalistic theory. This theory states that the origin of life is biochemical, to be precise, living things emerged abiotically. Without this research, there would be no Oparin Theory developed.

    2. Weaknesses of the Abiogenesis Theory

    As with other theories in other fields of science, this theory also has weaknesses. These weaknesses, namely the examples mentioned and explained, then carried out research by previous experts were considered too naive. The examples given are considered unable to support the theoretical propositions given. In addition, researchers at that time also did not see any small material such as bacteria or worm eggs, which actually is the beginning of the emergence of this life.

    That is the explanation of the theory of abiogenesis put forward by some experts regarding the beginning of life in this world. Even though this theory has not been proven correct, studying and understanding the various theories that might support the occurrence of life on Earth will provide more knowledge.

    For Sinaumed’s who want to know more deeply about other theories, they can read related books by visiting sinaumedia.com. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

  • What is State Defense Initial Capability and Examples of Its Basic Values!

    What is State Defense Initial Capability and Examples of Its Basic Values!

    What is State Defense Initial Ability – Did you know that state defense initial ability is included in the basic values ​​of state defense. So, in this article, we will discuss in more detail what is the initial ability to defend the state and the form of defending the state for citizenship education. Both of these are quite important things for us to learn as Indonesians.

    In addition, we are also obliged to practice it in everyday life. By practicing the basic values ​​of defending the country, we are like practicing the values ​​contained in Pancasila.

    What is State Defense Initial Capability?

    What is State Defense Initial Capability? The initial ability to defend the country can be interpreted as the potential and also the readiness of every citizen to defend the country according to their profession and abilities in their respective environment. Every citizen of this country basically has the initial ability to defend the country. This can be seen in physical, psychological, and spiritual abilities.

    Psychic abilities such as for example willing to obey various existing regulations. While physical ability is like having physical health. As for spiritual abilities, for example, diligently carrying out worship according to their religion.

    Having the initial ability to defend the country can be reflected in attitudes and behavior, including:

    1. Have the ability, integrity, and also confidence in defending the nation and state.
    2. Be able to understand and identify threats that exist in each environment and remain responsive to report them to the authorities.
    3. Have high emotional and spiritual intelligence and intelligence.
    4. Have knowledge of local wisdom in responding to every threat.

    Form of State Defense

    The form of defending the country has been stated in Law no. 3 of 2002, namely through civics education, compulsory basic military training, service as a soldier of the Indonesian National Armed Forces which is done voluntarily or compulsorily, and service according to profession.

    The four forms of defending the country have been explained in more detail in Law no. 23 of 2019, regarding Management of National Resources for Defense.

    Civic education

    According to Article 7 Paragraph 1 of Law Number 23 of 2019, it states that citizenship education is carried out through fostering awareness of defending the country by instilling the basic values ​​of defending the country. Having knowledge of local wisdom in responding to every threat is a form of initial state defense capability that we must have.

    In Article 7 paragraph 2 of Law Number 23 of 2019, it is stated that fostering awareness of defending the country is carried out in the scope of education, work and society. Regarding fostering awareness of state defense in the education sphere, Law Number 23 of 2019 also states that this development is carried out through the national education system. The national education system is also carried out in every track, level, and type of education by the government through the ministries in the education sector. Within this scope, the most important citizenship education is Pancasila Education and Citizenship Education or PPKn.

    Basic Values ​​of Defending the Country in Everyday Life

    What meaning is contained in article 27 paragraph 3 of the 1945 Constitution and examples of its implementation in everyday life? Efforts to defend the country can be done by instilling basic values. The provisions contained in Article 27 Paragraph 3 of the 1945 Constitution explain that every citizen has the right and obligation to participate in efforts to defend the state. Simplified, then article 27 paragraph 3 of the 1945 Constitution explains our obligation to make efforts to defend the country.

    The purpose of defending the country is none other than to maintain the survival of the nation and state, preserve the existing culture, practice the values ​​of Pancasila and the 1945 Constitution, and maintain the identity and integrity of the state. In the past, this state defense contest was an attempt to carry out a struggle or physical effort to fight for and defend independence. Then, in this modern era, defending the country is no longer just taking up arms or fighting other nations, but includes many things, one of which is fighting the effects of globalization.

    Then, what is the meaning of Article 28 Paragraph 3 of the 1945 Constitution and examples of its implementation in everyday life? Basically, the concept of defending the country can be interpreted broadly. However, if elaborated, defending the country is a matter of obligation, soul, and also honor. Then, in everyday life, efforts to defend the country can be done in various ways. One of them is by instilling six basic values ​​as follows:

    1. Love the Motherland

    Planting state defense that can be done is by growing a sense of love for the motherland. Then, to be able to foster a sense of love for this homeland, the Indonesian people must know the history of Indonesia’s independence, the potential of natural resources, the potential of human resources, and also its strategic geographical position. By understanding Indonesia’s condition like that, a sense of love for the motherland will grow as a sense of belonging, a sense of pride, and also a sense of responsibility to protect it.

    2. Awareness of Nation and State

    Love for the motherland alone is not enough. Therefore, this feeling of love must be supported by an awareness of a harmonious nation and also an awareness of the state that upholds the principles of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia and the 1945 Constitution. archipelago, national resilience, and free and active foreign policy.

    3. Loyal to Pancasila as the State Ideology

    Pancasila is a state ideology formed by paying attention to the national character. To be able to build loyalty to Pancasila, it is necessary to understand the basic values ​​of defending the country in the form of upholding discipline, developing political ethics, developing a democratic system, and also fostering a sense of obedience to the law.

    4. Willing to Sacrifice for the Nation and Country

    Indonesian independence did not come easily. The previous heroes had a sense of self-sacrifice, persistence, and also a high unyielding spirit, so that they could win independence from foreign nations. Instilling a sense of self-sacrifice is definitely very necessary. To be able to build awareness and also a sense of self-sacrifice, it is important to understand aspects such as the conception of the soul, spirit, and fighting values, ethical, moral and constitutional responsibilities, as well as the attitude of prioritizing national interests over personal or group interests.

    5. State Defending Initial Capability

    If interpreted, the initial ability to defend the country is the potential and also the readiness to carry out acts of defending the country in accordance with the abilities of a person and their profession anywhere. Basically, every citizen has the initial ability to defend the country based on aspects of their respective abilities, such as self-confidence, professional values, and so on.

    6. Passion to Create a Sovereign, Just and Prosperous Country

    The spirit to realize the ideals of the Indonesian nation is one of the national attitudes and determination based on the determination of national unity and integrity. With the spirit to realize a sovereign, just and prosperous country, one will be able to utilize the potential of national resources and local wisdom in facing threats and challenges according to the times.

    This is an explanation of what is the initial ability to defend the country and how to cultivate an attitude of defending the country. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the initial skills of defending the country and other knowledge related to love for the motherland, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Also read:

  • What is SEO, SEM and SMM? Today’s Digital Marketing Strategy

    What is SEO, SEM and SMM? Today’s Digital Marketing Strategy

    Content writer is a common job in the digital era like now. There are many people who list their experiences as content writers on their LinkedIn profiles. Even though it is very common, becoming a content writer is not as easy as many people imagine.

    Content writers are not only tasked with compiling words into sentences, then combining them into paragraphs and a coherent piece of writing. Content writers must also develop a strategy so that the content they create can be reached by many people, especially digital readers.

    Therefore, in the world of copywriting , three important terms are known, namely SEO, SEM and SMM. The last two may not be so commonplace, but that doesn’t mean they aren’t important, you know.

    SEO is a technique for maximizing content so that writing can appear in searches on the top line, by doing a few tricks on the content.

    SEM and SMM are also the same, it’s just that they do it in a different way. SEM is done by advertising on search engine providers such as Google Ads, while SEM is by marketing through social media. Still confused? The following is a comprehensive explanation.

    A. Know What is SEO?

    1. Understanding SEO

    Search Engine Optimization (SEO) is a technique for managing a website so that it can work optimally and get the top ranking in search results.

    This top ranking will help boost the number of visits to the website so that it will generate profits. The application of SEO in managing a website is not only aimed at achieving high traffic, but also to help reach the intended audience.

    When creating a site, the creator must have certain goals with a certain audience or readers, the existence of SEO will help so that the content on the website can be the right target audience.

    SEO as a technique for getting high traffic and reaching the desired target audience cannot be done without paying attention to a number of indicators. Creators must be able to understand how SEO works, understand all the indicators that can help maximize content, including understanding how search engines or algorithms work on Google, Yahoo!, Bing or others.

    Understanding SEO also means understanding how search engine algorithms work. Search engines like Google will place certain content as the top ranking based on its compatibility with the algorithm they apply.

    For example, Google will display certain sites on the top page based on their match with certain keywords that are most searched for, the more the same keywords, the more relevant they will be and displayed on the top line.

    Since 2011, at least Google, as the search engine most used by the world’s people, has made eight changes to its algorithm provisions. Therefore, a creator who wants to maximize SEO is required to always update regarding the latest algorithm indicators. In the case of a creator still following the old algorithm pattern, the content he creates will not be effective.

    2. SEO indicators

    The SEO indicator is the main criterion that determines whether the technique used will work optimally, this is by taking into account a number of components which also still have a close relationship with how Google’s algorithm determines. Therefore, every time Google changes the terms of the algorithm, the indicators or components of SEO will also change.

    a. URL structure

    The shorter and simpler the website URL structure, the greater the chance to appear on the top page. This is because URLs are used by search engines to identify sites and content that is relevant to the search keywords.

    A short and simple URL structure can be just the site name and content title. For example, https://websitename//content . Conversely, the longer and more complicated the URL of the website you are creating, the more difficult it will be to display on the top page.

    b. Use of SSL/TLS

    Secure Sockets Layer (SSC) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) are components used by Google to mark which website is safe.

    Meanwhile, sites that do not activate these two things are indicated as pages that are not secure , so they often do not recommend users to reach websites that do not enable SSC and TLS.

    These two components are related to the transfer of visitor data, because sites that have activated SSC and TLS will encrypt all visit data on the website.

    An easy way to find out if a website has SSC and TLS enabled is to cross-check its domain address. If the website address starts with HTTP then this has not activated SSC and TLS, while what has been installed is the one with the HTTPS address.

    c. Search Intents

    Google often directs users to shopping services when typing the keyword ‘ bag ‘. This is known as search trend, which means the majority of Google users type the word bag to search for bag shopping sites.

    On the other hand, sites that contain information related to bag theory, such as understanding, types or materials of bags, often do not appear at the top if you type the same keywords.

    This is because most internet users will type the keyword ‘ understanding of bag ‘ or ‘ types of bag ‘ when looking for an explanation about bags.

    d. Content Topic

    Google tends to place sites in the top rankings, if the content on the site is complete and interrelated. If you type the keyword ‘tips for making spicy macaroni’, a site that specifically discusses food recipes will be more likely to appear in the top rankings than a general site that discusses not only eating, but also automotive, lifestyle and so on. This is because sites that specifically provide food recipes tend to have more complete content about ‘ making spicy macaroni ‘.

    Therefore, to maximize SEO you need to build a website that has a clear purpose. If you want to focus on the topic of traveling, manage the website to only focus on discussing food, travel, lodging. Combine several sub-topics to make website content more complete and comprehensive.

    Also have the following book entitled “Good at Making Websites and SEO” to understand more about the world of SEO.

    e. Content Structure

    Google pays attention to the comfort aspect of its users or user experience . Websites that are usually on the top page have a structured content composition. The easier it is for readers to access content on the website, the more visitors the website will attract. Therefore, keep content as simple as possible so that it makes it easy for readers to find the answers they are looking for.

    One of the tricks to make the content structure on a website interesting is to pay attention to the headings and sub-headings .

    These two components will guide the reader to understand general to detailed or specific information. Another trick is to use bullet points so that visitors don’t get tired of reading text that is too long.

    f. Meta Tags

    A blog usually has a special section that requires the creator to include a special tag and will usually be displayed at the bottom or at the end of the post.

    The tags in question are keywords that represent the contents of the entire content. Tags usually consist of one to three words, for example the content you create is about corruption cases, the tags that are included can use ‘ corruption ‘, ‘ corruption in Indonesia ‘, or ‘ corruption history ‘.

    g. Off-Page SEO

    Backlinks are links that refer to your website, or more commonly understood another website quotes information that comes from your content. The more people who cite or backlink to your website, the more credible and original your status is, or in other words, the more likely you are to appear at the top of Google’s rankings.

    However, websites that link backlinks to your site must also come from sites that also have good quality or reputation.

    h. Performance & Speed

    An important indicator that many creators ignore is the loading speed of the website. Google for the last three years has included aspects of loading speed as a consideration to increase website rankings.

    This is also still related to user experience satisfaction, a website that takes too long to load will be boring and make visitors bored. Meanwhile, Google is very concerned about aspects of user satisfaction and comfort.

    3. SEO division

    There are two types of SEO implementation in maximizing website performance. The two types are on-page SEO and off-page SEO.

    a. On-Page SEO

    This type tries to maximize website performance through the application of a number of techniques in the content. Simply put, on-page SEO is the application of SEO in content that is created so that the writing can reach a large audience. So generally the implementation of on page SEO is done by changing some parts of the content and adjusting to ideal conditions.

    Some of the common ways of implementing on-page SEO are using simple permalinks that are the same age as the keywords, using attractive titles that contain several keywords as well, using headings and sub-headings, pasting images at the right size, putting keywords in 100 words. first on the content, and so on.

    b. Off-Page SEO

    This type tries to maximize website performance through the application of a number of provisions outside of content. Simply put, off page SEO is the implementation of SEO outside of content or external factors which of course can also support optimizing website traffic.

    These external factors are generally in the form of using backlinks or the more links to your website, the better the assessment from Google. Apart from that, other factors include the use of Google Business, rating or reviewing visitors to maximizing social media as a place for promotion.

    B. Know What is SEM?

    1. Definition of SEM

    Search Engine Marketing (SEM) is a technique for maximizing a website by way of advertising the website. This method is usually done by advertising to search engine companies such as Google Ads (adwords), ads on Bing, Yahoo! etc. The advertising methods used also vary, one that is widely used is pay-per-click (PPC). This method advertises a website, but the website owner will only be billed for advertising if the ad is clicked or a user accesses the website via an posted ad.

    The easiest example, when you type the keyword ‘car rental’, the website that appears on the top page is the website of several car rental companies that offer their services. These pages can appear on the top page because they advertise to search engine providers such as Adwords.

    SEM is almost similar to SEO, because both of them aim to optimize the performance of a website. However, the way the two work is very much different.

    2. SEM characteristics

    Here are a few things that can help differentiate SEO and SEM.

    a. Effectiveness of reaching audiences

    The SEM method is more effective at reaching audiences than SEO. This is because SEM utilizes advertising by search service providers, where when placing an ad they can set which target audience they want to reach, for example age, location, type of device, gender and so on.

    On the other hand, SEO tends to be more vague because to be able to analyze audiences, a creator usually has to upload content first and then analyze its performance to find out which audience to target.

    b. Speed ​​to hit the target

    The SEM method is simply to maximize the website through the help of third parties who are usually search engine owners, so this method tends to be more instantaneous to reach the desired target than using the SEO method.

    When implementing SEO, a creator must upload as much content as possible and then analyze and maximize it, on the other hand, thanks to the help of advertisements, websites can be filled with traffic more quickly.

    c. Time period

    The SEM method can indeed help maximize websites in a short time, but the consequence is that it only works for a limited period. This period is very dependent on the amount of paid advertising, the greater the advertising costs, the longer the chance for a website to appear on the top page.

    Conversely, SEO tends to take a long time to be able to maximize the website, but the optimization can last a long time because it is done without advertising and is carried out with strategies that can support website sustainability, such as improving content quality, website quality and so on.

    d. Click Potential

    The SEM method guarantees that the website can appear on the top page of search engines, although this does not guarantee that visitors will click on the website page.

    Psychologically, someone will not be interested in clicking on a website even though it appears on the top line, this is because there is an ‘advertisement’ sign on the page.

    People are usually not interested in visiting websites that advertise because they tend to have content that doesn’t match what they are looking for. They will perceive that the website is not much different from ordinary advertisements that are worth ignoring.

    e. Cost

    SEM methods require costs that tend to be more expensive, this is reasonable because they incur costs to pay for advertising providers. On the other hand, SEO is usually free because there are no specific expenses. Even so, SEO may also require costs through developing content by recruiting competent creators or digital marketing consultant fees.

    C. Know What is SMM?

    1. Definition of QMS

    Social Media Marketing (SMM) is a method for maximizing visits to a website by maximizing digital advertising functions through social media. Social media is now an important part of everyone’s life, and almost everyone must access social media.

    This trend is used by creators to market their content through social media so that the potential for visits to their website will also be higher. The most common example, news websites such as detik.com, tribunnews, kompas and others have social media to advertise their content. People prefer to read news through social media, therefore these news media companies usually share their content on social media and then link their website links so they can be visited.

    Even so, this SMM method does not only link website links on social media to reach a wider audience and then harvest traffic but also for other purposes.

    Usually website owners use social media as well to build social networks through the follow feature on Instagram or add on Facebook. In addition, social media is also used as a medium to represent the company that owns the website in cyberspace. The more fans you have, the more credible the account tends to be.

    Currently, there are many types of social media that are developed and used by the community. Starting from the type of social media to share messages, such as WhatsApp or Line. There are also types of social media sharing images, such as Pinterest and Instagram, sharing short videos such as TikTok and Snapchat or audio-visual sharing such as Youtube.

    The success of advertising a website through social media is greatly influenced by many things, such as strategies in SEO. Even SMM can be categorized as part of off page SEO , because optimization is done outside of content. However, there are a number of aspects that differentiate SMM from SEO and SEM.

    2. Characteristics of QMS

    a. Effectiveness of reaching audiences

    The SMM method is almost similar to SEO, it cannot specifically determine which audience you want to reach. This is because social media owners usually have to upload some content before they can analyze it. Conversely, the SEM method is more effective because they can immediately determine it the first time they are going to advertise.

    b. Speed ​​to hit the target

    The SMM method is slower than SEM but better than SEO. This is considering that social media is developing quickly, so reaching audiences will be even faster.

    c. Time period

    The SMM method takes quite a long time to build a follower base on social media, but several ways can also help to increase more instantly, for example by endorsing programs and so on.

    However, basically the time needed to maximize promotion on social media is the same as building consistency in SEO methods.

    d. Click Potential

    The SMM method tends to have less click potential than the SEM method. This is because most social media users are teenagers who have a tendency to prefer audio-visual content over writing. Therefore, even if you link a website link on social media, the number of visits via this method will not be very effective.

    No wonder many social media users often only read the title part of the news instead of reading the full news by clicking on the linked link.

    e. Cost

    The SMM method does not require a lot of money, this is because the advertising process on social media is carried out independently. However, in some cases website owners advertise to social media owners in order to reach more audiences, there will be additional costs.

    Related Book Recommendations

    1. Easy Steps to Understand the Latest SEO

    Also read articles related to “What is SEO, SEM and SMM” below:

  • What is Scout Emblem: History, Meaning, and How to Use it

    What is Scout Emblem: History, Meaning, and How to Use it

    The Scout emblem is an identification of the national scouting organization. Where, this Scout symbol is permanent and official as the identity of the Indonesian National Scout Movement. The symbol of the Scout movement is a shadow or silhouette of a coconut shoot. The symbol was created by one of the Scoutmasters in 1961 named Soenardjo Atmodipoerwo.

    Through this symbol, there are ideals and hopes for the scout movement and the members of the scout movement themselves. The word “Scout” is an abbreviation of the young praja Karana. The word means a young soul who likes to work. The term Scout was taken by Sri Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX which comes from the word Poromuko. Where, the word “paramuko” has the meaning of the front troops in the war.

    The organization first emerged from the Dutch branch of the Nederlandsche Padvinders Organisatie (NPO). This mpu branch was first formed in 1912 in Bandung. In 1916, the NPO changed its name to Nederlands Indische Padvinders Vereniging (NPV). Still in the same year, Mangkunegara VII helped form the first scouting organization in Indonesia.

    The organization was given the name Javaansche Padvinders Organisatie (JPO). Where, the JPO organization formed by Mangkunegara gave rise to another national movement to form the same organization. The organizations that emerged inspired by the JPO consisted of scouting Hizbul Wathon (HW) in 1918, Jong Java Padvinderij (JJP) in 1923, National Padvinders (NP), Pandoe Pamoeda Sumatra (PPS), National Indonesische Padvinderij (NATIPIJ).

    After the birth of many scouting movements, the merging of scouting organizations took place in 1926. This was preceded by the birth of the Indonesische Padvinderij Organisatie (INPO) which became a fusion of two scouting organizations, NPO and JPO. Because many Indonesian-owned organizations were born, the Dutch also banned organizations outside the Netherlands from using the name Padvinder. So after that, KH Agus Salim introduced the term “Scout” or “Scouting” as a characteristic of Indonesian scouting organizations.

    After having its own name, the Indonesian Inter Scout Brotherhood (PAPI) emerged on May 23, 1928. The Indonesian Inter Scout Brotherhood (PAPI) had members divided into INPO, NATIPIJ, SIAP, and PPS. After independence, a national scouting emerged. Scouting is called the Indonesian people’s Scout who was born on December 28, 1945.

    In the course of its journey, the Indonesian scouting organization, which numbered in the hundreds, was eventually divided into several federations. However, after realizing that this federation had weaknesses, the Indonesian Scout Association was formed or known as PERKINDO.

    Then in 1960, in order to improve scouting organizations in Indonesia, the government and the MPRS gathered leaders from each of them until finally on March 9, 1961, a meeting for Indonesian scouting was held and chaired directly by President Soekarno.

    At that time President Soekarno said that the existing scouting organizations in Indonesia had to be renewed. As well as educational activities must be replaced and all scouting organizations must be merged into one with the name Scout.

    After the proposal was sparked, President Soekarno also formed a committee to form the Scout movement. The committee consisted of Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX, Brigadier General DR. Aziz Salah, Prof. Prijono, and also A. Achmadi. Where, what happened then. He is known as the Scout Movement’s Budding Day because it is the basis for the formation of the Scout movement in Indonesia.

    The results of the work of the committee also led to a decision called the attachment to Presidential Decree No. 238 of 1961 concerning Scouting. The incident that occurred in May 1961, eventually became known as the Day of the Beginning of the Work Year.

    Several days later, on July 20, 1961, all Indonesian scout leaders began to gather at Istora Senayan. Then, they finally joined the national scouting organization, the Indonesian Scout movement. This historic event is also commemorated as the Scout Movement Pledge Day 3.

    After the Scout Pledge was carried out, on August 14, 1961 it was carried out by the National Leadership Council (MAPINAS). Where, this activity was known directly by President Soekarno with Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX as deputy chairman 1 and Brigadier General Dr. A. Aziz Saleh as deputy chairman II.

    The activity began and was marked by the handing over of the Scout Banner by President Soekarno to the Scout leaders. The event was also attended by leaders from thousands of Scout members who wanted to introduce the Scout movement to the community. Thus causing the event to be known as the Birthday of Scouts.

    History of the Scout Emblem

    The figure behind the Scout emblem is Soenardjo Atmodipuro. He is the inventor of the coconut shoot symbol in Scouting. Soenardjo Atmodipuro was one of the top officials in the Department as well as an Indonesian scout leader in 1961.

    This symbol was used for the first time on August 14, 1961. At that time, President Soekarno appointed Kwarnari, MAPINAS, and Kwarnas members at the presidential palace.

    Where, at that time President Soekarno also bestowed a token of appreciation and honor such as the banner of the Indonesian national scouting movement on the Scout movement through the Decree of the President of the Republic of Indonesia Number 448 of 1961. This was then handed over to the chairman of the National Quarter named Sri Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX.

    Since then, every August 14th is celebrated as Scouting Day and coconut shoots and designated as a symbol of the Indonesian Scout movement. Where, through the Decree of the National Scout Movement Kwartir No. 06/KN/72 of 1971, the Scout symbol in the form of a coconut shoot was officially designated as the symbol of the Indonesian Scout movement.

    The Decree regarding the Scout emblem was finally stipulated by Hamengkubuwono IX in 1971. Currently, Sultan Hamengkubuwono IX acts as the National Scout Movement Kwartir.

    The meaning of the Scout Emblem

    The Scout Movement is a non-formal educational organization that organizes scouting movements. As identification, the Scout movement has a symbol as an identity so that it is always easy to recognize. Where, the symbol of the Scout movement is a coconut shoot that looks like a shadow or silhouette.

    Knowledge related to the Scout emblem is also one of the mandatory materials in the General Proficiency Requirements, (SKU) of the Indonesian Scout movement. This has been stated in the Initial Alert SKU, the Assistance Alert SKU, the Tata Standby SKU, and also the Ramu Gatherer SKU.

    In the Initial Alert, Assistance Alert and also Administration, knowledge regarding this symbol is found in condition number 8. Meanwhile, the Ramu fundraiser receives the knowledge material in condition number 14.

    The Coconut Shoots symbol was chosen, of course, due to the consideration of its deep meaning. The meaning of the Scout emblem in the form of a coconut shoot is as follows.

    1. Coconut Shoots Have Another Name, Cikal

    Coconut fruit or also known as palm fruit. When the coconut fruit is sprouting, this fruit is known by another name forerunner. In Indonesian, cikal has the meaning of being the first native and passing down a new generation.

    If you are in scouting this can be interpreted as a beginner or the first to continue the next generation. Therefore, the Scout movement chose coconut shoots as its symbol because the Scout movement has a new generation that will continue Scouting’s goals and ideals. This also illustrates that every scout member is the essence of the survival of the scout movement and the nation in Indonesia.

    2. Coconut Has Strong Durability

    Not only coconut shoots which mean beginner, this emblem was also chosen because it has a strong durability. Because in fact, coconuts can live longer and can live in any condition.

    Therefore, this Scout emblem is used because it has the meaning that every Scout member is someone who is physically and mentally strong, resilient, and has great determination to face various challenges and tests. In addition, scout members are also expected to be able to use this ability to define themselves in their beloved homeland, namely the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia.

    3. Coconut Can Grow Anywhere

    Because the durability of coconuts is quite strong, coconuts can grow anywhere. Because of this power, they are ultimately expected to be able to continue their lives wherever they are.

    That way, the Scout movement has the hope that every scout member can face the various problems that come. Not only that, scout members are also expected for Jesus to adapt themselves to their environment wherever they are. Therefore, the Scout movement also wants to prove that all scout members are reliable and able to mingle with other people.

    4. Coconuts Can Grow Tall

    The determination of the emblem for the identity of the organization certainly has a deep meaning. It is like the Scout movement which determines the coconut shoot as its official symbol.

    The determination of coconut shoots to become Scout emblems must be taken according to the characteristics of the coconut tree itself. that the coconut tree has the characteristics of a tree that can grow tall and towering straight up. Because of that, through the coconut shoot symbol, the scout movement can give meaning if every scout member is obliged to have straight and high ideals. The Scout Movement also hopes that we will not be easily swayed from something and have an honest and noble attitude.

    5. Coconut Roots Can Firmly Embed the Ground

    In order to grow roots from coconut fruit or known as coconut fruit, it can stick firmly in the ground. This is one of the reasons why coconut shoots were chosen to become the symbol of the Scout movement.

    Because from the roots of this coconut fruit can develop the strong desires and beliefs of every Scout member. The desires and beliefs possessed by these scout members are of course based on things that are good, true, strong, and real.

    6. Coconut is a versatile plant

    The essence of determining coconut shoots as a symbol of the Indonesian Scout movement is because the coconut tree is a versatile plant. This coconut tree also has the title of a thousand-purpose tree because it has many benefits.

    From root to fruit, this coconut tree can be used by all humans on this earth. it means that every scout member is expected to be a useful and reliable human being. Scout members are also expected to be able to prove themselves to be ready to serve their homeland, nation, state, and all human beings. Therefore scout members are obliged to always be ready under any circumstances. The actions of scout members must also be based on humanity.

    Use of the Scout Emblem

    The scout emblem in the form of a coconut shoot is an organizational identity that has a permanent nature. This Scout emblem can also be used on flags, PANDI, unit or quarter nameplates, Scout uniforms, identification, as well as administrative tools for the Scout Movement and other matters relating to the identity of the Indonesian Scout Movement.

    The use of the Scout Emblem is intended as an educational tool to improve and instill the characteristics and conditions as stated in the meaning of the coconut shoot symbol. This is certainly shown for every member of the Scout movement.

    Every member of the scout movement is expected to be able to practice and practice the knowledge and technology they have in the surrounding community to help the development of civilization. Because the younger generation who joins the Scout movement are expected to be able to become cadres for the development of a country with the spirit of Pancasila.

    History of Scouting in the World

    Before Scouting in Indonesia was established, the Scout movement first appeared in 1907. Where, it was initiated by Robert Baden Powell or also called Baden Powell. This story begins when Baden Powel served as Lieutenant General of the British Army.

    Baden Powell at that time held a Scout camp in Brownsea, England. He also wrote about his camping experience in a book called Scouting For Boys. The book spread to all corners of England and a number of other countries.

    After that, the first Scout organization emerged. At first this organization was only followed by boys. However, in 1912, Baden Powell, assisted by her sister, Agnes Powell, founded a Scouting organization for women who were given the name Girl Guides. Then, the organization was continued by Baden Powell’s wife.

    Baden Powell further developed the organization. Where, in 1961 he formed a Scouting organization for children or Siaga named CUB. The organization is also equipped with a guidebook entitled The Jungle Book.

    After forming Scouts for children, Baden Powell also founded Scouting organizations for youth. In 1918, Rover Scout appeared which was a scouting organization for youth aged 17 years.

    Two years later, from 30 July to 8 August 1920, Baden Powell held the world jamboree for the first time. This Jamboree is a large gathering activity for scout members around the world.

    The Jamboree was first held at Olympia Hall, London with approximately 8,000 participants. participants who took part in the activity came from 34 countries around the world.

    In the event, Baden Powell was finally crowned as the Chief Scout of The World or the Father of World Scouts. In that year also formed the International Scout Organization Council consisting of 9 people.

    Currently, the world boy scouting bureau has secretarial offices in 5 (five) countries, namely the Philippines, Switzerland, Nigeria, Egypt and Costa Rica. Meanwhile, the world’s female scouting bureaus are headquartered in European, Asia Pacific, Arab, African and Latin American countries.

    So, those are some explanations regarding the Scout emblem. Hopefully the above information can add to the knowledge and benefits for readers.

  • What is Samawa? Often spoken to the bride and groom, it turns out this means

    What is Samawa? Often spoken to the bride and groom, it turns out this means

    Sakinah Mawaddah Warahmah – Sakinah mawaddah warahmah or commonly abbreviated as SAMAWA is a prayer expected by Muslims for those who have just entered into the sacred bond of marriage and building a family. All Muslims who are married certainly want a family that is sakinah, mawaddah, warahmah. That is the purpose of marriage, which is a blessing that Allah SWT gives to those who can build a family. The following is a further understanding of sakinah mawaddah warahmah.

    Definition of Sakinah Mawadah

    The sentence sakinah mawadah warahmah has actually been written in the Qur’an. This sentence is part of the function and purpose of marriage in Islam. This sentence is also often said when in wedding sermons or in wedding invitations. The following is an explanation from the Qur’an Surah Ar-Rum verse 21:

    وَمِنۡ اٰيٰتِهٖۤ اَنۡ خَلَقَ لَكُمۡ مِّنۡ اَنۡفُسِكُمۡ اَزۡوَاجًا لِّتَسۡكُنُوۡۤا اِلَيۡهَا وَجَعَلَ بَيۡنَكُمۡ مَّوَدَّةً وَّرَحۡمَةً ؕ اِنَّ فِىۡ ذٰ لِكَ لَاٰيٰتٍ لِّقَوۡمٍ يَّتَفَكَّرُوۡنَ

    Wa min Aayaatihiii an khalaqa akum min anfusikum azwaajal litaskunuuu ilaihaa wa ja’ala bainakum mawad datanw wa rahmah; inna fii dzaalika la Aayaatin liqaumin yatafakkaruun.

    Meaning: “And among His signs (greatness) is that He created partners for you from your own kind, so that you are inclined and feel at ease to him and He made between you feelings of love and affection. Indeed, in that there are signs (of Allah’s greatness) for people who think . ” (QSAr-Rum: 21).

    In this verse there is the word “litaskunu” or also sakinah, then mawaddah and rahmah. These three words are often combined into one sentence, namely sakinah mawadah warahmah. If translated into Indonesian, sakinah means calm or serene, mawaddah means love and warahmah means mercy. The sentence sakinah mawadah warahmah is in accordance with what is in verse 21 of Surah Ar-Rum. In this verse Allah SWT gives His word that humans are created to be in pairs, namely between wives and husbands to get calm, peace and also love.

     

    1. Meaning of Sakinah

    Sakinah comes from Arabic which can be translated into Indonesian with calm, serenity, safety and also peace . Meanwhile, the opposite of peace and serenity are unrest, destruction and shock. What is expected from marriage as in the meaning of sakinah is peace, calm, security and peace in family members. Whereas a family that does not have sakinah means a family full of unrest, destruction and turmoil, that is what must be avoided.

    For example, a family that is not sakinah is a family that is full of debates, fights and suspicions. With so many conflicts that occur in the family, it can certainly trigger a divorce. Distrust in a partner is one of the triggers for family breakdown. If the spouses are suspicious of each other and have no trust in each other, and there are other people who deliberately shake up the household or the wife’s resistance to her husband, then it is classified as a family that is not sakinah.

    By having calm, serenity, security and peace, conflicts in the family will not occur. With calm, family members will be able to think about how to solve problems calmly because they have a clear mind. Family conflicts will easily occur if there is no sakinah in the family.

    2. Meaning of Mawaddah

    Mawadah also comes from Arabic which means affection and burning love . The word mawadah has a special meaning for someone who has passionate feelings with their partner. This passionate feeling arises because of other aspects that are owned by the partner, including: beauty, good looks, morals, position, mindset and other things in the partner. In Islam, mawadah is also a nature possessed by humans. Having mawadah in the family will make the family full of love and affection. It’s impossible in a family not to have love, of course it will taste bland. The feeling of love gives a sense of belonging and caring between family members.

    A family that has mawadah in it must have positive things in that family. If you don’t have mawadah, your family won’t support each other because you don’t have love. In fact, infidelity can occur because there is no feeling of affection between partners. Families that have mawadah are not formed instantly, but are developed through a process of being nurtured through the love of husband, wife and children. Every family definitely wants a family that is mawadah, because it is a nature of every creature.

     

    3. Meaning of Warahmah

    Rahmah means sustenance, forgiveness, grace and mercy . The greatest blessing of course comes from Allah SWT. The family that receives the greatest grace is of course the family that has love, affection and also trust. A family that has warahmah is also not an instant process but a long enough process because it requires understanding to cover each other’s shortcomings and provide understanding.

    With patience and sacrifice from husband and wife, it will certainly make the family have warahmah or grace in it. From this process of patience, warahmah will be given by Allah SWT. as the highest form of love in a family. It should be noted that warahmah will not appear if in the family there is mutual disobedience between husband and wife. Families must be calm, peaceful, and have love so that warahmah can be realized.

    Characteristics of Sakinah Mawaddah Warahmah

    Families who have sakinah mawadah warahmah certainly have visible characteristics or characteristics. Here are some characteristics of a family that has sakinah mawadah warahmah, namely:

    • Have calm, serenity and peace in a family.
    • Have love, affection and a sense of belonging that is always maintained among family members.
    • Having love that leads to Allah SWT and also values ​​in religion, not just love of creatures or just lust.
    • Far from suspicion, distrust and also feelings of misgivings with your partner.
    • Can maintain association in Islam, no rules are violated in marriage including infidelity.
    • Have their respective roles as family members with sincerity and sincerity. The role that belongs to both the husband as the head of the family, the wife as the mother who carries out the mandate of the husband and children as a mandate from Allah SWT to be educated properly.
    • Can maintain aspects of faith and worship between each family member, not destroying or plunging each other.
    • Supporting work or profession between partners to be able to create a family that is built as a mandate from Allah SWT.
    • Can meet the needs of the family including sustenance, sexual needs and also a sense of belonging to one another.

    Tips for Sakinah Mawaddah Warahmah to Realize

    According to Kiai Djamaluddin, there are five things that husbands and wives need to do to achieve a sakinah, mawaddah and rahmah household. Namely as follows:

    1. Forgive each other so that marriage is sakinah mawaddah warahmah 

    If a husband or wife makes a mistake, or there is a misunderstanding between the two of them, they must be willing to forgive each other and not hold grudges. So that the relationship that was strained due to quarrels can return to harmony.

    2. Mutual respect 

    Respect each other to achieve a sakinah mawadah warahmah household. In this case, the wife respects her husband’s busyness at work and the husband respects his wife’s busyness in managing the household. Even if what your partner doesn’t like, you still have to respect it. Mutual respect also includes respecting the privacy of partners, friends of partners and treating partners well as equal partners in life.

    3. Protect and remind each other in kindness.

    If the husband or wife makes a mistake, it is the partner’s duty to remind and invite them back to the path of goodness. Likewise in terms of protecting against evil, our duty as husbands or wives is to protect our partners from falling into immorality or evil. As wives, we are obliged to keep the living that our husbands provide clean and blessed. Do not let him give us a living from work that is not lawful. Reminding and protecting each other may be easy to say but hard to do.

    4. Deliberation in finding solutions to problems

    In solving problems or doing something that concerns the common interest, it should be discussed in advance with your partner so that there will be no bickering in the future. Because the essence of marriage is to share life with the partner we choose.

    Benefits of Sakinah Mawaddah Warahmah for Families

    Family is the relationship between families, namely father, mother and children. But it’s not just that relationship in the family, there are relationships that are no less important too, namely the relationship in society and their duties. Allah SWT does not create anything unless there is a benefit. A family that is sakinah mawadah warahmah is of course a priority for realizing family goals in society. And of course also an Islamic family will be realized.

    1. Carry out the Mission of the Human Caliphate

    Humans were created by Allah SWT solely to worship Him. With a family that has sakinah mawadah warahmah, of course it can guide, condition and support the family to always worship Allah SWT. In a family like this, every member, both husband, wife and children, must guide each other in terms of religion and kindness. A family that is sakinah mawadah warahmah does not only love the world but also loves Allah SWT. This has been written in QS AZ Zariyat verse 56:

    Amen

    Wa maa khalaqtul jinna wal insa illaa liya’buduun.

    Meaning: ” I did not create jinn and humans except that they worship Me.” (QS Az-Zariyat: 56).

    Allah SWT also created humans as Khalifah fil ard. This means that humans were created to build and carry out several things that can provide benefits for prosperity on earth. Benefits can be given with the position you have now with the profession you have too.

    The mission of the caliphate can be carried out with enthusiasm if you have a family that is sakinah mawadah warahmah. If there is a career between husband and wife, they will not bring each other down, let alone distance them from Allah SWT. Having a career is of course beneficial for yourself and for other people who are affected by it from us.

    2. Lots of worship and pious charity

    Allah SWT commands humans to protect themselves and their families from the fires of hell. This means that humans are commanded to stay away from the fire of hell and to multiply good deeds and good deeds. This is not going to be easy if you do it yourself. Therefore, the existence of a sakinah mawadah warahmah family or a good family is certainly in accordance with the expectations of Allah SWT so that it becomes a field of worship and good deeds for because there are many things that can be done with the family. This has been written in QS At-Tahrim verse 6:

    يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ​​ٱلَّذِينَ ءَامَنُوا۟ قُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَكُمْ وَأَهْلِيكُمْ نَارًا وَقُودُهَا ٱلنَّاسُ وَٱلْحِجَارَةُ عَلَيْهَا مَلَٰٓئِكَةٌ غِلَاظٌ شِدَادٌ لَّا يَعْصُونَ ٱللَّهَ مَآ أَمَرَهُمْ وَيَفْعَلُونَ مَا يُؤْمَرُونَ

    Yā ayyuhallażīna āmanụ qū anfusakum wa ahlīkum nāraw wa qụduhan-nāsu wa-ḥijāratu ‘alaihā malā`ikatun gilāẓun syidādul lā ya’ṣụnallāha māarahum wa yaf’alụna mā yu`marụn.

    Meaning: “ O you who believe, protect yourselves and your families from the fires of hell whose fuel is humans and stones; guardians of angels who are rough, hard, and do not disobey Allah in what He commands them and always do what is commanded. ” (QS At-Tahrim: 6).

    Raising children in Islam is also part of the fields of worship and good deeds. Good deeds are only beneficial for families who are cared for with love, affection and sincerity in them. To do this, we need a family that has sakinah mawadah warahmah to be able to worship and do good deeds as much as possible.

    A father who makes a living for his family by working will become his own field of merit. Likewise, a mother who takes care of her family and helps her husband support his family is a field of merit and good deeds. Likewise, the husband’s obligation to his wife is a separate reward for the husband’s family.

    3. Place in Reaping Love and Compassion

    Allah gives good sustenance, one of which is to please his family and descendants. This is of course something that is expensive in family ties, because not everyone can enjoy it. In fact, family, a sense of security and affection are the natural needs of all human beings. a pious woman and a pious man, is one form of family happiness. As in QS An-Nahl verse 72.

    وَٱللَّهُ جَعَلَ لَكُم مِّنْ أَنفُسِكُمْ أَزْوَٰجًا وَجَعَلَ لَكُم مِّنْ أَزْوَٰجِكُم بَنِينَ وَحَفَدَةً وَرَزَقَكُم مِّنَ ٱلطَّيِّبَٰتِ ۚ أَفَبِٱلْبَٰطِلِ يُؤْمِنُونَ وَبِنِعْمَتِ ٱللَّهِ هُمْ يَكْفُرُونَ

    Wallāhu ja’ala Lakum min anfusikum azwājaw wa ja’ala Lakum min azwājikum banīna wa ḥafadataw wa razaqakum minaṭ-ṭayyibāt, a fa bil-bāṭili yu`minụna wa bini’matillāhi hum yakfurụn.

    Meaning: ” God made for you wives from your own kind and made for you from your wives, children and grandchildren, and gave you sustenance from the good. So why do they believe in falsehood and deny Allah’s favor?”

    A family that is sakinah mawadah warahmah can meet the needs of its members. These needs start from a calm soul, peace, sustenance in the form of wealth, love, sexual relations with a partner, honor and of course other forms of worship that can be practiced in family charity.

    The wife is the husband’s mission otherwise. Because marriage in Islam is based on the name of Allah SWT. So building a household is not only a husband’s or wife’s obligation, but an obligation to Allah SWT. The name of the household must have a test. Each household test is different. With religious values, the test can be overcome until the test disappears. Sakinah mawadah warahmah not only for the world but for the hereafter. Towards the happiness of Allah SWT, namely the happiness of the hereafter.

    If you want to have a Sakinah Mawaddah Warahmah family, then Sinaumed’s must have sufficient knowledge to start a household. Sinaumed’s can of course read the book as a reference and get the book which is available at www.sinaumedia.com. As #FriendsWithoutLimits we always try to give the best!

    Related Articles & Book Recommendations

    Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

  • What is Respiration in Plants and Humans

    What is Respiration in Plants and Humans

    Respiration is one of the systems in the human body. The respiratory system is also known as the respiratory system which has a vital role for humans. However, did Sinaumed’s know that the term respiration does not only occur in humans, but also occurs in plants.

    The term respiration can also be interpreted as a process to produce energy by breaking down complex molecules which can then be simple molecules, so that they can be used by cells. So what is the difference in respiration that occurs by humans and plants? What’s the explanation? Check out this article to find out more about respiration.

    Respiration is Taking Oxygen from Free Air

    Respiration can be interpreted as the process of taking oxygen or O2 from free air when someone inhales. The inhaled oxygen will then pass through the airways or bronchi to the walls of the air sacs or alveoli.

    In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), respiration is the binding of oxygen by the blood droplets to provide materials for the whole body through the respiratory surface (lungs, gills) in animals while simultaneously releasing carbon dioxide.

    After arriving at the alveoli, oxygen will be sent to the blood vessels in which there is a flow of red blood cells to be carried to cells in other organs of the body as energy and also as a metabolic process.

    The rest of this metabolic process, especially carbon dioxide or CO2, will be carried by the blood to be thrown back into the air. Air removal will be carried out through the lungs when exhaling.

    Respiration is also defined as gas exchange between an individual and the environment or the whole process of gas exchange between the atmosphere and blood and between blood and body cells.

    The respiratory system is an organ system that has the function of taking oxygen from the atmosphere into the body’s cells with the aim of transferring the carbon dioxide produced by the body’s cells back into the atmosphere.

    In addition, the respiratory organs also function for speech production and play a role in acid-base balance, fighting foreign bodies, body defense and hormonal regulation of blood pressure.

    Anatomy of the Respiratory Tract

    The respiratory system is divided into two channels, namely the upper respiratory tract and the lower respiratory tract. The upper airway consists of the nasal cavities, larynx and pharynx. Meanwhile, the lower airways consist of the bronchi, trachea, and lungs. To be clearer, the following is an explanation of the anatomy of the respiratory tract.

    1. Upper Respiratory Tract

    The following is an explanation of the organs in the upper respiratory tract.

    a. Nose over naso

    The nose or naso is the first respiratory tract. When the breathing process occurs, the inspired air from the nasal cavity will undergo three processes, namely filtration, warming, and humidification.

    The nose consists of several parts, including the outer wall which is made up of skin, the middle layer which is made up of muscles and cartilage, and the inner layer which is made up of multiple mucous membranes or nasal corals (konka nasalis). There are three nasal turbinates, namely the middle, inferior and superior nasal turbinates.

    Between the nasal conchae, there are 3 meatal indentations, namely the superior meatus, inferior meatus and middle meatus. These three meatus are passed by breathing air. Then, on the inside there is a hole associated with the pharynx and is known as the choana.

    The base of the nasal cavity, formed by the maxilla to the top of the nasal cavity is connected with the paranasal sinus cavity and maxillary sinus in the maxilla, the frontal sinus in the forehead bone, the sphenoidal sinus in the wedge bone cavity and the ethmoidal sinus in the sieve bone cavity.

    In the ethmoidal sinus, the olfactory nerve endings will exit which lead to the nasal concha. In the nasal concha there are olfactory cells located at the top. In the nasal mucosa there are nerve fibers or receptors from the olfactory nerve or it is called the olfactory nerve.

    The left and right conchae as well as the top of the palate have a vascular opening that connects the pharynx with the middle auditory cavity. This channel is also known as the auditory eustachian tube which connects the middle ear to the pharynx and larynx. The nose is also connected to the tear ducts or is called the lacrimal tube.

    The nasal cavity is lined with a mucous membrane which contains blood vessels and is referred to as the nasal mucosa. Mucus will be secreted continuously by goblet cells that line the surface of the nasal mucosa and move backwards to the nasopharynx by the movement of the cilia.

    b. pharynx

    The pharynx is a muscular tube that runs from the base of the skull to its junction with the esophagus at the level of the cricoid cartilage. The pharynx itself consists of several parts, namely the nasopharynx, oropharynx, and laryngopharynx.

    The nasopharynx is located immediately behind the nasal cavity, below the cranial base and in front of the first and second cervical vertebrae. The nasopharynx opens anteriorly into the nasal cavity and downwards into the oropharynx.

    The oropharynx is where the oral cavity meets the pharynx. The oropharynx is a combination of the respiratory and digestive systems, food enters from the mouth and air enters from the nasopharynx and lungs.

    The laryngopharynx is the part of the pharynx that is immediately behind the larynx and the upper end of the esophagus.

    c. Larynx or throat

    The larynx or throat is the airway that acts as a voice former. At the base it is closed by a throat cavity called the epiglottis which consists of cartilage which has a function when swallowing food by covering the larynx.

    Located on the midline at the front of the neck, precisely under the skin of the thyroid gland and several small muscles that are in front of the laryngopharynx and the top of the esophagus.

    The larynx has 4 cartilages or cartilages and consists of thyroid cartilage, epiglottis cartilage, cricoide cartilage, arytenoid cartilage.

    The larynx is covered by a mucous membrane except for the vocal cords and the epiglottis which are covered by stratified epithelial cells.

     

    2. Lower Airway

    The following is an explanation of the organs in the lower respiratory tract.

    a. Trachea or windpipe

    The trachea, or windpipe, is a flexible tube about 10 cm long and 2.5 cm wide. The trachea runs from the cricoid cartilage down the front of the neck, then behind the manubrium sterni and ends at the level of the sternal angle or about the level of the fifth thoracic vertebra and here the trachea divides into two bronchi.

    The trachea is composed of 16 to 20 incomplete rings which are cartilaginous rings held together by fibrous tissue and complete loops behind the trachea. Apart from that, the trachea also makes up some muscle tissue.

    b. Bronchus

    Bronchus is formed from halves of two trachea and has a similar structure to the trachea which is lined by the same type of cells. The bronchi run downward and sideways towards the lung flaps.

    The right bronchus tends to be shorter and narrower and more vertical than the left, and is slightly higher than the pulmonary artery and gives off its main branches below the artery and is called the lower lobe bronchus.

    c. Lungs

    The lungs are an organ that consists mostly of small bubbles called alveoli. Alveoli is a place for gas exchange assinus which consists of bronchioles and respiratory which sometimes have small air sacs on their walls.

    Respiratory System Physiology: Respiratory Process

    Respiration is divided into two parts, namely the external respiration section, where the process of exchanging oxygen with carbon dioxide to and from the lungs into the oxygen enters the blood and CO2 + H20 enters the lungs towards the blood. Then excreted by the body.

    The second part is internal respiration or cellular respiration where there is a process of exchanging O2 with CO2 events at the biochemical cell level for life processes.

    Part of the Respiratory Process

    The breathing process consists of two parts, as follows.

    a. Pulmonary ventilation

    Pulmonary ventilation is the entry and exit of airflow between the atmosphere and the alveoli of the lungs that occurs through a breathing process, namely inspiration and expiration.

    Therefore, there will be diffusion of oxygen and carbon dioxide gases between the alveoli and the pulmonary capillaries as well as the transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide through the blood to and from the tissue cells.

    b. Breathing mechanic

    Respiratory mechanics can be interpreted as the entry and exit of air from the atmosphere to the lungs which is made possible by mechanical respiratory events, namely inspiration and expiration.

    Inspiration or inhalation is the entry of oxygen from the atmosphere and carbon dioxide into the airways. In abdominal breathing inspiration, the diaphragm muscle will experience contraction and the dome of the diaphragm drops or returns to a flat position.

    Furthermore, the external intercostal muscle space will pull the chest wall slightly outward, so that the volume of the lungs will increase and the pressure in the lungs will decrease and be lower than the outside environment. That way, air from outside will enter into the lungs.

    Expiration or exhalation is the release of carbon dioxide from the lungs into the atmosphere through the airways. If abdominal breathing occurs, the diaphragm muscle will rise back to its original position or bend.

    Then, the internal intercostal muscles relax. As a result, pressure occurs and the space inside the chest shrinks, so that the chest wall enters the air, then exits through the lungs. This is because the pressure in the lungs increases.

    Respiration Process in Humans and Plants

    Respiration according to biology is a mobilization process carried out by living things through the breakdown of High Energy Compounds (SET) and is used to carry out living functions.

    The term respiration can be equated with breathing, but the term respiration includes processes that are not only covered by the term breathing. Respiration occurs at all levels of living organisms, from the individual to the smallest unit, namely the cell.

    If breathing is usually associated with using oxygen as a breakdown compound, then respiration need not involve oxygen. In general, respiration is an oxidation process experienced by SET as a chemical energy storage unit in living organisms.

    SET is like a sugar or fatty acid molecule and is usually broken down with the help of enzymes and some simple molecules. Because this process is an exothermic reaction or releases energy, then the released energy will be captured by ADP or NADP and form ATP or NADPH.

    Then, an endothermic biochemical reaction takes place which requires energy to be supplied to meet its energy needs from the last two groups of compounds. Most of the respiration that can be witnessed by humans requires oxygen as an oxidizing agent. This reaction is known as aerobic respiration.

    However, many respiration processes do not involve oxygen and are usually known as the process of making alcohol by the yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae . Various types of anaerobic bacteria use sulfur or compounds or some metals as oxidizing agents. Respiration is also carried out in unit cells. The process of respiration in eukaryotic organisms occurs in mitochondria, among others.

    Respiration in Humans

    Respiration in humans is a step in the process of taking in oxygen and removing the remains in the form of carbon dioxide and water vapor. Oxygen is needed by all body cells in biochemical reactions or biological oxidation to be able to produce energy in the form of Adenosine Tri Phosphate or ATP.

    This reaction can produce residual substances in the form of carbon dioxide and water vapor which are then exhaled. So basically, the purpose of respiration is actually to form ATP which is needed for all activities in human life.

    Based on the place, the exchange of oxygen gas with carbon dioxide can be divided into two, including external breathing or also known as external respiration, namely the exchange of oxygen in the alveoli with carbon dioxide in the blood.

    Then the second is deep breathing or internal respiration, namely the exchange of oxygen gas with carbon dioxide from the bloodstream with body cells.

    Respiration is related to the regulation of breathing and humans have two separate neural mechanisms that regulate breathing. One system is responsible for regulating voluntary breathing while the other system is responsible for controlling automatic breathing.

    Control by the central nervous rhytminitis in the medulla oblongata directly regulates the respiratory muscles. Medullary activity is influenced by the apneustic center as well as pneumotax. A person’s awareness to breathe is controlled by the cerebral cortex.

    The respiratory center is in the Medullary Rhythmicity Area, namely the area of ​​inspiration and expiration that regulates the basic rhythm of respiration, the pneumotaxic area which is located at the top of the pons and functions to help coordinate the transition between inspiration and expiration, sending inhibitory impulses to the inspiratory area of ​​the expanding lungs and apneustic The area whose function is to help coordinate the transition between inspiration and expiration and to transmit exhibition impulses to the area of ​​inspiration.

    Respiratory control chemically, influenced by PaO2, pH and PaCO2. The chemoreceptor center, medulla, responds to chemical changes in the CSF due to chemical changes in the blood.

    Respiration in plants

    As has been explained that respiration occurs in every living thing and does not occur only in humans, but also in plants. Respiration reaction is a catabolic reaction capable of breaking down sugar molecules into inorganic molecules in the form of CO2 and H2O.

    Respiration is a process of taking in oxygen to break down organic compounds into carbon dioxide and H2O and energy. However, respiration is essentially a redox reaction, in which a substrate is oxidized to carbon dioxide. Meanwhile, oxygen absorbed as an oxidizing agent will experience reduction to H2O.

    Respiration in plants can also be interpreted as a process of releasing energy stored in energy source substances through chemical processes using oxygen. From respiration, it will produce chemical energy in the form of ATP for life activities such as anabolism or synthesis, movement and growth.

    That is the explanation of respiration is a respiration process carried out by living things through the breakdown of high-energy compounds or SET used by living things to carry out their life functions.

  • What is repost: Understanding and how to do it

    What is repost: Understanding and how to do it

    What is repost – Now social media is a place to connect with outsiders online, and is also used for various things, such as entertainment, seeking information, and looking for work. So, it’s not surprising that the use of terms in social media is already familiar, for example, the term ‘repost’ . So, does Sinaumed’s know what repost means?

    Yes, maybe someone already knows, but there are also those who don’t understand what repost is. In social media platforms, repost has the same function. Social media users often use this repost for a specific purpose, the platform that is often used is usually Instagram , although several other social media are also actively used.

    Repost itself has several functions for its users. Quoted from the Cambridge Dictionary , the word repost means an activity carried out by social media users, such as posting something on social media. For example, by reposting something belonging to a social media user.

    Maybe almost everyone has memorized the workings of this repost feature , but there are also some people who don’t understand the use of repost on social media.

    So, for those of you who are curious, what exactly is a repost? The following is a review of the meaning of repost in general and the use of repost in every social media. And how? Come on, let’s look at the following explanation!

    Meaning of Repost

    As many people already know, the repost function on various platforms is almost the same. The meaning of repost is an activity or activity carried out by social media users by selecting a particular post to be reloaded or redistributed.

    Even though almost everyone already knows how the repost feature works , there are still many who don’t understand what repost means. To make it easier to remember, repost activities, for example, someone has posted writing or uploaded videos or photos in the past. Then, in the future, he wants to re-upload his post, so he needs to mark the post with a repost or re-upload at a different time.

    However, in its method, the repost function is not exactly the same as the term used in general, because the use of each social media is different in how to post or how to repost it, but overall repost is done in almost the same way. So, you can see every function and understanding of repost on every social media that you will use.

    Because, in this digital era, social media is already attached and widely used by many people for various activities and alternative media , such as entertainment, searching for information, and looking for job vacancies.

     

    How to Repost on Several Social Media

    pixabay

    1. Repost on Instagram (IG) & How to Post it

    After knowing the meaning of repost in general, then what is the meaning of repost in the world of social media? What function and meaning are the same?

    Yes, like social media Instagram, repost means a feature provided by IG for its users, which later functions to re-upload other people’s or friends’ posts.

    So, the repost function on Instagram doesn’t upload old posts, right, which might be the repost function on other applications in the form of reposting old posts. However, on Instagram media, reposting also means re-uploading posts belonging to friends or other people, whether in the form of video posts, photos, screenshots, writing, both old and new.

    Here’s how to repost on Instagram media that you need to know.

    A. Repost Instagram Feed to Story

    1. Choose the video, photo or article that you will repost on the feed .
    2. Then, click on the paper airplane icon below, this icon is next to the comments and likes.
    3. Then, several options will appear for sending, so you click Add post your story.
    4. After that, the page will be brought to the IG story view, where you can edit the content to be uploaded, such as adding text, stickers, gifts, and so on.
    5. Then, select send to , the icon is in the lower right corner. Then select your story , and the content has been uploaded.

    B. Repost Instagram Stories 

    To create an IG story, first, you open your Direct Message or DM.

    1. Look for messages that go into DMs, messages that mention you or you can also see them directly on the notification icon.
    2. Select Add to your story which is under the Ig story of your account, then the page will appear in the story view, and you can add stickers, text, and so on.
    3. Then, press send to and click your story

    2. Repost on Twitter & How to Post it

    Then, the use of social media such as Twitter also has the term repost . Not much different from IG or Instagram, a repost on Twitter is an activity of re-uploading or commonly called a retweet . This retweet allows you to be able to share it with your followers or other users. There is also a built-in retweet feature which can be used to share other people’s tweets with everyone.

    Here’s how to repost via Twitter social media that you can do:

    1. The first step, open the Twitter application or official access from Twitter.
    2. Then, log in using your account.
    3. choose the post that will be reposted or retweeted on your Twitter homepage.
    4. Then, click the icon in the middle (retweet), on the post to be retweeted.
    5. After that, click the icon in the middle, then automatically, the post has been reposted on the homepage of your Twitter account.

    3. Repost on Facebook & How to Post it

    Then, the last on Facebook media. The meaning of repost on social media is almost the same as Twitter. This repost feature is also available on the Facebook app. So, how it works, you only need to copy first then repost the content.

    With this feature, of course it makes it easier for users to deploy it practically and quickly. You can repost a photo, video, or link. Here’s how to repost on Facebook that you can do:

    1. First, open the Facebook application on your cellphone, or you can access it on the official Facebook website to log in .
    2. Then, choose which posts you will copy and repost on your FB feed.
    3. Then, click the ‘share’ button below the post.
    4. Then, click ‘share this status’ , if you want the post to be in text form.
    5. You can also manage who can see your repost, by clicking the ‘custom’ icon below the post menu. Then, select or click ‘share this status’.
    6. Then, in the next step, you can set other users, namely setting other people to be able to see reposts, or hiding reposts from other users.
    7. Then, click ‘ share status’ to repost, then the content will be uploaded again.

    So, those are some of the meanings of repost that you need to know, both the meaning in general and the meaning in several social media applications, as well as how to use repost in social media applications such as Instagram, Twitter and Facebook.

    How to Share Posts on Instagram

    IG media or Instagram has indeed become the most popular social media among the others, now many people use Instagram as a medium for various things, such as doing business, and doing promotions.

    Now, Instagram is never empty of users, in fact it is increasing, every day, many people post on Instagram media. Not only on feeds, but uploading on Instagram stories is also very popular.

    Through stories, you can share posts such as videos or photos within 24 hours, after that the posts will disappear. You can also share Instagram posts to Stories for many people to see.

    So, how to share Instagram posts to Story can be used for a product or business promotion. From posts on Instagram stories, posts on the feed are also very easy to reach for all Instagram users. Because, the appearance of posts on the timeline usually changes frequently, and can sink faster due to piles of posts by other users.

    Then, how do you share Instagram posts to Stories? Let’s look at the reviews below.

    1. Sharing Instagram Post to Story

    Now, various posts exist on Instagram, but the fact is, there are still many people who don’t really understand how to use it. When in fact, sharing Instagram posts to Stories is very easy and simple, with just a few steps.

    This method can be used for both new and old posts. If you want to try it, you can follow the steps below:

    1. Open Instagram social media on your smartphone , then make sure you have logged in with the correct account.
    2. Then, you will be on the Instagram homepage, then the profile section, and select the post you want to share, you can also make it directly from videos or photos.
    3. After determining the selected post, also pay attention to the image icon or options below the video or photo post.
    4. Then, click the paper airplane icon at the bottom right.
    5. Then, there will be a notification or notification, which provides several options to choose from, such as add to story or send to other users.
    6. Select the add post to your story option or add to story.
    7. Then, your smartphone screen display will access the story feature according to the post to be uploaded in the story, and its position is in the middle. In this step, you can add various edits, such as tagging other users, adding text, locations, gifts, and so on.
    8. After the editing process is complete, you can immediately send the post like posting the usual IG Story. You can also set Instagram story posts for only a few people or all followers.

    2. Sharing Instagram Posts From Other Accounts to Story

    Generally, users post in their own feed, sharing Instagram story posts can also be done for other accounts. That is, you can share other people’s posts on your Instagram story.

    Things like this can be used if you do business via Instagram. You can promote something on your business Instagram account. It can reach many followers and users.

    How do you post other users’ content on our Instagram story?

    The method is very easy, maybe some people already know a lot. For those of you who might want to try it, try to follow the steps below:

    1. The first step, log in to Instagram on your smartphone, then make sure you are logged in with the correct account.
    2. If the post is in the form of a timeline , you can immediately click on the paper airplane image, which is below the content.
    3. However, if what you are going to post is not on the timeline , you can first visit the personal account of the post owner. To make the search easier, just type the account name in the search field. Then, click on the intended account to go to their profile page.
    4. If you have entered the person’s profile page, select or search for the content you want to share on Instagram Story.
    5. If you have found it, click again on the paper airplane image below the post.
    6. Then, a notification will appear along with other options, such as add post to your story or add to story, or send another user.
    7. Then, you select the add post to your story option or add to story.
    8. That way, the display on your smartphone screen will open by accessing the story feature in the middle with the content to be uploaded. In this step, you can carry out the editing process such as adding stickers, gifts, locations, text, and so on.
    9. After the editing process, you can immediately send the content like posting Instagram Stories in general.
    10. You can also set the content to be shared only for close friends or for all followers.

    However, it should also be noted, this method of sharing content from other people’s accounts may not be possible, if the account owner does not allow it to be shared, so it depends on the account owner’s settings. If the account owner restricts other users from sharing their content.

    3. Posting Other People’s Instagram Stories on Your Own Account

    Apart from the two methods above, you can also share other users’ stories by reposting . How to repost Instagram stories is also fairly easy, but reposting on Instagram media can only be done if the story maker’s account marks your account or tags it. Here’s how to repost other people’s IG stories to your own account:

    1. The first step, open a story that mentions you or tags your account.
    2. Automatically, the display on the story screen will have the option ‘Add This To Your Story’ or ‘Add to Your Story’ , so click that option.
    3. Then, you will be in the IG story view of your own account. Then, as usual, you can do the editing process, add stickers, text, gifts, emojis, and so on.
    4. When you’ve finished editing, you can immediately post the content like making a normal IG story.

    Those are a few reviews and how to share content or posts on Instagram media practically and easily. Hopefully this information is useful.

    Apart from being easy to use, now the Instagram application has indeed been used by many people for various purposes, one of which is to do business and carry out product promotions, and get profits through online media.

     

    Closing

    Yes, social media does have a myriad of benefits for our daily lives, it can even help you interact, get information, add insight, as entertainment, to do business to benefit from social media.

    However, excessive use of social media also has a negative impact on its users. Therefore, we as users of social media must be wise and remember the time and interact directly with the environment, so that we are not overly influenced by social media.

    If you want to find books about using social media as a whole, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Veronika Novi 


    Reference:

    • https://www.allstars.id/blog/2022/05/28/repost-artinya/
    • https://plus.kapallagi.com/arti-repost-pengertian-generally-dan-caranya-di-every-media-social-bcbace.html
    • https://www.gubukpintar.com/2020/12/arti-repost.html?m=1
    • https://communication.binus.ac.id/2017/12/29/media-social-dalam-kehidupan-sehari-hari/
  • What is POV? What’s the Difference between POV in Fictional Stories and Social Media?

    What is POV? What’s the Difference between POV in Fictional Stories and Social Media?

    What is POV? – The term POV has recently become more and more used on any social media. Then what exactly does POV mean on social media? Let’s check out the following reviews!

    Social media continues to grow with all its technology and also in terms of literacy. Social media does have its own language or terms that are popularly used by its users.

    Of the many languages ​​used on social media, from Facebook, Twitter, Instagram to Tiktok, all of them can quickly become viral and are increasingly being used by everyone.

    One of the terms that is often used on Tiktok is POV. At first glance, hearing POV, we can understand that POV is a term that is in a film or a story, so what does POV mean in Tiktok? Here’s the review!

    What is POV? POV meaning

    Ever heard of the term POV? If you still remember Indonesian language lessons or you often watch movies, then you must be familiar with the term point of view or point of view.

    In language, point of view has the meaning of point of view, which is usually the point of view of a writer for his writing or work. This is done with the hope that the audience understands the intent and feeling of the writer or creator of the work.

    POV in social media means the point of view from the creator’s side through the videos and photos uploaded. Judging from its use on social media, in general, content owners want to position the audience in the position of the content owner.

    For example, a video post shows a concert situation with the owner of the video and his girlfriend. Then the creator of the video wrote the POV caption : When everything is fine .

    From this situation, it can be concluded that the creator’s intention in writing the POV was so that the audience could feel the times before the pandemic and could still watch concerts freely. In addition, if it is known that the creator is no longer dating, then there is a possibility that the POV in question is when he has not broken up with his girlfriend.

    The term that started going viral from Tiktok is now also often found in captions on any social media. Of course the term POV is not new anymore, even Ariana Grande, the famous singer from America, also made a song with the same title and tells about loving yourself from another person’s point of view.

    In a literary work, POV itself has several different types depending on how it is depicted according to what the author wants.

    POV Types In Fictional Stories

    If you look at it in terms of literary works such as novels and other stories, POV is divided into 3 types. Determining the point of view in a work is entirely at the will of the author.

    1. First Person Viewpoint (POV 1)

    What is meant by POV 1? If you often read novels, both fiction and non-fiction, then you are certainly no stranger to seeing the use of the first person point of view. POV 1 is a story that tells itself or the story of the author. In the first person point of view use ‘I’ as the main role.

    This first-person point of view usually builds a feeling as if the reader is experiencing something similar to the main character, because it uses ‘me’ as the center of the story.

    The following is an example of a story fragment using the first person point of view.

    I already feel calm and safe in Wonokromo. Robert was never seen. Mama and Annelies paid him no heed. Even so that does not mean I should feel I have replaced his position. I put all my power into impressing outsiders, I’m not a bandit, nor do I intend to bandit. And that I’m just a guest who has to go every time.

       And the night after studying this I deliberately did not write. There is a desire to continue studying after the break. I don’t know why I study hard now. Want to get ahead in school. Certainly not because of family pressure or Annelies.

       The encouragement was also not due to Mother’s letters which always asked if this self was hampered by difficulties. I replied to his fourth letter, to express my leeway, so that my monthly allowance should go to my younger siblings.

    – Earth of Mankind, Pramoedya Ananta Toer

    From the piece from Pramoedya Ananta Toer’s Earth of Mankind story above, it can be concluded that the writer uses ‘I’ as the main character who succeeds in making the reader feel like Minke throughout the story.

    2. Second Person Point of View (POV 2)

    If in POV 1 the author is involved in the story a lot by using ‘I’, then on the other hand in POV 2. The second person point of view uses ‘you’ as the main role, so it is very rare for a story to use POV 2, but some works like in the article will often use POV 2 with you, you, or even you.

    There are not many examples of stories from a second person point of view, especially in Indonesian novels. Several novels such as Lorrie Moore’s with his book How to Become a Writer and Camping Out by Ernest Hemingway still use POV 2. Another example of a story with POV 2 is as follows.

    The sun was starting to rise, calling for hot air that was increasingly blowing. You look at your watch and it’s eleven in the afternoon and now you’re not even halfway to Central Park. There are still many more blocks that must be taken with your old vehicle that looks like it can’t run anymore. What a long and frustrating day! you say.

    Some articles that discuss tutorials on how to do something will tend to use the second person point of view.

    Living in a developed country like countries in Europe there does seem fun and even a desire for some people, both for careers and for education. Are you one of them? If you are interested in continuing your career, studying and even living abroad, then you might need tips on how to migrate to other countries with a minimal budget. Here are the tips for you!

    From the example article above, it can be concluded that the use of the second person point of view, namely ‘you’, will feel much better in an article than in a story that feels stiff. The pronoun ‘you’ which is the reader itself will seem to make the writer communicate with the reader, so it will feel more real when applied to works such as articles, speeches and others.

    3. Third Person Point of View (POV 3)

    In the third person point of view, the author positions himself as if he knows everything that happens in the whole story. In POV 3, the author generally uses the name of the main character and several other characters.

    POV 3 is also divided into two types, namely limited and all-knowing third-person perspectives.

    Limited POV 3

    In this point of view, the writer really knows everything that happens to the characters throughout the story, but the writer does not know the details and is only based on outside observations.

    The following is an example of a story fragment with a limited third point of view.

    When Natan entered the apartment where he had been living in New York for four days, Akbar was already there. Watching soccer news on TV while eating premium eel chips that he managed to find, even though as Natan recalls, he had hidden the jar of chips in his desk drawer in his room.

    “Hey! Nathan Circumcised!”

    Rehanda Harris appeared from behind Natan’s back, then looked inside.

    “Wei Bar! Akbar Surakbar! Just arrived!” Rehan exclaimed again.

    And indeed that was how Akbar called the two men of Sundanese ethnicity. He originally gave the formula for the name Dungung Tekudungdung to both of them. The problem is that the name Natan doesn’t feel good.

    “Help me carry it, Nat! Come on in! Rehan said again, handing one of the plastic groceries he was carrying to Natan.

    -The Case We Met, Flavia

    POV 3 All Know

    Almost the same as the limited third point of view, the author knows everything that happens to each character, but in a much more detailed context. In this POV, the writer can know the thoughts and hearts of all the characters in the story as if the writer were a god.

    Gadis Parasayu, a public relations manager at a branch of Biocell Pharmacy Indonesia (BPI), got a new position that required her to move to their head office in Jakarta. As a public relations manager for BPI’s newest flagship product called Dhemoticyl, he is required to be able to work with the BPI celebrity who holds the title of The Most Eligible Bachelor in Indonesia.

       Troy Mardian, Dhemoticyl’s senior marketing manager, didn’t like the newcomer one bit. He was sure this Girl’s new career would end up like the previous PR managers who resigned in no time because they couldn’t work with her.

       The girl and Troy hate each other from the first sight. In the eyes of Troy’s white-headed style girl who is dandy and song aristocratic, making the man very artificial. Not to mention Troy’s infatuation with designer label items, as well as his habit of always speaking in English, making girls increasingly disgusted with the man’s behavior.

    As for Troy, the girl’s infatuation with local fashion products, made his forehead furrow sharply at how untrendy her tastes were. Not to mention her love for Indonesian food, which managed to make her stomach churn when she had to witness eating Padang food on the side of the road using her hands, without spoons and forks. How unhygienic that is!

    -Love, Hate and Hocus Pocus, Karla M. Nashar

    The use of POV 1, POV 2 and POV 3 often confuses novice writers, because in some stories the author sometimes uses more than 1 point of view. For example, at the beginning of the story the writer uses POV 1 to tell the story of the main character, then to explain the other characters the writer uses POV 3.

    Is it OK to use more than 1 point of view? Of course you can, as long as the story remains interesting and you can apply it accordingly. Some talented writers sometimes use several points of view to get a ‘feel’ in the stories they write.

    This is also sometimes not realized by the readers, because the readers have entered into the story regardless of the point of view used. That means the story is successful in making the reader feel the same way as the author of the story.

    How to Choose a Viewpoint?

    Want to write your own story? then it’s time for you to start thinking about which point of view you will present in your story later. For beginners, maybe determining the point of view is a little complicated and confusing.

    Therefore you can use the first person point of view (POV 1) to tell your story. This POV 1 is easy to apply and also effective for drawing readers into a story.

    Because in his narrative you explain in detail what the main character feels, sees and thinks, and you don’t have to bother observing other people’s points of view because it’s enough to use your point of view.

    If you feel that you are getting more adept at writing stories, then you can start trying to use POV 3 to provide a much more detailed description of the characters or other figures in the whole story.

    However, compared to POV 1 which can easily invite the reader to dive into the story, POV 3 tends to require more effort to be able to make the reader really feel the story like a writer. Because, there are many characters that break the focus of the reader.

    However, this does not rule out the possibility for novels with POV 3 to remain interesting and much-loved. Just mention a few examples of interesting novels by Tere Liye in the Earth, Moon, and other series using POV 3 but still being able to invite readers to fall into Tere Liye’s typical fantasy world.

    POV Differences in Social Media and Fictional Stories

    At first glance, you might already have a POV picture on these two different media. In social media, the point of view is usually written clearly ‘POV’ and then written together with the intention that the content creator wants.

    Whereas in fiction, POV is written using the pronouns ‘I’, ‘you’ and also the names of the characters that are written throughout the storyline. Even though the two have different ways of writing, POV in general has the same goal, namely to invite the reader to feel the same way as the author or creator of the work.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    Do you know what POV is?

    Now you know more about POV both in fictional stories and as social media expressions. To better understand the writing style of point of view in a story, the only way is to read a book or novel. From there you can feel the difference between novels that use the first person point of view and those that use the third person point of view. In English-language novels, POV 1 and POV 3 are often used to tell the story.

    If you are interested in reading novels or books in English, or even interested in the language, you can get recommendations for novels and books for learning English at sinaumedia!

    Or want to be a writer like Tere Liye, Dee Lestari, Ika Natassia. You can get a range of interesting novels with unique points of view! here are the recommendations for you!